JP2020072877A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of facilitating diversification of a display mode displayed on image display means.SOLUTION: A display control device 314 selects a display data table to be used according to a command from a voice lamp control device 313, and stores it in a display data table buffer 433b. Each time when drawing processing of one frame is completed, 1 is added to a pointer 433e. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, based on drawing contents prescribed in an address indicated by the pointer 433e, image contents to be drawn next are specified and a drawing list to be described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to an image controller 437, drawing of the image is instructed. Thus, according to update of the pointer 433e, drawing contents are specified in order prescribed in the display data table, so that images as prescribed in the display data table are displayed on a third pattern display device 281.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 28

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a slot machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a slot machine is configured to control the gaming machine by a main control means and a sub control means. For example, while the main control of the game is performed by the main control means, the sub-control means controls the display of the effect image on the image display means such as a liquid crystal display device provided in the gaming machine.

  Here, in the sub-control means in the conventional gaming machine, based on the reception of the command transmitted from the main control means, activates a program for displaying an effect image according to the command on the image display means, The display is controlled according to the program.

  On the other hand, in recent years, in order to further enhance the enjoyment of the game, there is a tendency that the effect images displayed on the image display means are diversified.

JP, 2006-223598, A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the program is configured to be started for each effect image to be displayed on the image display means, so that the start and execution of the program, which is complicated and enormous with the diversification of effect images, Since a large load is applied to the processing, there is a problem in that the processing capacity of the sub-control unit is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of easily diversifying display modes such as effect images displayed on an image display unit. The purpose is to do.

  In order to achieve this object, the slot machine according to claim 1 has a main control means for performing main control of a game, a sub control means for operating based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and a sub control for the sub control means. Image display means for displaying an image based on the control of the means, and the sub-control means comprises an image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and a plurality of display modes. First display determining means for determining a display type to be displayed for a command received from the main control means, and a plurality of display types provided for each of the display types and necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type. First prescribed information storage means for storing first prescribed information in which drawing information indicating information is prescribed for each screen, and the first prescribed information corresponding to the display type determined by the first display determination means. Selected from the first prescribed information storage means, first pointer means updated every time, and each time the first pointer means is updated, selected by the first selection means. Based on the first prescribed information, drawing information specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means, and for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means A drawing instruction information generating unit for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing unit to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information; and the image drawing unit generates the drawing instruction information generating unit. An image for one screen is drawn based on the drawing instruction information generated by.

  The game machine according to claim 2 is a main control means for performing main control of the game, a sub-control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and an image based on the control by the sub-control means. And an image display unit for displaying an image, wherein the sub-control unit is an image drawing unit for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display unit, and a main control unit from a plurality of display modes. A first display determining unit that determines a display type to be displayed for the received command, and drawing information that is provided for each of the plurality of display types and that indicates information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type. A first definition information storage unit that stores first definition information defined for each screen, and the first definition information corresponding to the display type determined by the first display determination unit from the first definition information storage unit. Based on the first defining information selected by the first selecting means, each time the first pointer means is updated every time the first pointer means is updated, , Drawing information specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means, and the image drawing based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means And a drawing instruction information generating unit for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the unit to draw an image for one screen. The image drawing unit is configured to change the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating unit. Based on this, an image for one screen is drawn.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the sub control means includes a first image information storage means for storing a plurality of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing means. The drawing information specified for each screen in the first specifying information includes specific information for specifying image information necessary for drawing an image for the one screen, and the drawing instruction information generating means, Based on the drawing information for the one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means, image specifying information for specifying the image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen is specified from the specifying information included in the drawing information. And a plurality of image information stored in the first image information storage unit, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating unit. Among them, by using the image information indicated by the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information is for drawing an image for one screen.

  A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to the third aspect, in which the sub-control means can perform a read operation faster than the first image storage means and is stored in the first image storage means. Image information stored in the second image storage means, and the image drawing means stores the image information based on at least the image information stored in the second image storage means. The sub-control means draws an image to be displayed on the display means, and the sub-control means further uses one image information according to the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information when the image is drawn by the image drawing means. Before the image information is used, there is provided first transfer control means for controlling the transfer of the one image information from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein the display type is dynamic in which identification information is dynamically displayed on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command. Including a plurality of dynamic display effects to be displayed, the gaming machine, when the predetermined identification information appears by the dynamic display effects, for imparting a predetermined game value to the player, The first prescribed information storage means stores the first prescribed information for each of the plurality of dynamic display effects.

  The gaming machine according to claim 6 is the gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the main control means identifies the type of identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect, and the identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect. According to the dynamic display production, the dynamic display production determining unit that determines the production mode type of the dynamic display production, and the second notification of the production mode type of the dynamic display production determined by the dynamic display production determining unit. Command generation means for generating the command, and a third command generation means for generating a third command for notifying the type of the identification information to be revealed by the dynamic display effect determined by the dynamic display effect determining means. Means and command transmitting means for transmitting various generated commands to the sub control means, wherein the first display determining means is based on receiving the second command from the main control device. And the dynamic display effect corresponding to the effect mode type notified by the second command is determined to be displayed on the image display means, and the sub control means is transmitted from the main control device. Identification information determining means for determining the identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect based on receiving the third command; and the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determining means. A dynamic display determination means for determining whether the identification information determined by the identification information determination means is appropriate, and the first display determination means uses the dynamic display determination means for the dynamic display determination means. When it is determined that the display effect and the identification information are not appropriate, the dynamic display effect is changed to a dynamic display effect in an effect mode in which dynamic display that is invisible to the player is continuously performed. change

  Note that the dynamic display invisible to the player is, for example, a state in which the identification information is dynamically displayed at a high speed such that it is invisible to the player, or the identification information is reduced to an invisible degree and displayed. In addition, various states such as a state in which a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed so as to cover the identification information are displayed are included.

  According to the slot machine of the first aspect, in the sub control means, the first prescribed information storage means is provided for each of a plurality of display types and shows information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display types. The first definition information that defines the drawing information for each screen is stored, and the display type is displayed for the command received from the main control unit that is determined from the plurality of display modes by the first display determining unit. The corresponding first regulation information is selected from the first regulation information storage means by the first selection means. Further, the first pointer means is updated every time the time elapses, and every time the updating is performed, the first pointer means 1 corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the first regulation information selected by the first selecting means. The drawing information for the screen is specified by the drawing information specifying means, and the drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw the image for one screen is drawn based on the specified drawing information for the one screen. It is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, the image for one screen is drawn by the drawing image means. Thus, when the display type to be displayed for the command received from the main control means changes, the first regulation information corresponding to the display type can be easily displayed by selecting it from the first regulation information storage means. An image according to the type can be generated and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, there is an effect that a variety of display modes displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in the sub control means, the first prescribed information storage means is provided for each of a plurality of display types, and shows information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type. The first definition information that defines the drawing information for each screen is stored, and the display type is displayed for the command received from the main control unit that is determined from the plurality of display modes by the first display determining unit. The corresponding first regulation information is selected from the first regulation information storage means by the first selection means. Further, the first pointer means is updated every time the time elapses, and every time the updating is performed, the first pointer means 1 corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the first regulation information selected by the first selecting means. The drawing information for the screen is specified by the drawing information specifying means, and the drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw the image for one screen is drawn based on the specified drawing information for the one screen. It is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, the image for one screen is drawn by the drawing image means. Thus, when the display type to be displayed for the command received from the main control means changes, the first regulation information corresponding to the display type can be easily displayed by selecting it from the first regulation information storage means. An image according to the type can be generated and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, there is an effect that a variety of display modes displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved.

  According to the gaming machine described in claim 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine recited in claim 2, the following effect is exhibited. That is, in the sub-control unit, the first image information storage unit stores a plurality of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing unit. Further, the drawing information specified for each screen in the first specifying information includes the specifying information for specifying the image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen, and the drawing information specifying means Based on the identified drawing information for one screen, the drawing instruction information including the image instruction information for instructing the image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen is drawn based on the specific information included in the drawing information. It is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, based on the generated drawing instruction information, the image drawing means indicates the image information instructed by the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information among the plurality of image information stored in the first image information storage means. Is used to draw an image for one screen. As a result, various image types can be supported by specifying the image information necessary for drawing the image for one screen by the specifying information included in the drawing information specified for each screen in the first specifying information. The drawn image can be drawn and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the sub-control unit can perform a read operation faster than the first image storage unit, and can store the image information stored in the first image storage unit and rewrite the stored image information. Second image storage means is provided, and the image drawing means is configured to draw an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the second image storage means. When one piece of image information is used for drawing an image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image specifying information included in the drawing instruction information, the one piece of information is controlled by the first transfer control means before the image information is used. Image information is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. As a result, even if a memory having a slow read speed is used for the first image storage means, the image drawing means uses at least the predetermined image information transferred to the second storage means capable of high-speed read operation to generate an image. Since the image to be displayed on the display means is drawn, the image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. Therefore, even if a memory having a slow reading speed is used for the first image storage unit, various effects can be immediately displayed on the image display unit.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of any one of claims 2 to 4, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the dynamic display effect that dynamically displays the identification information in the effect mode set based on the command is displayed on the image display means, and the predetermined identification information appears by the dynamic display effect, A predetermined game value is given to the player. By this dynamic display effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a predetermined game value is given, and by changing various effect modes of this dynamic display effect, it is possible to adapt to the effect mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Here, since the first prescribed information storage means stores the first prescribed information for each of a plurality of dynamic display effects, the first display determination means causes the image display means to provide one effect mode based on the command. When it is determined to display the dynamic display effect of, the first selecting unit selects the first specified information corresponding to the dynamic display effect of the one effect mode from the first specified information storage unit. Thereby, in the dynamic display effect that gives the player various expectations, the first specified information corresponding to the dynamic display effect of one effect mode set based on the command is selected from the first specified information storage means. Only by doing so, it is possible to easily draw an image according to the effect mode and display it on the image display means. Therefore, since it is possible to easily diversify the dynamic display effects displayed on the image display means, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player by the dynamic display effects.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 5, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the main control means, the type of identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect and the effect mode type of the dynamic display effect are dynamically displayed according to the identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect. Determined by the effect determining means. Then, the second command generating means generates a second command for notifying the effect mode type of the dynamic display effect determined by the dynamic display effect determining means, and the third command generating means dynamically generates the second command. A third command for notifying the type of the identification information to be revealed by the dynamic display effect determined by the display effect determining means is generated, and these commands are transmitted to the sub control means by the command transmitting means. On the other hand, in the sub control means, the first display determination means displays a dynamic display effect corresponding to the effect mode type notified by the second command based on the reception of the second command from the main control device. A decision is made to display on the display means. Further, the identification information determined by the dynamic display effect is determined by the identification information determining means based on the reception of the third command transmitted from the main control device. Then, the dynamic display determination unit determines whether the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination unit and the identification information determined by the identification information determination unit are appropriate. When it is determined that the display effect and the identification information are not appropriate, the dynamic display effect is continuously displayed by the first display determining means as a dynamic display that is invisible to the player. Changed to dynamic display performance. Here, if the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination means and the identification information determined by the identification information determination means are not appropriate, there is a possibility that the command cannot be correctly received. In such a case, since the dynamic display effect is displayed in a display mode in which the player cannot continuously see the dynamic display, the dynamic display is performed without giving the player a special expectation. There is an effect that the display effect can be displayed.

FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed in the first embodiment. FIG. 38 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door opened. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is an array diagram showing a symbol array of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which can be visually recognized from a display window, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a winning mode, a stop symbol corresponding to the winning mode, a winning probability, and the number of paid-out medals. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically an example of a three-drawing lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of two-drawing lottery table, and (c) is one It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a hanging lottery table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a scanning area of a screen included in the auxiliary display unit and a display area in which an image is actually displayed on the screen. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery table setting process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows reel control processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the display main processing performed by MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows start command processing performed by MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows lottery result command processing performed by MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows error command processing performed by MPU of a display control device. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table for a change. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the additional data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a vibration sensor input monitoring process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flow chart showing a reserved ball number command process executed by an MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a definite command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flow chart showing a continuous notice command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. (A) is a flowchart showing frame button operation command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a reserved image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a frame button operation process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a comparison process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 21, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in the case of being applied to a spinning-type gaming machine which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine 10 will be described. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front door 12, and FIG. It is a front view of the body 11.

  In the slot machine 10, the player inserts a medal, which is a game medium, from the medal insertion slot 45, and operates the start lever 41 to rotationally drive the three reels 32L, 32M, 32R having a plurality of symbols. When the player operates the stop switches 42, 43, 44 provided corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are When the combination of symbols displayed by stopping is a predetermined combination, the player is provided with a privilege of granting a predetermined number of medals and a privilege of shifting to a gaming state.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed by combining wooden panels and is formed into a box-like shape with an open front surface. When the casing 11 is installed in a game hall, it is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing it. The housing 11 may be made of a synthetic resin panel or a metal panel instead of being made of a wooden panel, or may be made of a synthetic resin material or a metal material in the form of an integral box. Good.

  A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with the bearing portion 14a at a position corresponding to each support shaft 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted in the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis line that connects the support shafts 13a and 13b with respect to the housing 11 and extends in the vertical direction. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12.

  Further, a locking device 20 is provided on the back surface of the front door 12 on the opposite side of the opening / closing axis, and the front door 12 is locked by the locking device 20 so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21. The position where the key cylinder 20 is provided is an upper position where the wall thickness is thin in the front door 12, and as a result, a versatile key cylinder 21 having a short overall length can be adopted. In the present embodiment, Omlock (registered trademark) having a high function of preventing unauthorized unlocking is used as the key cylinder 21.

  A game panel 25 is provided near the center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the respective display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be integrated into a single display window.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R that are each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially in the horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R in a one-to-one correspondence. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is in a visible state through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if moving from top to bottom.

  Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be individually and rotationally driven by the driving of each stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set so as to make one rotation by giving a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the excitation pulse changes the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel. Controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. When the reel index sensor detects that the reel makes one revolution, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101 described later each time the detection is made. Therefore, main controller 101 determines the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

  On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circling direction) thereof. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and three consecutive symbols are displayed on the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is configured to be visible at the upper, middle, and lower positions. Therefore, in order to switch a certain symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (= 504 pulses / 21 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol which is in a visible state from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and the display window based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

  On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 is a lever that the player manually pushes when starting a game (game) (the pushing direction is not limited), and the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted. Then, the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are started all at once (but not necessarily at the same time).

  On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M and 32R to be stopped. That is, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped.

  At this time, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, only the stop mode in which the arrival pattern reaching the base position (in the present embodiment, the lower position of each of the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R) is stopped as it is Instead, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop mode in which it is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop mode for stopping after sliding for three symbols, and a slide for four symbols Five patterns are prepared, including a stop mode in which the motor is stopped after being turned on. As a result, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to stop in a predetermined stop mode until the specified time (190 msec) elapses from the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. It is possible to make the player feel as if the symbol arrangement (hereinafter, also referred to as a stop result) that stops in the visible range from 26L, 26M, and 26R is determined by the operation of the player. In addition, by making it possible to slide up to four symbols, a combination of symbols corresponding to a prize mode (see FIG. 7) described later that wins the lottery as much as possible within the specified time, will be described later. It is possible to stop on the effective line (see FIG. 6), and it is possible to prevent the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning mode that is not won in the lottery from stopping on the effective line.

  On the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 provided on the back surface of the front door 12 as passage switching means. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not energized, the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is activated. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharging port 49 provided at the lower front portion of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

  The storage passage 47 is provided with an inserted medal detection device (not shown) that detects passage of inserted medals. The output signal of the inserted medal detection device is input to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 counts the number of medals based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection device. Further, when the movement of the inserted medal (the passing direction of the medal) is judged based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection device, and the movement of the medal is different from the normal one, the main control device 101 causes the medal to be clogged, It is determined that there is a possibility that fraud such as withdrawing a medal may have occurred, and the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display portion 65, and the like, which will be described later, are configured to notify that a sensor error has occurred. There is.

  The inserted medal detection device is a first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and a second inserted medal detection sensor that are configured by a photocoupler having a pair of light projecting units and light receiving units (not shown) on both sides through passing medals. 45b (see FIG. 8). The first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are arranged side by side on the upstream side and the downstream side, respectively, in a state of being close enough to simultaneously detect one passing medal. The detection sensors 45a and 45b are set to output a "Lo" signal when receiving light and a "Hi" signal when blocking light.

  When the medal inserted by the player is guided to the storage passage 47 side by the selector 46, the medal passes through the inserted medal detection device. At this time, first, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a arranged on the upstream side is in a light-shielding state first to output the "Hi" signal, and then the second inserted medal detection sensor arranged on the downstream side. 45b is in a light-shielded state, outputs a "Hi" signal, and the two inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b detect a medal at the same time. When the medals further proceed to the downstream side of the storage passage 47, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a disposed on the upstream side first receives the light and outputs the "Lo" signal, The second inserted medal detection sensor 45b disposed on the downstream side is in the light receiving state and outputs the "Lo" signal.

  That is, when the medal normally passes through the inserted medal detection device, the signals output from the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b are such that the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a becomes "Hi" and then the second inserted medal. The detection sensor 45b becomes “Hi”. Then, after the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b simultaneously become "Hi", the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a becomes "Lo", and finally the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b becomes "Lo". In the main control device 101, when the signals output from the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b change at such timing, it is determined that the medals have been normally inserted, and the number of inserted medals is counted. Up.

  On the other hand, if the medals are jammed while passing through the inserted medal sensor device or if the medals are illegally pulled out, the signals output from the two inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b are not the same as when the medals have passed normally. It changes at different timings. The main control device 101 monitors changes in the signals output from the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b, and if the changes are different from the changes when the medals pass through the inserted medal detection device normally, When it is determined that there is clogging or fraud, a sensor error is notified to the display control device 81 described later by an error command. In the display control device 81, when the sensor error is notified from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like notify the sensor error occurrence.

  The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to eject the medals to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48, and to pay the medals to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding that a predetermined amount or more of medals are stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the auxiliary tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored at a height higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

  A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the outlet 49.

  A settlement switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. The slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing, as virtual medals, surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning, and the virtual medals are stored and stored. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under such a condition, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 49 as an actual medal.

  On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as a game medium at one time is provided. Further, on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion switch 57 and a third credit insertion switch 58 are provided. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting one virtual medal.

  Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25, a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining payout number that displays the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the bonus state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout amount display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are respectively provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, they can be replaced by liquid crystal displays or the like.

  On the upper part of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right that emits various sound effects as the game progresses and informs the player of the game state. The speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for performing various display effects as the game progresses, and for notifying the state when the power is turned on or when an error occurs, and is mainly used for the game with each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Since it can be considered that the display unit is used, the auxiliary display unit 65 is referred to in the present embodiment. An upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided on the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65. Details of the display control device 81 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Above the medal tray 50, a lower plate 66 on which model names, characters relating to games, etc. are displayed is attached. Further, on the left side of the medal tray 50, a reversible ashtray 69 is provided on the lower side of the front side.

  A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 accommodates a power supply device 91 (see FIG. 8) inside, and includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 described later.

  The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting various states of the slot machine 10. The slot machine 10 has a backup function for various data, and retains the status at the time of power failure even if a power failure occurs, and returns to the status at the time of power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure (power recovery). You can do it. Therefore, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure, for example, when the game hall is closed, the state before the power is shut off is stored and retained, but when the power switch 71 is turned on while pressing the reset switch 72, the backup data is reset ( Is initialized). If the reset switch 72 is pressed while the power switch 71 is turned on, the error state is reset.

  The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hole manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the hall manager or the like inserts the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and rotates the setting key to change the setting state of the slot machine 10 (setting of the winning probability of each winning mode) from “setting 1” to “setting 6”. Can be changed. When the setting state is set to "Setting 1", the winning mode (winning part) is selected so that the expected value of the number of paid-out medals is the lowest, and when the setting state is set to "Setting 6", The prize mode is selected so that the expected value of the number of paid-out medals is the highest. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the setting state of the slot machine 10.

  Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for integrally managing a game is attached to the housing 11. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 8, the main control device 101 has an MPU (Micro Processing Unit) 102 that controls the main control, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 105 that stores a game program, and a progress of the game. RAM (Random Access Memory) 106 for temporarily storing necessary data, a free-run counter 107 for generating random numbers, a port 104 for communicating with various devices, a clock used for time counting and synchronization, etc. A main board including the circuit 103 and the like is provided, and the main board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box includes a box base having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected in a non-openable manner by a sealing unit, whereby the substrate box is sealed. Note that the box base and the box cover may be connected in an unopenable manner using a key member.

  Next, referring to FIG. 5, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described. FIG. 5 is an array diagram showing a symbol array of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, respectively, but these numbers are in a state in which the main controller 101 can visually recognize them from the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. Is a number for recognizing the item, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the corresponding numbers will be used for description.

  As the symbol, "7" symbol (for example, 20th on the left reel 32L), "youth" symbol (for example, 19th on the left reel 32L), "replay" symbol (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), " "Cherry" symbol (for example, 17th on left reel 32L), "Bell" symbol (for example, 16th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (for example, 15th on left reel 32L), "Star" symbol (for example) , Middle reel 32L 19th). Then, as shown in FIG. 5, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

  Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that the total of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels can be visually recognized. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

  In the slot machine 10, five combination lines are set so as to connect the positions where the symbols are visible. Here, a combination line set in the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a symbol that can be visually recognized from each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R and a combination line.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, the upper symbol of the right reel 32R, the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, the right Middle line L2 connecting the middle patterns of the reel 32R, the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, the lower line L3 connecting the lower patterns of the right reel 32R, the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle reel A downward falling line L4 that connects the middle pattern of 32M and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and a rightward rising line L5 that connects the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R are set. ing. Then, when the symbols are stopped on the activated combination line, that is, on the activated line in a predetermined combination, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals is given as a winning combination, or a privilege that the game state is shifted. It is supposed to be granted.

  The maximum number of combined lines may be 6 or more, or less than 5. Further, the maximum number of combined lines may be changed according to a predetermined condition. For example, a V (reverse V) -shaped line or an L-shaped line may be used as an effective line.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a winning mode that the slot machine 10 can take, a stop symbol on the activated line that wins in each winning mode, a winning probability of each winning mode in a general game state, and The number of medals to be paid out when the winning is achieved in the winning mode will be described. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a winning mode, a stop symbol, a winning probability in a normal gaming state, and a medal payout number. In FIG. 7, the winning probability when the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set to “setting 1” will be described as an example, but when the setting state is set to “setting 2” to “setting 6” In addition, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" while maintaining the magnitude relation of the winning probabilities determined by the respective winning modes and the number of medals (the number of bets) inserted. Each winning probability is set so that

  As shown in FIG. 7, there is a BB (Big Bonus) prize as a state transition prize that gives a player a privilege of changing the game state. If the "7" symbol, the "7" symbol, and the "7" symbol are stopped along the activated line from the left, a bonus that the game state shifts to a bonus state that is a special game state is given as a BB winning. However, even if the "7" symbol is stopped on the activated line side by side with left, middle, and right, medals are not paid out. That is, when the combination of the "7" symbols is established on the activated line, only the bonus state is entered. In other words, the "7" symbol can be said to be a state transition symbol for shifting the game state to the bonus state.

  Here, the bonus state will be described. The bonus state is composed of a plurality of RB (Regular Bonus) states, and the RB state is composed of 12 JAC games. The JAC game is a game in which the probability of winning a watermelon prize and a bell prize, which will be described later, which are small winning a prizes, is very high compared to the general gaming state. Then, when the winning is achieved eight times during the JAC game, the RB state is ended even before the JAC game is played 12 times. The bonus state ends when the number of paid out medals reaches a predetermined number (250 in this embodiment). That is, when the BB winning is established, the number of medals paid out at that time is 0. However, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is shifted to the bonus state with the BB winning, 250 medals are given to the player. It is guaranteed that the payout will be made with a smaller number of inserted medals than in the normal gaming state. In addition, when the number of paid-out medals reaches a predetermined number in the middle of the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state ends. This is a device for limiting the player's motivation and ensuring the soundness of the game by setting an upper limit on the number of paid-out medals in the bonus state. Further, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols for shifting to the RB state is not set, and the configuration is such that the symbol shifts to the RB state immediately after shifting to the bonus state and immediately after the RB state ends. Therefore, it can be said that the bonus state is a game that continuously shifts to the RB state until a predetermined number of medals are paid out.

  The slot machine 10 supports the number of medals to be inserted (the number of bets) at the start of the game to be one, two, or three, and the probability of winning the BB in the normal gaming state (BB winning in one game). The probability of being established is set differently according to the number of inserted medals (the number of bets) inserted at the start of the game. Specifically, the probability of winning the BB prize is set to 1/65536 in the case of the one-player and the two-player, and is set to 1/256 in the case of the three-player. In this way, the probability of winning the BB prize in the normal gaming state is set lower in the case of the one-player and two-player prizes than in the three-player prize.

  Next, there are a watermelon prize and a bell prize as small prize prizes in which medals are paid out. "Watermelon" design, "Watermelon" design, "Watermelon" design from the left on the active line, if you stop alongside the "Watermelon" design, the watermelon winning is established, and "Bell" design, "Bell" design, from the left on the active line. If you stop alongside the "Bell" symbol, you will win the bell. Then, when the game is executed by multiplying three coins, 12 medals are paid out if the watermelon prize is established, and 6 medals are paid out if the bell prize is established. Further, when the game is executed with one or two coins, and if a watermelon prize or a bell prize is established, three medals are paid out. In addition, the probability of winning the watermelon prize in the normal game state is set to 1/65536 in the case of one-piece and two-piece, and set to one-eighth in the case of three-piece. On the other hand, the probability of winning the bell prize in the general game state is set to 1/65536 in the case of one-sheet play and two-sheet play, and is set to 1/1 in the case of three-game play. As described above, the watermelon prize and the bell prize are set so that the winning is easily achieved in the case of the three-piece winning, while the winning of the winning occurs rarely in the case of the one-and the two-hanging. It is set not to.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 10 is provided with a special small winning a prize that is established only when the game is played with one or two cards, or only when the game is played with one card. .. The special child winning combination includes a Cherry Bell winning and a 7 Bell winning. Of these, the Cherry Bell winning is a special small winning combination that is established only in the case of one-sheet or two-sheet hanging, and the "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M are on the effective line. This is true when the game is stopped, and three medals are paid out. In addition, the 7-bell winning is a special small winning award that is established only in the case of a single-sheet winning, and when the "7" symbol of the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stop on the activated line. It will be established, and two medals will be paid out.

  Here, in both of the cherry bell winning and the 7 bell winning, the symbols stopped on the activated line of the right reel 32R may be any symbols. In addition, when the game is executed with three pieces, even if the "watermelon" symbol or "7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M are stopped on the activated line, the cherry bell is won. Alternatively, the 7-bell prize is not established, and it is determined as a deviation. Similarly, when the game is executed with two pieces, even if the "7" symbol on the reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M are stopped on the activated line, the 7-bell prize is not established. , It is determined as out. In addition, when the game is executed with three cards, the "cherry" symbol or "7" symbol of the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M are not stopped at the same time on the activated line, and the cherry prize is won. Alternatively, the 7-bell prize may not be established. Similarly, when the game is executed with two pieces, the "7" symbol of the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M are not stopped on the activated line at the same time, so that the cherry prize is not established. You may comprise.

  The probability of winning the Cherry Bell prize in the general game state is set to about 1 / 6.0 in the case of a one-player game, and is set to about 1.8 / 1.8 in the case of a two-game play. In addition, the winning probability of the 7-bell prize in the general game state is set to about 1 / 6.0 for only one coin.

  By the way, in the conventional slot machine, when the game is executed by playing one or two cards, the probability that various benefits are granted is extremely low compared to when the game is executed by playing three cards. There was also a machine for exclusive use of 3 cards that was set, or a game could not be played with 1 card or 2 cards, and a game could only be played with 3 cards. This is done as a device for increasing the operating rate of the slot machine in the hole, and is intended to allow the player to play one game with three medals as much as possible.

  However, the number of medals lent out from the hole before the game is not necessarily a multiple of 3, and is generally lent out in units of 50, so there is a high probability that the player will have less than 3 medals at hand. There was a possibility of remaining. If less than three medals are left at hand, it is not possible to play the game with the remaining medals on the three-player exclusive machine, and a slot machine capable of one or two medals. Even in this case, since the probability that the privilege is given is low, there is a possibility that the medal may be left in the hall or the player may bring back the remaining medal. Then, if a medal is left in the hole, the player will be defeated by the value of the medal, and if the player brings back the remaining medal, the medal lent out in the hole cannot be collected, There is also a problem that the player may play the game using the medal brought back from another hole, and the hole side suffers damage.

  On the other hand, in the present slot machine 10, when a game is played with two cards, there is a high probability that the Cherry Bell prize is achieved with a ratio of about 1.8, and when a game is played with one card. With a high probability of about 1 / 6.0, the Cherry Bell prize is established and three medals are paid out. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, even if the winning probability of the BB winning in the case of the one-player or the two-player is extremely low, if the player has one or two medals at hand. In addition, it is possible to allow the player to play the game by multiplying one coin or two coins while having an expectation that a cherry bell prize will be achieved in which three coins are paid out. Then, as a result of this game, if the Cherry Bell winning is established, three medals are paid out, so that the player uses the three medals under a more advantageous condition than the one-and-two stakes. You can play the game with the expectation that the BB prize will be won. Further, even if the game is missed, the game can be ended without leaving extra medals for the player.

  Further, when the game is played with one coin, the 7-bell prize is established with a high probability of about 1 / 6.0, and two coins are paid out. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, when one medal is left at the player's hand, two medals are paid out together with the expectation that a Cherry Bell prize will be achieved in which three medals will be paid out. It is possible to allow the player to execute the game by multiplying by one piece while having an expectation that the 7-bell prize will be established. Then, as a result of this game, if the 7-bell prize is established, two medals are paid out, so that the player uses the two medals to pay three more medals for the cherry bell prize. You can enjoy the game while expecting to win.

  In this way, even if one or two medals are left at the player's hand, the one or two medals are used to pay out three medals. It is possible to make the player play the game aiming at the 7-bell winning in which the medals are paid out. Therefore, the slot machine 10 can provide the player with a motivation to use up the medals without leaving extra medals.

  Here, referring to FIG. 5 again, in the reels 32L and 32M of the respective "bell" symbols of the left reel 32L, the "cherry" symbol, the "7" symbol, and the middle reel 32M of the left reel 32L where the cherry bell prize and the 7-bell prize are established. The arrangement position will be briefly described.

  First, in the left reel 32L, the "cherry" symbols are arranged such that the interval between the symbol that reaches first in the lower stage and the symbol that reaches next is 7 symbols. For example, the 3rd "cherry" symbol and the 10th "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L are arranged such that the interval between them is 7 symbols. In addition, since the 0th and 20th reels are actually arranged adjacent to each other, the 17th "cherry" symbol and the 3rd "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L have a 7-symbol spacing. ing. On the other hand, the "7" symbol is also arranged in the left reel 32L so that the interval between the symbol reaching first in the lower stage and the symbol reaching next is 7 symbols. For example, the 6th "7" symbol and the 13th "7" symbol on the left reel 32L are arranged such that the interval is 7 symbols, and the 20th "7" symbol on the left reel 32L The 6th "7" symbol is also arranged so that its interval is 7 symbols.

  In this way, the "cherry" symbol and the "7" symbol are both arranged on the left reel 32L so that the intervals between the symbols of the same type are 7 symbols. As described above, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding up to 4 symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 were operated. Therefore, by adopting such a symbol arrangement, even when the left stop switch 42 is operated at any timing, the "Cherry" symbol or the "7" symbol is set when the Cherry Bell prize or the 7 bell prize is established, The display window 26L can be stopped at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions.

  For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the third "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is, the "cherry" symbol is stopped at the lower stage. If the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 4th "replay" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is slid by 4 symbols and then stopped, the 10th " The "cherry" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and when the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 5th "bell" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the left reel 32L is slid by 4 symbols. If stopped later, the 10th "cherry" symbol can be stopped in the middle.

  Further, when the left stop switch 42 is operated when the sixth "7" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is, this "7" symbol can be stopped at the lower stage. If the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 7th "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is slid for 4 symbols and then stopped, the 13th symbol is displayed. 7 ”symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and when the left stop switch 42 is operated when the“ Replay ”symbol of No. 8 of the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the left reel 32L is slid by 4 symbols. If stopped later, the 13th "7" symbol can be stopped in the middle.

  On the other hand, in the middle reel 32M, the "bell" symbols are arranged such that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower stage first and the symbol that reaches the lower stage is 5 symbols or less. For example, the number 0 "bell" symbol and the number 5 "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M are arranged such that the intervals are 5 symbols, and the number 9 "bell" symbol on the medium reel 32M. The No. 12 "bell" symbol is arranged so that the interval is 3 symbols. In this way, since the "bell" symbols are arranged on the middle reel 32M such that the intervals between the same symbols are 5 symbols or less, by using such a symbol arrangement, the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any timing. Even if it is done, the "bell" symbol can be stopped at the middle position of the display window 26M when the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize is established.

  For example, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the 11th "7" symbol of the middle reel 32M reaches the lower stage, if the middle reel 32M is stopped as it is, this "bell" symbol can be stopped in the middle stage. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the 12th "bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M reaches the lower stage, if the middle reel 32M is slid for 4 symbols and then stopped, the 17th " The "bell" pattern can be stopped in the middle.

  In this way, even when the stop switches 42 and 43 are operated at any timing, the "cherry" symbol or the "7" symbol can be stopped in any of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the display window 26L. It is also possible to display a "bell" symbol in the middle of the display window 26M. Therefore, when the Cherry Bell prize or the 7 Bell prize is won in the prize mode lottery, the stop symbol corresponding to the Cherry Bell prize or the 7 Bell prize is dealt with regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the player. Since the stop symbol can be displayed on any of the middle line L2, the right downward line L4, and the right upward line L5 (see FIG. 6), it is possible to establish a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize without so-called omission.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. As another winning mode that the slot machine 10 can take, a "replay" symbol, a "replay" symbol, and a replay winning that is established when the slot machine 10 is stopped along with the "replay" symbol are provided from the left on the activated line. When the replay prize is established, the player can play the next game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting any medals, although no payout of medals or state transition is performed. Therefore, when the replay prize is established, the number of medals inserted in the game (the number of bets) is paid out, that is, in the case of the one-player game, the number of medals is one, and in the case of the two-player game, the two-player and the three-player game are applied. In the case of, it can be considered that three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability of the replay prize in the general game state is not limited to the number of inserted medals (the number of bets), and is high at about 7.3 in all cases of one coin, two coins, and three coins. It is set to probability. Since this replay prize is established with a high probability, it is desired that a special small part prize (cherry bell prize or 7-bell prize) be established when a game is played with a BB prize or with one or two coins. A lot of challenge feeling can be given to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the “replay” symbol that establishes the replay prize is such that each of the reels 32L and 32M has a distance of 5 symbols or less between the symbol that reaches the lower stage first and the symbol that reaches the next stage. , 32R. For example, the 8th "replay" symbol and the 11th "replay" symbol of the left reel 32L are arranged so that the intervals are 3 symbols, and the 1st "replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M and 6 The numbered "replay" symbols are arranged so that the intervals are 5 symbols. In this way, the "replay" symbols are arranged on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R such that the intervals between the symbols of the same type are 5 symbols or less. As described above, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding up to four symbols from the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Therefore, by using such a symbol arrangement, the stop switches 42 to 44 can be stopped. The "replay" symbol can be stopped at the middle position of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R when the replay prize is established, no matter what timing is operated. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 3rd "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is, the 4th "replay" symbol is stopped in the middle stage. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the first "replay" symbol of the medium reel 32M reaches the lower stage, the medium reel 32M can be slid by 4 symbols and then stopped, then the number 6 The "replay" symbol of can be stopped in the middle stage. Therefore, when the player wins the replay prize, the "replay" symbol can be stopped at the middle line L2 (see FIG. 6) regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, the replay prize can be established without so-called omission.

  In other cases, that is, when the combination of the above-mentioned symbols does not stop on the activated line, the medal payout, the transition of the game state, etc. are not performed at all, and the game is out. That is, the "youth" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "cherry" symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, and the "star" symbol of the middle reel 32M are not involved in winning. In other words, each of the above-mentioned symbols can be said to be a non-privilege symbol that is unrelated to the bonus given to the player. That is, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided with a bonus symbol related to winning such as a "bell" symbol and a non-privilege symbol unrelated to winning such as a "youth" symbol. In the following, a combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination is also referred to as a combination of winning symbols. For example, the combination of BB symbols is a combination of symbols that are a BB prize, that is, a combination of “7” symbols, “7” symbols, and “7” symbols.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, the probability of winning the BB prize when the game is played by inserting three medals is sufficiently higher than when the game is played by inserting one or two medals. Since the setting is made, it is possible to make one game by inserting three medals while expecting the player that many medals will be paid out by the establishment of the BB winning. As a result, the medals are consumed quickly, and the operating rate of the slot machine in the hole can be increased.

  On the other hand, when the game is played by inserting one or two medals, the Cherry Bell prize with three medals payout is set as a winning candidate, and the winning probability is set to be high. If one or two medals remain in the player's hand, expecting the player to get three medals due to the establishment of the Cherry Bell prize, and one or two medals remaining in hand It is possible to throw in to play one game. As a result, when three medals have been paid out due to the establishment of the Cherry Bell prize, the player can insert the three medals and play another game while expecting the BB prize to be established. The player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Further, even if the result of the game executed by inserting one or two medals is missed, the game can be ended without leaving any extra medals for the player. In this way, the slot machine 10 can allow the player to enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. And the problem that the player loses by finishing the game without using the lent medal, the player can not bring back the remaining medal and collect the lent medal, or bring it from another hole It is possible to avoid the problem that the hall side suffers damage when the player uses the medal.

  Also, when the game is played by inserting one medal, the 7-belt winning with two coins paid out is also set as a winning candidate, and the winning probability is also set high, so that the player has If one player has one remaining medal, he expects the player to be able to win two medals if the 7-bell prize is established, and once the player has inserted the remaining one medal. Can be played. As a result, when two medals are paid out due to the establishment of the 7-bell prize, the player inserts the two medals and expects to establish the cherry bell prize, in which three medals are paid out. , You can enjoy another game. Then, if the Cherry Bell winning is established, the player can play the game by inserting the three medals paid out while expecting the winning of the BB winning, so that the player can play the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Can be enjoyed, and even if it is missed, the medals can be used up. Therefore, it is possible to give the player further enjoyment of the game and to enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals.

  In addition, in the lottery of the prize mode, when the cherry bell prize in which three medals are paid out and the 7 bell prize in which two medals are paid out are won, regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. , The stop symbol can be stopped on the effective line without missing, so as a result of the lottery of the game started by the player with one or two coins, the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize was won as a winning role. In this case, those winnings can be surely achieved without depending on the artificial operation. Further, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while aiming for another prize (for example, BB prize) while expecting the establishment of the Cherry Bell prize or the 7-bell prize.

  Here, the expected value of the number of paid-out medals in the normal game state in the case of the one-player and the two-player will be described. First of all, in the case of the one-player game, the winning probability in the general game state of the watermelon prize and the bell prize is set to 1/65536, and when one of the prizes is established, three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probabilities in the general gaming state of the cherry bell prize and the 7 bell prize are set to about 1 / 6.0, respectively, and when the cherry bell prize is established, 3 pieces and when the 7 bell prize is established. Two medals will be paid out. In addition, the winning probability of the replay prize in the general game state is set to about 1 / 7.3, and when the replay prize is established, as described above, it is equivalent to one medal payout being made. I can think. On the other hand, the winning probability in the general gaming state of BB winning is set to 1/65536, and when the BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state, but the number of medals paid out is zero. Here, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game in the normal gaming state is equal to a value obtained by multiplying the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to each of the above-mentioned winning probabilities and adding these multiplication results. The expected value is about 0.96. That is, in the normal game state, the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets (one) is about 96%, and it is expected that the medals owned by the player will decrease by about 0.04 each time one game is played. .

  In addition, in the case of playing with two coins, the winning probability in the normal gaming state of watermelon prize and bell prize is set to 1/65536, and when any prize is established, three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability in the general gaming state of the Cherry Bell prize is set to about 1.8, and when the Cherry Bell prize is established, three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability of the replay prize in the general game state is set to about 1 / 7.3, and when the replay prize is established, as described above, it is equivalent to the one in which two medals are paid out. I can think. On the other hand, the winning probability in the general gaming state of BB winning is set to 1/65536, and when the BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state, but the number of medals paid out is zero. Therefore, the expected value of the number of paid-out medals per game in the general game state in which two coins are played is about 1.94. That is, in the normal game state, the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets (two) is about 97%, and it is expected that the medals owned by the player will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played. ..

  In this way, in both cases of one-player and two-player, the ratio of the number of paid-out coins to the number of bets is set to a value close to 100% without limit. If you do, the medals will be returned to the player with an expected value of almost 100%. That is, even if a player plays a game with one or two coins, the number of medals hardly decreases. Therefore, if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the one remaining in the player's hand Or, it can be surely made to want to play a game by using two medals. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the player will leave the medal and finish the game.

  On the other hand, when the game is played with one or two cards, it is expected that the number of medals will be reduced, though slightly, so if the game is repeated with one or two cards, the number of medals will increase. Instead of doing so, it is decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly playing the game with one or two coins to aim for an increase in medals. Therefore, when there are three or more medals, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with three coins having a high probability of winning the BB prize.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum payout number of medals is set to 3 when the game is played with one or two coins and the Cherry Bell winning is established, and the game is played with one coin. The number of medals paid out when the 7-bell prize is established is set to 2, but the number of medals paid out when the cherry-bell prize is established is set to a multiple of 3, and the number of medals paid out when the 7-bell prize is established is set. It may be set to a multiple of 2. However, if you set the payout number to 3 or 2 when the Cherry Bell prize or 7-bell prize is established, even if the expected value of the medal payout number is set to less than 100%, each prize will be won. The winning probability of can be set high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability that a cherry bell prize or a 7-bell prize will be established, and it is possible to increase the probability that three or two medals will be awarded to the player, so that one or two coins will be given to the player. You can use the medals to make you want to play the game.

  In FIG. 7, the winning probability when the setting state is “Setting 1” is shown, but even when the setting state is set to any one of “Setting 2” to “Setting 6”, one winning The winning probability corresponding to each winning mode in the case of two coins is set so that the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets is less than 100%. In addition, in the present embodiment, the winning probability corresponding to each winning mode in the case of the one-player and the two-player is changed according to the setting state (“setting 1” to “setting 6”). The winning probability of multiplying by two and winning by two may be constant regardless of the setting state. In other words, the winning probability may be changed according to the setting state only when the number of coins is three. In addition, in the case of the one-sheet hanging and the two-sheet hanging, the winning probability of at least one of the BB winning, the watermelon winning, the bell winning and the replay winning is determined according to the setting state (“Setting 1” to “Setting 6”). Although it is changed, the winning probabilities of the cherry bell prize and the 7-bell prize, which are special small prizes in the case of the one-piece and the two-piece prizes, may not be changed and may be set to a constant value.

  In addition, in the present slot machine 10, the winning mode is established only when the game is played with one or two cherry bells, and when the game is played with three, the left reel 32L Even if the "Bell" symbol stops on the "Cherry" symbol and the middle reel 32M, the Cherry Bell prize is not established and it is treated as a misalignment. The player can be made to pay attention as a winning prize. Therefore, when the game is played with one piece or two pieces, if the symbol stops due to the stop symbol of the Cherry Bell winning, a great joy can be given to the player.

  Similarly, if the 7-belt winning is established only when the game is played with one piece, and the game is played with two or three pieces, the "7" symbol is displayed on the left reel 32L. Even if the "bell" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, the 7-bell prize is not established and is treated as an outlier. It can be noticed. Therefore, when the game is played with one piece, if the symbol is stopped by the 7-bell winning stop symbol, the player can be greatly delighted.

  Further, in the present slot machine 10, even when the game is played with one or two cards, the BB winning is set although the winning probability is extremely low. As a result, even when a game is played with one or two cards, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a BB prize will be established.

  In addition, in the slot machine 10, when the game is played with one or two cards, a normal small role prize other than the BB prize or the replay prize is established when the watermelon prize or the bell prize is established. Also, unlike the number of medals to be paid out when the game is played with three coins, three medals are paid out as in the case where the Cherry Bell winning is achieved. The player can play another game while inserting the three medals given, expecting a BB winning combination, and the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. it can. In addition, in the slot machine 10, the probability of winning the watermelon prize or the bell prize when the game is played with one or two cards is reduced, while the probability of winning the cherry bell prize or the seven bell prize is set to be high. Therefore, it is possible to further impress to the player that the Cherry Bell prize or the 7-bell prize is a special small prize prize with one or two coins, and one or two coins. When the game is played in, the player can be expected to win the Cherry Bell prize and the 7-bell prize.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine 10.

  The main controller 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centering on the MPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing unit. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the MPU 102 via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

  On the input side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R makes one rotation), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44, a first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and a second inserted medal detection sensor 45b for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, A payout detection sensor 51a for detecting medals paid out from the hopper device 51, a credit insertion detection sensor 56a-58a for individually detecting an operation of each credit insertion switch 56-58, a settlement detection sensor 59a for detecting an operation of a settlement switch 59, Reset to detect the operation of the reset switch 72 Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 72a and a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on are connected, and signals from these various sensors are input / output ports. The data is output to the MPU 102 via 104.

  A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 91b is for monitoring the power cut-off state and generating a power failure signal when power is cut off by the power switch 71 as well as during power failure. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12V output from the power supply unit 91a in this example, and determines that the power supply is cut off when the drive voltage drops to less than 10V, for example. Is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the MPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the MPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute a power failure process described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81.

  The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 V which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101 even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 V. As the time for which the stabilized voltage is output, a time sufficient for executing the process at the time of power failure by the main control device 101 is secured.

  On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in a selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit. A display unit 60, a balance payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are connected via the input / output port 104. There is.

  The display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. The device 81 independently drives and controls the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 which is a main board that controls and manages the game. The display control device 81 may drive and control the various display units 60 to 62.

  In addition, in the display control device 81, the character ROM 187 that stores various image data to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured by a NAND flash memory that is a low-cost memory that has a large storage capacity in a small area. .. As a result, the character ROM 187 can be easily increased in capacity, and many images can be prepared as images to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, so that the player's interest can be further increased. The image displayed on the screen can be diversified and complicated. It should be noted that the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). Even if is used as a storage means for image data, an invention has been made in which an image is displayed without problems at a desired display time. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. A RAM 106 for securing and a free-run counter 107 for generating a random number are built in. Although not shown, the MPU 102 also includes various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission / reception circuit, and various counters such as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, as is well known. It is built in.

  The free-run counter 107 is a counter configured by hardware that generates and updates a random number of 0 to 65535 in a short cycle. After confirming the operation of the start lever 41 based on the output signal of the start detection sensor 41a, the MPU 102 latches the value of the free-run counter 107 by the hardware circuit and stores the latched value in the RAM 106. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter 107 each time the start lever 41 is operated. Further, the value of the free-run counter latched and stored in the RAM 106 is used for lottery the winning mode (winning part) of the game started by the operation of the start lever 41.

  The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 compose a main memory as a storage unit, and programs for executing various processes shown in the flowcharts of FIG. 12 and subsequent figures are stored in the ROM 105 as part of the control program. Further, the ROM 105 is provided with at least a lottery table storage area 105a for storing a lottery table used for the lottery in the winning mode.

  Here, the lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lottery table selected in the normal game state when the setting state is set to “setting 1”. (A) shows the number of inserted medals is 3 (3) Multi-drawing lottery table to be used, (b) is a 2-drawing lottery table used when the number of inserted medals is 2 (2), and (c) is The drawing shows the one-drawing lottery table used when the number of inserted medals is one (one-up).

  An index value IV is set in each lottery table, and each winning prize mode to be won is uniquely associated with each index value IV, and a point value corresponding to the winning probability corresponding to the winning mode. PV is set for each lottery table. Specifically, IV = 1 is associated with a BB prize as a prize mode, IV = 2 is associated with a watermelon prize, IV = 3 is associated with a bell prize, and IV = 4 is associated with IV = 4. Is associated with the Cherry Bell prize, IV = 5 is associated with the 7-bell prize, and IV = 6 is associated with the replay prize.

  Further, in the three-sheet lottery table, as shown in FIG. 9A, PV = 1256 is associated with IV = 1 (BB winning) and PV = 256 with IV = 2 (watermelon winning). 8192 is associated, PV = 12850 is associated with IV = 3 (bell winning), PV = 0 is associated with IV = 4 (cherry bell winning), IV = 5 (7 bell winning) ) Is associated with PV = 0, and IV = 6 (replay prize) is associated with PV = 8980.

  Here, the lottery method of the winning mode will be briefly described. When the random number value of the free-run counter 107 is latched by the operation of the start lever 41 and stored in the RAM 106, first, the value of the point value PV associated with IV = 1 (BB winning) (FIG. 9A). In the lottery table shown in (6), 256) is added to the value of the latched random number, and it is set as the determination value DV (see S304 in FIG. 14). When the determination value DV is greater than 65535, the BB winning is determined as the winning combination of the game (see S305 and S306 in FIG. 14), and the lottery is finished. That is, in the case where the lottery is performed using the three-drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9A, when the value of the latched random number is in the range of 655280 to 65535, the BB winning is determined as the winning combination. . Therefore, the winning probability is set to 1/256 as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the determination value DV is 65535 or less, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (see S307 in FIG. 14), and the value of the point value PV corresponding to the incremented index value IV is added to the determination value DV. Then, the determination value DV is updated (see S304 in FIG. 14). When the updated determination value DV is greater than 65535, the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV after the advancement is determined as the winning combination, the lottery is finished, and when it is 65535 or less, Further, the index value IV is further incremented by 1, and the determination value DV is updated (addition of the point value PV corresponding to the incremented IV) and the determination of the updated determination value DV (whether or not the determination value DV is larger than 65535). ) And are repeated until the winning combination is determined or there is no more determination combination (until IV exceeds the maximum value) (see S304 to S308 in FIG. 14).

  Accordingly, when the lottery is performed using the three-sheet lottery table shown in FIG. 9A, when the latched random number value is in the range of 57088 to 655279, the watermelon prize is determined as the winning combination. When the value of the latched random number is in the range of 44238 to 57087, the bell winning is determined as the winning combination, and when the value of the latched random number is in the range of 35258 to 44237, the replay winning is determined as the winning combination. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probability of each winning mode is set to 1/8 for watermelon winning, about 5.1 times for bell winning, and about 1: 1 for replay winning. It will be set to 1/3.

  It should be noted that, in the three-sheet lottery table shown in FIG. 9A, the value of the point value PV corresponding to IV = 4 (cherry bell prize) and IV = 5 (7 bell prize) is set to 0. Therefore, even if the determination value DV is updated using this value, the value does not change before and after the update. Then, when the point value PV corresponding to IV = 4 and IV = 5 is added to the determination value DV, since the determination value DV is 65535 or less, when IV = 4 and IV = 5. Even if the determination value after update is determined, it is not determined to be larger than 65535. Therefore, by setting the value of the point value PV corresponding to IV = 4 (cherry bell prize) and IV = 5 (7 bell prize) to 0, the cherry bell prize and the 7 bell prize are not selected as a winning combination. It has become.

  In the two-drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9B, PV = 1 is associated with IV = 1 (BB winning), and PV = 1 is associated with IV = 2 (watermelon winning). , IV = 3 (bell prize) is associated with PV = 1, IV = 4 (cherry bell prize) is associated with PV = 36400, and IV = 5 (7 bell prize) is associated with PV. = 0 is associated, and PV = 8980 is associated with IV = 6 (replay prize). Therefore, when a lottery is performed using the two-drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9B, when the value of the latched random number is 65535, the BB winning is determined as the winning combination, and the latched random number is When the value is 65534, the watermelon winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and when the latched random number value is 65533, the Bell winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and the latched random number value falls within the range of 29133 to 65532. At some time, the Cherry Bell winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and when the value of the latched random number is in the range of 20153 to 29132, the Replay winning combination is determined as the winning combination. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probabilities of the respective winning modes are set to 1/65536 for the BB winning, the watermelon winning, and the bell winning, respectively, and to about 1.8 times for the cherry bell winning. It will be set and the replay prize will be set to about 1 / 7.3. Since the value of the point value PV corresponding to IV = 5 (7-bell winning) is set to 0, the 7-bell winning is not set as a winning combination as described above.

  Further, in the one-drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9C, PV = 1 is associated with IV = 1 (BB prize), and PV = 1 is associated with IV = 2 (watermelon prize). PV = 1 is associated with IV = 3 (bell winning), PV = 10880 is associated with IV = 4 (cherry bell winning), and IV = 5 (7 bell winning) is associated with IV = 5 (bell winning). Is associated with PV = 10880, and PV = 8980 is associated with IV = 6 (replay prize). Therefore, when a lottery is performed using the one-time-drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9C, when the value of the latched random number is 65535, the BB winning is determined as the winning combination, and the latched random number is When the value is 65534, the watermelon winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and when the latched random number value is 65533, the Bell winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and the latched random number value falls within the range of 54653 to 65532. One time, the Bell Bell prize is determined as the winning combination, the 7-bell prize is determined as the winning combination when the latched random number value is in the range of 43773 to 54652, and the latched random number value is 34793 to 37772. When it is within the range, the replay prize is determined as the winning combination. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probabilities of the respective winning modes are set to 1/65536 for the BB winning, the watermelon winning and the bell winning, respectively, and about 6.0 for the cherry bell winning and the 7 bell winning. The replay prize will be set to about 7.3.

  In the lottery table storage area 105a, for each of "setting 1" to "setting 6", a one-game-drawing lottery table, a two-game-multiplication lottery table, and a three-game-multiplication lottery table for the normal gaming state are stored. There is. Further, a bonus state lottery table used when the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state is prepared for each of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. Then, a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning mode (winning combination) is set according to the setting state and the gaming state of the slot machine 10 and the number of inserted medals (the number of bets). That is, in the normal game state, when the bet number is 3, the three-table multiplying lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set, and when the bet number is 2, the slot machine 10 When the bet number is one, the two-drawing lottery table corresponding to the set state is set, and the one-drawing lottery table corresponding to the set state of the slot machine 10 is set. When the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, the bonus state lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set (see FIG. 15). Then, a lottery for winning modes is performed using the set lottery table.

  As a lottery table used when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, a different lottery table is not provided according to the bet number (1 to 3), but this is the bonus in the present embodiment. This is because the game is played with the bet number limited to three in the state. Therefore, in the bonus state, the corresponding bonus state lottery table is simply set according to the setting states (“setting 1” to “setting 6”) of the slot machine 10.

  In the present slot machine 10, when in the normal game state, the three-card lottery table, the two-card lottery table, and the one-card lottery table shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C are set according to the number of bets. It is possible to set the probability of winning the BB prize when the game is played by inserting three medals to be sufficiently higher than when the game is played by inserting one or two medals. . Therefore, as described above, while expecting the player to obtain a large number of medals by winning the BB prize, it is possible to insert three medals and play one game. As a result, the medals are consumed quickly, and the operating rate of the slot machine in the hole can be increased.

  Further, when the game is played by inserting one or two medals, the Cherry Bell prize with three medals paid out can be set as the winning candidate, and the winning probability can be set high. Therefore, when one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the player expects that three medals will be paid out due to the establishment of the Cherry Bell winning, and the remaining one or two medals are expected. It is possible to insert one medal and play one game. As a result, when three medals have been paid out due to the establishment of the Cherry Bell prize, the player can insert the three medals and play another game while expecting the BB prize to be established. The player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Further, even if the result of the game executed by inserting one or two medals is missed, the game can be ended without leaving any extra medals for the player.

  Also, when the game is played by inserting one medal, a 7-belt winning combination with two medal payouts can be set as a winning candidate, and the winning probability can be set to a high value. While letting the player expect that if one player has one medal remaining in his hand, the player will be able to pay out two medals if the 7-bell prize is established, he will let the player insert the remaining one medal. It is possible to play a game once. As a result, when two medals are paid out due to the establishment of the 7-bell prize, the player inserts the two medals and expects to establish the cherry bell prize, in which three medals are paid out. , You can enjoy another game. Then, if the Cherry Bell winning is established, the player can play the game by inserting the three medals paid out while expecting the winning of the BB winning, so that the player can play the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Can be enjoyed, and even if it is missed, the medals can be used up. Therefore, it is possible to give the player further enjoyment of the game and to enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals.

  In this way, the slot machine 10 can allow the player to enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals.

  Since the winning probability of each winning mode can be set to the value shown in FIG. 7 by using the one-winning lottery table or the two-winning lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 105a, As described above with reference to FIG. 7, it is possible to set the ratio of the number of paid-out coins to the bet number to less than 100% and to a value close to 100% infinitely in both cases of one-player and two-player. it can. Therefore, even if a player plays a game with one or two medals, the number of medals hardly decreases. Therefore, if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the one remaining in the player's hand Alternatively, it is possible to surely make the player want to play the game by using two medals, and it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the player will leave the medals and finish the game. On the other hand, if the game is repeated by playing one or two, the number of medals is reduced, so that the player repeats the game with one or two and the number of medals increases. You can make it impossible to aim at. Therefore, when there are three or more medals, it is possible to instruct the player to play the game with three coins having a high probability of winning the BB prize.

  Also, by switching and using each lottery table according to the number of bets, the winning mode is established only when the game is played with one or two cherry bells. If it is held, it can be handled as a miss without establishing a cherry bell prize, so the player is regarded as a special small role prize for cherry bell prize only for 1 piece and 2 pieces. Can be made Similarly, if the 7-belt winning is established only when the game is played with one piece, and if the game is played with two or three sheets, the 7-bell winning is not established. Since it is handled as an outlier, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the 7-bell prize as a special small prize prize for exclusive use of one piece. Therefore, when the game is played with one piece or two pieces, if the symbol stops due to the stop symbol of the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize, it is possible to give the player great pleasure.

  In addition, even if the game is played with one or two cards, it is possible to set so that a BB winning is achieved even though the winning probability is extremely low. Even when the game is played with, the player can be expected to have a BB prize.

  Further, in the present slot machine 10, the probability of winning the watermelon prize or the bell prize when the game is played with one or two cards is set low, while the winning probability of the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize is set high. Therefore, it is possible to further impress to the player that the Cherry Bell prize or the 7-bell prize is a special small win prize with one piece or two pieces, and one piece or two pieces. It is possible to give the player an expectation that a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize will be established when the game is played in a hanging manner.

  In the present embodiment, the point value PV corresponding to IV = 5 (7 bell winning) is set to 0 in the two-drawing lottery table, and IV = 4 (cherry bell winning is set in the three-drawing lottery table. ) And IV = 5 (7-bell winning), the point value PV corresponding to 0 is set to 0 to draw lots of the winning modes, but the winning mode is not won, but the winning mode is won. It is also possible to set the index value IV to be not set and not to win the prize mode by not performing the lottery for those prize modes.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing a lottery result of the winning combination, and a sliding table used for controlling stop of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the sliding table storage area 106b for storing the, the state information storage area 106c for storing the gaming state such as the bonus state, etc., at least a backup area is provided.

  The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like (including the power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). When the power failure is resolved (including the power-on by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by the power failure process (see S103 in FIG. 12), and each value written in the backup area is restored in the main process when the power is turned on.

  A power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 102 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10, an electrical configuration of the display control device 81 of the slot machine 10 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 81. In the description of FIG. 10, the detailed description of the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 of FIG. 8 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display portion 65, and displays a microcomputer centering on the MPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means and an image. An image controller 188 that draws and displays the drawn image on the auxiliary display unit 65 at a predetermined timing, a character ROM 187 that stores data of the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are mounted.

  An input / output port 186, a character ROM 187, and an image controller 188 are connected to the MPU 181 via an internal bus, and a signal latch circuit 182 for latching a control signal such as a command transmitted from the main control device 101 and a predetermined circuit. A clock circuit 183 that outputs a rectangular wave of a frequency, a program ROM 184 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 181, and fixed value data for driving the upper lamp 63 and the like, and the program ROM 184 are stored. A work RAM 185 for securing a work area for temporarily storing various data in executing the control program is connected. A one-chip microcomputer in which the program ROM 184, the work RAM 185, the signal latch circuit 182, the clock circuit 183, etc. described above are built in the MPU may be used.

  Further, the power supply device 91, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the MPU 181 via the input / output port 186. The power supply device 91 is configured to receive a power failure signal that is output when the drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example. Further, the MPU 181 performs various control processes based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 101 and executes drive control of the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 via the input / output port 186. .. Below, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are collectively referred to as an auxiliary performance section.

  The work RAM 185 is provided with at least a received command storage area 185a and a bet number storage area 185b. The received command recording area 185a is an area for temporarily storing various commands transmitted from the main control device 101. When the display control device 81 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 101, the received command is latched by the signal latch circuit 182 and a command interrupt signal is generated toward the MPU 181. The MPU 181 executes command interrupt processing (not shown) triggered by the generation of the command interrupt signal, and stores the command latched by the signal latch circuit 182 in the received command storage area 185a. The received command storage area 185a is configured to operate as a ring buffer of a FIFO (First In First Out) system, and by the main processing executed by the MPU 181, commands received from the main control device 101 are stored in the received command storage area 185a. If stored, the commands are read out in the order in which they are stored, and processing corresponding to each command (for example, start command processing shown in FIG. 19, lottery result command processing shown in FIG. 20, error command processing shown in FIG. 21, etc. ) Is executed.

  The bet number storage area 185b is an area for storing information relating to the number of medals (bet number) inserted at the start of the game. In the slot machine 10, when the player operates the start lever 41 after inserting a specified number of medals, the number of inserted medals (the number of bets) is increased by the normal process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101. A start command including information regarding the above is set (see S209 in FIG. 13), and the start command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 by the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 ( (See S110 in FIG. 12). By receiving this start command, the display control device 81 recognizes that the start lever 41 has been operated and a game start command has been generated, and executes the start command process (see FIG. 19) to set the start command. Information on the included bet number is extracted and stored in the bet number storage area 185b (see S801 in FIG. 19). The bet number storage area 185b may store the bet number information contained in the start command as it is, or the bet number information in a format different from the bet number information contained in the start command. It may be stored.

  In the display control device 81, the number of medals (bet number) inserted at the start of the game is grasped based on the information stored in the bet number storage area 185b, and the auxiliary effect section is caused to execute based on the bet number. Control the presentation mode. For example, when it is determined that the game is started in the state where the bet number is three, based on the information stored in the bet number storage area 185b, the display control device 81 causes the various commands received from the main control device 101. Based on the gaming state of the slot machine 10 or the result of the lottery (judgment of the winning mode) performed based on the start command, the effect mode is selected, and the auxiliary effect unit executes various effects (FIG. 20). S902).

  As an effect corresponding to the bet number of 3, for example, as a normal effect, "normal effect" in which a character performing a predetermined action is displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65, and "attend a BB prize!" Is displayed to prompt the player to align the stop symbols corresponding to the BB winning mode, "BB winning challenge production", and the auxiliary display section 65 displays the message "BB winning!" A random number counter (not shown) prepared in the display control device 81 includes a lighting of 63 and a voice output from the speaker 64, and a "BB winning notification effect" that notifies that the BB winning mode is set as a winning combination. Value) or the result of lottery (judgment of winning / losing combination) grasped by a lottery result command described later received from the main control device 101, which will be described later received from the main control device 101. Depending on the game state of the slot machine 10 to be grasped by the state command, it determines the representation embodiment to be executed by the auxiliary rendering unit from among the rendition.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is started in the state where the bet number is one or two, it is executed by the auxiliary effector based on the result of the lottery performed based on the generation of the start command by the main control device 101. A performance mode to be performed is selected. For example, it is determined that the bet number is one, and the cherry-bell winning mode, the 7-bell winning mode, or the replay winning mode is won by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, or which winning mode is selected. If it is determined that the player has not won, the display control device 81 causes the auxiliary display unit 65 to display a message “Challenge the cherry bell / 7 bell!” And causes the speaker 64 to output a dedicated voice. The auxiliary effect control unit is controlled to execute the "cherry bell winning / 7-bell winning challenge effect" in which the upper lamp 63 is turned on in a dedicated manner (see S911 in FIG. 20). Further, it is determined that the bet number is two, and the cherry bell winning mode or the replay winning mode has been won by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, or none of the winning modes has been won. If it is determined that the display control device 81 displays the message “Challenge the cherry bell!” On the auxiliary display portion 65, outputs a dedicated voice from the speaker 64, and causes the upper lamp 63 to operate in a dedicated mode. The auxiliary effect unit is controlled so as to execute the "cherry bell winning challenge effect" to be turned on (see S910 in FIG. 20).

  If the game is played with one coin, it is expected that 3 or 2 medals will be paid out by the establishment of the 1-bell prize or the 7-bell prize mode by "Cherry Bell prize / 7-bell prize challenge production". Can be strongly held by the player. Also, when the game is played with two coins, the player can be strongly expected to pay out three medals due to the establishment of the cherry bell prize mode by the "cherry bell prize challenge effect". . Therefore, the player can play the game by hanging one or two while having fun, and can make the player strongly think that he / she wants to play the game to the end without leaving extra medals.

  The "Cherry Bell prize / 7-bell prize challenge effect" and the "Cherry Bell prize challenge effect" may be effect modes performed on at least one of the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65. . In addition to these, a lamp is provided on the game panel 25, for example, if one lamp is lit, the lamp is lit in red, and if two lamps are hung, the lamp is lit in blue, so that each challenge is produced. May be configured to be performed.

  Further, when it is determined that the bet number is one or two, if it is determined by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101 that the BB winning mode is won, the display control device 81 causes the BB As an effect to notify the player that the winning mode has been set as a winning combination, a "BB winning notification effect" for displaying a message "BB winning!" On the auxiliary display portion 65 is executed (see S904 in FIG. 20). ), If it is determined that the watermelon winning mode has been won, the display control device 81 notifies the player that the watermelon winning mode has been set as a winning combination. If it is determined that the bell winning mode has been won by executing the “watermelon winning notification effect” that causes the message “Win!” To be displayed (see S906 in FIG. 20), the display controller 81 is displayed. , "Bell prize announcement effect" for displaying a message "Bell prize win!" On the auxiliary display unit 65 as an effect to notify the player that the bell prize mode has been set as a winning combination (see FIG. 20). (See S908).

  Here, when the player starts the game by multiplying one or two, that is, when the bet number is one or two, the BB is determined by the lottery table shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C. The winning probabilities of the winning modes, watermelon winning modes, and bell winning modes are kept extremely low, while the winning probabilities of the cherry bell winning mode and the 7-bell winning modes are set to be high, so that the player has a BB winning mode, There is a high possibility that the player will play a game with little expectation that the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode will be established, and conversely, the cherry bell winning mode and the 7 bell winning mode will be expected to be established. In addition, in this slot machine 10, the cherry bell winning mode and the 7 bell winning mode are effective in the corresponding stop symbols without fail even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at any timing once they are won as a winning combination. Since the player is configured to stop on the line, the player who starts the game with one or two reels is attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R displayed in the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is highly possible that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated without looking at the pattern.

  Therefore, when the game is played with one or two pieces, even if any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode is won as a winning combination, if the player does not notice it, Since the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode are all winning modes that may be missed, there is a risk that the BB winning mode or the like will be missed. In addition, since the winning of the BB winning mode is valid across the games until the BB winning mode is established (that is, until the stop symbols corresponding to the BB winning mode are aligned on the activated line), the player wins the BB. When the game is ended without noticing the winning of the winning mode, another player establishes the BB winning mode based on the winning of the BB winning mode, and the player who wins the winning of the BB winning mode is As a result, there is a risk of loss.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, when the game is played with one or two cards, if any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is won in the game, The winning is announced by the display on the auxiliary display unit 65. Then, the notification is performed while the player cannot operate the stop switches 42 to 44, as described later with reference to FIG. 14. Therefore, the player can know the winning of any one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode before operating the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the player plays the game by playing one or two, if the notification is given by the auxiliary display section 65, the winning combination (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode or bell winning mode) grasped by the notification Since the stop switches 42 to 44 can be operated aiming at the stop symbol in order to stop the stop symbol corresponding to the mode) on the activated line, those winning modes can be established with a higher probability. Further, when the winning of the BB winning mode is announced, even if the player fails to win the game, the player can continue to play the game until the BB winning mode is established by newly lending the medal. it can.

  The above notification may be made by turning on the upper lamp 63 or by outputting sound from the speaker 64. Two or more kinds of information, that is, the display on the auxiliary display unit 65, the upper lamp 63, and the sound output from the speaker 64 are displayed. It may be performed in combination. In addition, a notification-dedicated lamp may be provided on the game panel 25, and a notification effect corresponding to each winning combination may be performed by the lighting color of the lamp.

  As described above, the character ROM 187 is a memory that stores the data of the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and is connected to the MPU 181 via the internal bus. An image controller 188 is also connected to the internal bus, and the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 187 to transfer the image data stored in the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 connected to the image controller 188 or the normal use. It can be transferred to the video RAM 190.

  The character ROM 187 is composed of a NAND flash memory 187a. Since the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, the character ROM 187 can be easily increased in capacity. For example, in this slot machine, many images are stored as images to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 by using the NAND flash memory 187a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes. This makes it possible to diversify and complicate the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

  In the NAND flash memory 187a, a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs due to its nature. Therefore, the character ROM 187 is provided with a known arbitration circuit 187b (see, for example, Patent Document 1) that performs data address conversion so that data can be read from and written to the NAND flash memory 187a while avoiding defective data blocks. It is provided. The arbitration circuit 187b analyzes a defective data block of the NAND flash memory 187a inside the character ROM 187 and avoids access to the defective data block, so that the MPU 181 has different defects in each NAND flash memory 187a. The character ROM 187 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the data block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a is used as the character ROM 187, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 187 from becoming complicated.

  The image controller 188 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the auxiliary display unit 65 at a predetermined timing, and is connected to the MPU 181 via an internal bus. Then, based on an instruction from the MPU 181, an image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is drawn, and data (drawing image data) corresponding to the drawn image is output to the auxiliary display unit via the input / output port at a predetermined timing. By transferring the drawn image data to the auxiliary display unit 65, the drawn image data is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  A resident video RAM 189 and a normal video RAM 190 are connected to the image controller 188, and image data required for drawing an image by the image controller 188 is read from the character ROM 187 in advance by the MPU 181 before drawing and resident. It is transferred to the normal video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. At this time, the MPU 181 determines which of the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 is to be transferred (and at which address) the MPU 181 is based on the program or table stored in the program ROM 184, depending on the content of the image. To decide.

  When the image controller 188 draws an image, the image data in the character ROM 187 is not used, but the image drawing process is executed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. As a result, even if the character ROM 187 is configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed, the image controller 188 uses the image data previously stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 from the character ROM 187 to generate an image. Since the drawing is performed, the drawing of the image can be immediately executed without being affected by the slow reading speed of the character ROM 187. Therefore, a desired image can be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 at a desired time.

  The MPU 181 determines whether the image data required when the image controller 188 draws an image is stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 (and at what address). The storage location of the image data required (resident video RAM 189 and normal video) when the image controller 188 is instructed to draw an image based on the program or table stored in Which of the RAMs 190 is stored and at which address it is stored) are also designated. The image controller 188 reads out necessary image data from a predetermined address of the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 based on an instruction from the MPU 181. As a result, the image controller 188 does not need to determine the storage destination in which the necessary image data is stored, and can concentrate on the drawing of the image.

  When the image controller 188 receives an instruction to draw an image from the MPU 181, the storage location of the image data required for drawing (the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190) is changed according to the type of image required for drawing. It is also possible to determine which one is stored and which address is stored. In this case, when the MPU 181 stores the image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the image controller 188 causes the image type (or the corresponding image) displayed by the stored image data. The address of the character ROM 187 in which the data is stored and the storage destination of the image data are determined based on the control signal from the MPU 181, and the image type (or corresponding) is stored in the RAM provided in the image controller 188. The address of the character ROM 187 in which the image data is stored) and the storage destination of the image data may be stored in association with each other. Then, based on the information stored in the RAM, the image controller 188 may determine the storage destination of the image data required for the image. By determining the storage destination of the image data by the image controller 188, the processing load of the MPU 181 can be reduced.

  The resident video RAM 189 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) having one input / output port (hereinafter, referred to as “1 port type”), and the image data transferred from the character ROM 187 is overwritten while the power is turned on. It is used so that it can be retained without being damaged. As a result, the image data transferred from the character ROM 189 becomes resident in the resident video RAM 189. In the resident video RAM 189, of the images displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, data corresponding to the image displayed when the power is turned on, data corresponding to the frequently displayed image, and the main control device 101. Alternatively, the data corresponding to the image to be displayed immediately among the images determined to be displayed by the display control device 81 is transferred from the character ROM 187 and made resident.

  On the other hand, the normal-use video RAM 190 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is composed of a 1-port type DRAM (Dynamic RAM). In the normal video RAM 190, when the image controller 188 draws an image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 using image data not resident in the resident video RAM 189, the image data read from the character ROM 187 in advance. To store temporarily. The image data drawn by the image controller 188 (drawing image data) is also stored in a drawing image area (not shown) provided in the normal video RAM 190, and the image controller 188 adjusts the display timing of the auxiliary display section 65. By transmitting the drawn image data stored in the drawn image area of the normal video RAM 190 to the auxiliary display unit 65, the image corresponding to the drawn image data is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  The resident video RAM 189 is provided with a power-on main image area 189a, a back image area 189b, a character symbol area 189c, a notification effect image area 189d, and an error message image area 189e.

  The power-on main image area 189a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 while the display control device 81 is performing the initialization process at power-on. The power-on main image is a message image for notifying the player that initialization processing etc. accompanying the power-on is being performed, and a message such as "Power-on! Please wait for a while". Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed.

  In the display control device 81, when the power switch 71 is turned on and power is supplied from the power supply device 91 to the display control device 81, the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 181 and the character ROM 181 first corresponds to the power-on main image. The data is read out and transferred to the main image area 189a at power-on of the resident video RAM 189 via a buffer RAM 188a described later provided in the image controller 188 (see S702 and S703 in FIG. 17). When the image data is stored in the power-on main image area 189a, the MPU 181 instructs the image controller 188 to draw the power-on main image (see S70 in FIG. 17). Thereby, in the image controller 188, the power-on main image is drawn using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 189a, and the drawn power-on main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. . Then, the power-on main image is controlled to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed.

  Here, in the initialization processing of the display control device 81, other image data (image data other than the main image at power-on) to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is read from the character ROM 187 and transferred to the resident video RAM 189. Processing is included (see S707 to S710 in FIG. 17). That is, since all the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189 after the power is turned on, after the initialization process is completed, the image controller 188 is used while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 189. The image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 189, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND flash memory 187a whose reading speed is slow at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 189 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81. Even if the character ROM 187 is configured by the NAND flash memory 187a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness from a player operating the start lever 41 or the stop buttons 42 to 44 to displaying an image on the auxiliary display unit 65. it can.

  Further, the display control device 81 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 187 to the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189 immediately after the power is supplied, and the power is supplied without delay after the transfer is completed. After the power-on main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the power-on main image is controlled to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed. The main image at power-on is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 after being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is transferred from the character RO 187 to the resident video RAM 189. Continue to be done.

  In the slot machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 187a is used as the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is stored in the character ROM 187 due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to transfer to the video RAM 189, but after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the main image at power-on is supplemented. Since the image data to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189 after being displayed on the display unit 65 is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, the remaining resident image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 189. While being played, players and hall officials , Main image when displayed power-on the auxiliary display unit 65 can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 81 can transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. it can. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, and therefore, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

  Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored in the main image area 189a at power-on of the resident video RAM 189, so that it is resident in the resident video RAM 189 in the event of a momentary power failure. If there is remaining data, the power-on main image can be immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 by using the image data resident in the power-on main image area 189a when the power is restored.

  The back image area 189b and the character design area 189c are areas for storing image data corresponding to the back image and the character design used in various effects displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, respectively. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of a main image such as a character pattern displayed on the auxiliary display unit 6.

  In the display control device 81, based on the command received from the main control device 101, when it is determined that the game state of the slot machine 10 shifts to a different game state (for example, from the normal state to the bonus state), the rear image and the character pattern are displayed. The back image and the character design are configured to be changed when changing or performing various other effects, and it is required that the back image and the character design change immediately according to the content of the received command.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, in the initialization process performed in the display control device 81 when the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the rear image and the character pattern are respectively transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189. To a rear image area 189b and a character symbol area 189c via a buffer RAM 188a, which will be described later, provided in the image controller 188 (see S707 to S710 in FIG. 17). Then, when changing the back image or the character design based on the content of the command received from the main control device 101, the display control device 81 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, but the resident video RAM 189. By reading the image data resident in advance in the back image area 189b or the character pattern area 189c, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 188. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 187, the back image and the character design can be changed immediately.

  Image data corresponding to all the back images may be resident in the back image area 189b, or image data corresponding to some of the back images may be resident. Further, when the image data corresponding to a part of the rear image is made resident, at least the data corresponding to the rear image to be displayed immediately in response to the reception command from the main control device 101 may be made resident. As a result, when the back image is immediately changed by receiving the reception command from the main control device 101, the back image area 189b always contains the image data corresponding to the changed back image. An image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 using the image data and displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  When the back image is scrolled and displayed over time, the image data corresponding to the entire scrolled range may be made resident in the back image area 189b, or within a predetermined time from the time when the back image is changed. The image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed in <1> may be resident in the back image area 189b. Also, for a predetermined back image such as a back image displayed after power-on, image data corresponding to the entire scrolled range is resident in the back image area 189b, and for another back image, a predetermined time has elapsed since the time when the back image was changed. Image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within may be made resident in the back image area 189b. As a result, at least the image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within the predetermined time from the time when the rear image is changed is resident in the rear image area 189b. Therefore, when changing to the rear image scrolled with time. Even if there is, the image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 using the image data resident in the back image area 189b and displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  Further, when changing to a back image that is scrolled and displayed, it is more preferable that the position of the back image displayed at the time of change is always started from a fixedly set initial position. . As a result, the image data to be resident in the back image area 189b can be limited to the image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within a predetermined time from the fixedly set initial position, and the data amount can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  When the image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within a predetermined time from the time when the rear image is changed is resident in the rear image area 189b, the image controller 188 uses the image data resident in the rear image area 189b. While the image is drawn and the drawn image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the MPU 181 reads the image data corresponding to the remaining scroll range from the character ROM 187 and transfers it to the normal video RAM 190. You can

  As a result, while the back image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in the scroll range corresponding to the back image data resident in the back image area 189, it corresponds to the scroll range not resident in the back image area 189. Since the back image data is transferred to the normal video RAM 190, the back image data already stored in the normal video RAM 190 is used when displaying the back image in the scroll range not resident in the back image area 189. Then, the image can be immediately drawn by the image controller and displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. Therefore, at the time of shifting from the display of the back image in the scroll range resident in the back image area 189b to the display of the back image in the scroll range not resident in the back image area 189b, the back image is read again from the character ROM 187. Since it is not necessary, even when the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 187, the rear surface image can be smoothly moved.

  On the other hand, also in the character symbol area 189c, data corresponding to all the character symbols may be made resident, or data corresponding to some character symbols may be made resident. Further, when resident data corresponding to some character symbols, at least data corresponding to character symbols to be displayed immediately in response to a command received from the main control device 101 may be resident. As a result, when the received command is received from the main control device 101 and the character design is immediately changed, the image data corresponding to the changed character design is always resident in the character design area 189c. An image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 using the image data and displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  The notification effect image area 189d is an area for storing image data corresponding to the notification effect displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the error message image area 189e is used when an error occurs in the slot machine 10. Is an area for storing image data corresponding to the error message displayed on the auxiliary display section 65.

  For example, when the game is played with a bet number of one or two, and as a result of the lottery, any one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is won as a winning combination, the display control device 81 In accordance with the winning combination, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to perform control so that the BB winning notification effect, the watermelon winning notification effect, and the bell winning notification effect are performed (see S903 to S908 of FIG. 20). In this case, in the display control device 81, the winning combination is grasped by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, and various notification effects are performed according to the grasped winning combination, but the notification effect is It must be done before the stop buttons 42-44 are operated by the player. In addition, since the lottery for the winning combination is performed after the player operates the start lever 41 by the main control device 101, the stop buttons 42 to 44 can be operated by the player after the start lever 41 is operated. In a very short time until, the main control device 101 performs the lottery of the winning combination, the main control device 101 notifies the display control device 81 of the lottery result by the lottery result command, and then the display control is performed. Although the corresponding notification effect must be performed by the means 81, in the slot machine 10, in the notification effect image area 189d, image data corresponding to each of the BB winning notification effect, the watermelon winning notification effect, and the bell winning notification effect. The display control device 81 is based on the lottery result command received from the main control device 101. , BB prize announcement effect, watermelon prize announcement effect and bell prize announcement effect, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, it is previously resident in the announcement effect image area 189d of the resident video RAM 189. Each notification effect image can be drawn by the image controller 188 by reading the displayed image data. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 187, each announcement effect image is stopped after the lottery result command is received. The buttons 42 to 44 can be displayed before they can be operated by the player.

  Further, in the present slot machine 10, the main controller 101 causes the inserted medals to detect the inserted medals based on the detection results of the inserted medals detection devices (the first inserted medals detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medals detection sensor 45b). If it is determined that the card is jammed during passage or that the medal is illegally pulled out, the main control device 101 notifies the display control device 81 of the occurrence of a sensor error by an error command, as described above. Further, even when the main control device 101 detects the occurrence of another error, the main control device 101 notifies the display control device 81 of the occurrence of the error together with the content of the error by an error command. Then, when the display control device 81 receives the error command, the display control device 81 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. Since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance, the display control device 81 newly creates the image data corresponding to the predetermined error message from the character ROM 187 based on the error command received from the main control device 101. By reading the image data that has been previously resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM 189, instead of reading the error message image, the image controller 188 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 187. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 187, each error message is issued after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The image controller 188 is provided with a buffer RAM 188a. The buffer RAM 188a functions as a buffer memory for data transfer from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, and has a storage capacity (for example, 132 blocks) of the NAND flash memory 187a provided in the character ROM 187. It is configured by an SRAM (Static RAM) having a kilobyte, and is directly accessible from the MPU 181.

  When transferring image data from the character ROM 187 to the normal-use video RAM 189 or the normal-use video RAM 190, the MPU 181 reads out one block of data from the character ROM 187 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 188a to store the resident video RAM 189 or the normal-use video. When the RAM 190 is unused, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is transferred to the resident RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190.

  If the buffer RAM 188 is not provided and the image data is directly transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the character ROM 187 is composed of the NAND flash memory 187a, and therefore the reading speed is slow. Therefore, while the image data of a desired size is being transferred, the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 constituted by the 1-port type DRAM has its 1 port occupied by the image data transfer from the character ROM 187, and the The time and other data cannot be accessed. As a result, during that time, the image controller 188 cannot read the image data from the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 to draw an image or transfer the drawn image data to the auxiliary display unit 65. The image display on the auxiliary display unit 65 may be delayed. Even when a multi-port type (type having a plurality of input / output ports) DRAM is used as the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, one port is occupied by the image data transfer from the character ROM 187. Therefore, the control using the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 in the image controller 188 is limited, and the control may be complicated.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, since the image controller 188 is provided with the buffer RAM 188a configured by the SRAM capable of high-speed operation, the image data read from the character ROM 187 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a. After being stored, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 in a short time. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to.

  The image display on the auxiliary display unit 65 is performed periodically at fixed time intervals (for example, about every 30 milliseconds), and the image controller 188 displays the image display timing on the auxiliary display unit 65. Accordingly, the drawing of the image and the drawn image data must be transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, in order to access the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190, it is necessary to prioritize reading of image data necessary for drawing and writing and reading of drawn image data.

  In the slot machine 10, the resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 188 is accessing the resident video RAM 189 (that is, being in use) and the image controller 188 are for normal use. The image controller 188 is provided with a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the video RAM 190 is being accessed (that is, being in use). Each of these access flags is set to ON when the image controller 188 is accessing the corresponding video RAM, and is set to OFF when not accessing. When transferring the image data from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the MPU 181 confirms the contents of the access flags corresponding to the transfer destination video RAMs 189 and 190, and reads the image data necessary for drawing. Alternatively, it is confirmed whether or not the transfer destination video RAMs 189 and 190 are being used by the image controller 188 in order to write or read the drawn image data. Then, when the transfer destination video RAMs 189 and 190 are not in use, the image data is controlled to be transferred. As a result, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 without interrupting the reading of the image data necessary for drawing and the writing or reading of the drawing image data.

  Here, the display timing of the image on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a scanning area of the screen included in the auxiliary display unit 65 and a display area in which an image is actually displayed on the screen. As shown in FIG. 11, an area larger than the display area in which the image is actually displayed is set as the scanning area, and when the image is displayed on the screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, the scanning area is Scanning is performed from left to right toward the screen and from top to bottom while driving each pixel forming the screen (so-called raster scan). At this time, since the drawn image data is actually set only in the display area in which the image is displayed, a period (so-called blank period) in which scanning is performed on a blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area is The image controller 188 does not transfer the drawn image data to the auxiliary display unit 65. That is, during the blank period, even when the image is displayed by scanning the auxiliary display unit 65, the image is not drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. In addition, the drawn image data stored in the normal video RAM 190 is not read and transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, during this blank period, there always exists a period during which the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 are unused, so that the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is By using the unused period of each of the video RAMs 189 and 190 that occurs during the blank period, it can be surely performed.

  In the MPU 181, as a method of confirming whether the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is in use, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 188 and the resident video RAM 189 or an image controller is used. The MPU 181 may monitor a signal transmitted and received between the 188 and the normal video RAM 190, and from the state of the signal, it may be confirmed whether the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is in use. Further, when the image controller 188 starts or ends access to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the image controller 188 notifies the MPU 181 of this information at any time, so that the MPU 181 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is in use.

  Further, when the image controller 188 scans the auxiliary display unit 65, the MPU 181 checks whether the image controller 188 is in the driving state or whether the blank period is in progress, or by a notification from the image controller 188, When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 189 and 190 is unused. As a result, only the scanning state of the auxiliary display portion 65 of the image controller 188 is confirmed and it is determined whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

  Subsequently, each control process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the MPU 102 is roughly classified into a main processing started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing which is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in the present embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is NMI interrupt processing that is activated in response to input. In the following, among these processes, the process relating to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 12 to 17.

  First, with reference to FIG. 12, a timer interrupt process periodically executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. In the MPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, a timer interrupt occurs every 1.49 msec, and the MPU 102 executes the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 in response to the timer interrupt.

  In this timer interrupt processing, first, register saving processing is performed (S101). In this register saving process, the values of all the registers in the MPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set (S102), and if the power failure flag is set (S102: Yes), the power failure process is executed (S103).

  Here, an outline of the power failure process executed in S103 will be described.

  When the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply apparatus 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control apparatus 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes an NMI interrupt process and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) provided in RAM 106.

  In the power failure process, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission is not completed, this process is terminated and the timer interrupt process is resumed to terminate the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the MPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared and all the actuators (not shown) are turned off. This prevents the reel unit 31 from running out of control until the power is completely cut off, and prevents abnormal output from being output from the output devices such as the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64.

  Then, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal when the power outage is resolved and stored in the backup area to prohibit subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. It should be noted that in consideration of a case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power outage signal is not output, it means that the power outage has been recovered. Therefore, the writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, the timer interrupt process is restored, and the process proceeds to S104. If the power failure signal is continuously output, the loop enters the infinite loop. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is not output, the process proceeds to the main process.

  Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in the process of S102 (S102: No), various processes after S104 are performed. That is, in the process of S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. Next, an interrupt end declaration process is performed to allow the next timer interrupt to be set to the MPU 102 itself (S105), and stepping motors, which are the respective spinning cylinder drive motors, are rotated in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Stepping motor control processing for driving the motor is performed (S106). Next, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 8) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read. At the same time, sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not the reading result is normal (S107).

  In this sensor monitoring process, if there is an abnormality in the reading result of each sensor, for example, from the detection results of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b, clogging of inserted medals, pulling out, etc. If the injustice is detected, it is determined that a sensor error has occurred, and in order to notify the occurrence of the sensor error from the auxiliary effect production unit (the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65), the error type is related. An error command including information is transmitted to the display control device 81.

  In the subsequent processing of S108, timer calculation processing for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed (S108), and the bet number for outputting the bet number of medals and the result of counting the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121. In / out counter processing is performed (S109).

  Next, a command output process of transmitting various commands such as a start command and a lottery result command described below to the display control device 81 is performed (S110). After that, a segment data setting process for setting segment data displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout amount display unit 61, and the payout amount display unit 62 is performed (S111), and then the segment set by the segment data setting process is performed. The segment data display processing of supplying the data to each of the display units 60 to 62 and displaying the corresponding numbers and symbols is performed (S112).

  Then, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed (S113), and the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous process of S101 is stored in the MPU 102. The corresponding register is restored (S114). After that, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (S115), and this series of timer interrupt processes ends.

  Next, a normal process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing.

  The normal process is a process for performing the main control related to the game. When the normal process is executed by the MPU 102, first, the interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (S201), and then the game is enabled. A pre-start process for doing so is performed (S202). In this pre-start process, the display control device 81 and the like wait until the initialization is completed. Then, when the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, the game management processing shown in subsequent S203 to S213 is performed.

  As the game management process, first, in the process of S203, data of various game information and the like stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random number values used in the previous game and each winning flag indicating winning of each winning except BB winning) After clearing, a start waiting process is performed in the subsequent process of S204.

  In the start waiting process of S204, it is determined whether or not a replay prize has been established in the previous game, and if the replay prize has been established, an automatic insertion process that automatically inserts the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number. Then, the start waiting process ends. In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, when the replay prize is established in the previous game, the player can play this game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting any medals.

  On the other hand, if none of the replay prizes has been established, the sensor for confirming whether or not the sensor reading result of the sensor monitoring process of the timer interrupt process (see S107 of FIG. 12) is abnormal. An abnormality confirmation process is performed. If an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is brought into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

  When the sensor reading result is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 is operated, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated, a medal return process of paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do. After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, it is determined whether or not a medal has been inserted or the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the present start waiting process. It is determined whether or not any one of them is performed, the medal insertion process is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. If neither a medal has been inserted nor the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the present start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated.

  After the start waiting process of S204 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the bet number of medals has reached the specified number (S205). If the bet number has not reached the specified number (S205: No), S204 Returning to the start waiting processing of step 1, the processing after the sensor abnormality confirmation processing of the processing is performed. In the present embodiment, the specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state of the slot machine 10.

  That is, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the general gaming state, the prescribed number is set to 1 to 3, and when it is in the bonus state, the prescribed number is set to 3. As a result, the game can be started in the normal gaming state even if the bet number is not only three but also one or two. Then, when the game is started with the bet number of one or two (one or two bets), in the lottery process (see S210) to be described later, the one-table lottery table or two Since a lottery table for winning is set and lottery of winning mode (role) is performed, there is a high probability that the number of medals paid out is 3 when the game is played with 1 or 2 coins. It is possible to establish a prize or a 7-bell prize in which the number of paid-out medals is two. When three medals have been paid out due to the establishment of the Cherry Bell prize, the player can insert the three medals and play another game while expecting to achieve the BB prize. The player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. In addition, when two medals are paid out due to the establishment of the 7-bell prize, the player throws in the two medals and expects to establish the cherry bell prize in which three more medals will be paid out. You can enjoy another game. Then, if the Cherry Bell winning is established, the player can play the game by inserting the three medals paid out while expecting the winning of the BB winning, so that the player can play the game to the end without leaving extra medals. You can enjoy Further, even if the result of the game executed by inserting one or two medals is missed, the game can be ended without leaving any extra medals for the player. As described above, even if the bet number is one or two in the normal game state, the player is updated by using the one-table-drawing lottery table and the two-table-winning lottery table set in the present embodiment. It is possible to give fun of playing a game, and to enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals.

  On the other hand, by setting the prescribed number of bets to be 3 when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, in the bonus state, a watermelon with a large number of paid-out medals while allowing the player to insert 3 medals. By increasing the winning probability of winning the prize or bell and setting the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to be high, it is possible to achieve the total number of medals paid out in the bonus state of 250 with a small number of games. Therefore, the player can receive a large number of medals in a short time, and on the other hand, on the hole side, the operating rate of the slot machine 10 can be increased.

  As a result of the processing in S205, when the bet number has reached the specified number (S205: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (S206). Then, when the start lever 41 is not operated (S206: No), the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

  On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated (S206: Yes), the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated while the specified number of medals are bet on the slot machine 10. Therefore, it means that the start command is issued to start the game. Therefore, in such a case, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance (S207). In the subsequent process of 208, a valid line setting process of setting a valid line is performed (S208). In this effective line setting process, all the combination lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, the lower line L3, the lower right line L4, and the upper right line L5 are set as effective lines.

  Then, the start command is set (S209). Here, the start command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to know that the start command has been issued. In this normal process, the information regarding the bet number (the number of inserted medals) accepted in the process of S205 is included in this start command and set. Then, the start command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer (not shown) that stores various commands generated in the normal processing, and is executed every 1.49 ms (see FIG. 12). It is transmitted to the display control device 81 by the processing of S110 of (see). Thereby, the display control device 81 can recognize that the game start command is generated by the reception of the start command, and can also recognize the number of medals (bet number) inserted by the player for the game. Therefore, various effects can be made to be executed by each auxiliary effect section (the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65) according to the bet number.

  After that, the lottery process of S210, the reel control process of S211, the medal payout process of S212, and the bonus state process of S213 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to S203. In the power interruption process (S103) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), the processes of S203 to S213 are repeatedly executed until the power switch 71 shuts off the power or enters an infinite loop due to a power failure.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the lottery process (S210) executed in the normal process (see FIG. 13) in the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the lottery process.

  In the lottery process, first, a random number used when performing the lottery of the winning mode (winning part) is acquired (S301). In the present slot machine 10, as described above, each time the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter 107 at that time. By reading the value of the counter 107 and storing the value in a predetermined area of the RAM 106, the value of the random number used in the lottery is acquired.

  After the random number is obtained by the process of S301, the lottery table setting process for setting the lottery table for performing the lottery of the winning mode is performed (S302). Here, the details of the lottery table setting process in S302 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a lottery table setting process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101. In the lottery table setting process, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined, and further, the lottery table storage area 105a is determined according to the number of inserted medals (the number of bets) and the set state set in the slot machine 10. The corresponding lottery table is set from among the plurality of lottery tables stored in.

  In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is a bonus state (S401). As a result, if the gaming state is not the bonus state (S401: No), the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is a general game. Since it is in the state, it is then determined whether or not the number of inserted medals (the number of bets) is 3 (3 coins multiplied) (S402). If the bet number is 3 (S402: Yes), the 6-piece lottery table for three-piece play is provided corresponding to each of the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6” that the slot machine 10 can take. Among them, the three-sheet multiplication lottery table corresponding to the currently set setting state is set (S403), the lottery table setting process is ended, and the process returns to the lottery process. As a result, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the general gaming state and when the game is started with the bet number of 3 pieces, the three-piece lottery table corresponding to the set state of the slot machine 10 is set. .

  Further, as a result of the processing in S402, when it is determined that the bet number is not 3 (S402: No), it is then determined whether or not the bet number is 2 (two) (S404). If the number of bets is two (S404: Yes), the six-two-drawing lottery table provided corresponding to the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6” that the slot machine 10 can take. Among them, the two-sheet multiplication lottery table corresponding to the currently set setting state is set (S405), the lottery table setting process is ended, and the process returns to the lottery process. As a result, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the general gaming state and when the game is started with the bet number of two, the two-lot-drawing lottery table corresponding to the set state of the slot machine 10 is set. .

  When it is determined that the bet number is not two as a result of the processing in S404 (S404: No), it can be determined that the bet number is one (one bet), and thus the slot machine 10 can take “. Of the six one-piece-drawing lottery tables provided corresponding to the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6", the one-piece-drawing lottery table corresponding to the currently set setting state is set. (S406), the lottery table setting process ends, and the process returns to the lottery process. As a result, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the general gaming state and when the game is started with the bet number of one sheet, the one-drawing lottery table corresponding to the set state of the slot machine 10 is set. ..

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S401, if the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the bonus state (S401: Yes), the slot machine 10 is provided corresponding to the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6", respectively. Of the six bonus state lottery tables thus set, the bonus state lottery table corresponding to the currently set setting state is set (S407), the lottery table setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the lottery process. As a result, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the bonus state, the bonus time lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set.

  In this way, in the lottery table setting process, the lottery table storage area 105a is stored according to the current game state of the slot machine 10, the number of inserted medals (the number of bets), and the setting state set in the slot machine 10. A corresponding lottery table is set from among the selected lottery tables.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description of the lottery process will be continued. When the lottery table setting process of S302 is completed, next, the index value IV is set to 1 (S303), and the determination value DV used when performing the lottery (winning / absence determination) of the winning mode is set (S304). In the judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In the first determination value setting process, the random number value obtained in step S301 is set as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to 1 which is the current index value IV is added to this random number value to obtain a new determination value DV. The determination value DV is used.

  Then, in step S305, a lottery for a winning mode corresponding to the index value IV is performed. In this lottery, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. When the number exceeds 65535 (S305: Yes), the winning flag of the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 (S306). That is, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 1, in the process of S306, the BB winning prize flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, and when IV = 2, the determination value DV exceeds 65535. In the case of S306, the watermelon winning prize flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 3, in the process of S306, the bell winning flag is set to the winning flag. When the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when set in the storage area 106a and IV = 4, in the process of S306, the cherry bell winning award flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, and the determination is made when IV = 5. When the value DV exceeds 65535, in the processing of S306, the 7-bell winning prize flag is set to the winning flag storage area 106a. Set, if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 at IV = 6, in the processing of S306 sets the replay winning winning flag to the winning flag storage area 106a.

  By the way, if the winning flag set is one of the watermelon winning prize flag, bell winning prize flag, cherry bell winning prize flag, 7-bell winning prize flag, and replay winning prize flag, this winning flag is set It is reset after the end of the played game (see S203 of normal processing shown in FIG. 13). On the other hand, when the set winning flag is the BB winning combination flag, the BB winning combination flag is reset under the condition that the BB winning combination is established. That is, the BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games. For example, after the BB winning award flag is set, if the symbols are not aligned in the stop symbols in the BB winning mode, that is, if the BB winning is not established, the BB winning award flag is not reset and carried over to the next game. Be done.

  In the process of S306 in the state where the BB prize winning flag is carried over, if the current index value IV is 1, the BB prize winning flag is not set, and if the current index value IV is 2 to 6, the index value is The winning flag corresponding to IV is set. That is, in a game in which the BB winning combination flag is carried over, the corresponding winning flag is set when the winning mode other than the BB winning combination is won, while the corresponding BB winning combination flag is set when the BB winning combination is won. Do not set.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 (S305: No), it means that the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV is deviated. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (S307), and then it is determined whether or not there is a winning mode corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination part that should be selected by lottery (judgment). S308). Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a winning combination to be judged (S308: Yes), the process returns to S304 and the winning / non-winning judgment of the winning mode is continued. At this time, in the process of S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV used for determining whether the winning combination is valid (that is, the current determination value DV), and a new determination value DV is added. In the process of S305, the winning / non-winning determination of the winning mode is performed based on the determination value DV.

  Here, by the lottery table setting process of S302, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the general gaming state, the three-game multi-use lottery table, the two-game multi-use lottery table, and the one-game multi-use lottery for the general game state Since the lottery table to be used is set from the table according to the bet number, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 9, the probability of winning the BB prize when the game is played by inserting three medals is 1 The prize-winning lottery is performed after the game is set sufficiently higher than when the game is played by inserting one or two medals. Therefore, as described above, while expecting the player to obtain a large number of medals by winning the BB prize, it is possible to insert three medals and play one game. Therefore, the medals are consumed quickly, and the operating rate of the slot machine in the hole can be increased.

  Further, when the game is played by inserting one or two medals, the Cherry Bell prize with three medals payout is set as the winning candidate and the winning probability is set high, and then the winning mode is set. Since a lottery will be held, if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, if the Cherry Bell prize is established, three medals can be paid out with a high probability that the BB prize will be achieved. While expecting a player, it is possible to insert one or two medals remaining at hand and play one game. Further, when the game is played by inserting one medal, the 7-belt winning with two coins paid out is also set as a winning candidate and the winning probability thereof is set to be high, and then the winning mode lottery is performed. Since it will be held, while expecting the player that if one medal remains in the player's hand, if the 7-bell winning is established, two medal payouts that can aim for the cherry bell winning again can be obtained, It is possible to play one game by inserting the remaining one medal. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player to the end without leaving extra medals.

  In addition, when the one-drawing lottery table or the two-drawing lottery table is set and the lottery in the winning mode is performed, as described above with reference to FIG. Also in this case, the prize-winning lottery can be performed by setting the ratio of the number of paid-out coins to the bet number to less than 100% and as close as possible to 100%. Therefore, even if you play a game with one or two medals, the number of medals does not decrease, so if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, use that one or two medals. You can be sure that you want to play a game. On the other hand, the number of medals is reduced if the game is repeated by playing one or two, so that the player cannot aim for an increase in medals by repeatedly playing the game with one or two. If there are three or more medals, it is possible to instruct the player to play the game with three coins with a high probability of winning the BB prize.

  Further, by switching each lottery table according to the bet number and then performing the lottery of the winning mode, as described above with reference to FIGS. 7 and 9, the cherry bell wins by one or two. The prize mode is established only when the game is played, and when the game is played with three cards, it can be handled as a misalignment without establishing the Cherry Bell prize. The player can be made to pay attention as a special small winning a prize for hanging and double-hanging. Similarly, if the 7-belt winning is established only when the game is played with one piece, and if the game is played with two or three sheets, the 7-bell winning is not established. Since it is handled as an outlier, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the 7-bell prize as a special small prize prize for exclusive use of one piece. Therefore, when the game is played with one piece or two pieces, if the symbol stops due to the stop symbol of the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize, it is possible to give the player great pleasure.

  In addition, even when the game is played with one or two cards, it is possible to carry out the lottery of the winning mode by setting so that the BB winning is achieved although the winning probability is extremely low. It is possible to give the player an expectation that a BB winning will be achieved when the game is played with one or two.

  In addition, while the probability of winning the watermelon prize or the bell prize when the game is played with one or two coins is lowered, the winning probability of the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize is set to be high, and the prize mode lottery is performed. Since it is possible to perform, it is possible to further impress to the player that the cherry bell prize or the 7-bell prize is a special small role prize with one or two coins. When the game is played with two coins, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize will be established.

  After the winning flag is set in the process of S306, or when it is determined in the process of S308 that there is no determination role to be drawn (S308: No), it means that the lottery in the winning mode is completed. In such a case, the lottery result command is set (S309). Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / non-winning judgment of the winning combination, and the winning mode corresponding to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. The lottery result command is generated so that the information indicating that the winning combination is included is included. Therefore, when not only the winning flag set by the lottery of the current game but also the winning flag of the BB winning combination carried over from the past games and stored in the winning flag storage area 106a, the BB winning mode is also a winning combination. The lottery result command is suggested. Further, when the winning flag is not set in the winning flag storage area 106a, the lottery result command suggests that there is no winning combination and the player is out.

  Like the start command, the lottery result command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer (not shown) that stores various commands generated in the normal processing, and is executed every 1.49 ms by the above timer. It is transmitted to the display control device 81 by the processing of S110 of the interrupt processing (see FIG. 12). Upon receiving the lottery result command, the display control device 81 executes drive control of the upper lamp 63 and the auxiliary display unit 65 to suggest a winning combination, for example.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery result command is set after the lottery in the winning mode and before the reel control process (S211 in FIG. 13) for controlling the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The lottery result command is transmitted to the display control device 81 within at least about 1.5 ms after the command is set (that is, after a time lag until the command is transmitted by the timer interrupt processing). Since the display control device 81 is configured to execute the lottery result command processing (see FIG. 20) described later without delay when the lottery result command is received, after the player operates the start lever 41. While the stop switches 42 to 44 are inoperable, it is possible to cause the auxiliary effect section (the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65) to perform an effect or the like suggesting a winning combination. Therefore, the player can grasp the winning combination suggested by the effect before operating the stop switches 42 to 44, and the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the grasped winning combination. Can be adjusted.

  Next, a sliding table setting process for setting a sliding table (stop table) for reel stop control is performed (S310), and the lottery process is ended. Here, the sliding table is a table in which it is determined how much the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be slid (rotated) and then stopped from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. That is, the sliding table is an arrival pattern (arrival pattern) that has reached the base point position (lower position of each of the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R in the present embodiment) when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed. No.), and a stop data group capable of deriving a relationship between a stop symbol (stop symbol number) that is actually stopped at the base point position.

  As described above, in the present slot machine 10, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, as the stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the reaching symbol reaching the base point position is stopped as it is. Stop mode, stop mode to stop after sliding the corresponding reel by one symbol, stop mode to stop after sliding by 2 symbols, stop mode to stop after sliding by 3 symbols, and 4 symbols Five patterns of stop modes are prepared: a stop mode that stops after sliding. In the sliding table, for each symbol number of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop mode to be set when the symbol indicated by the symbol number becomes the reaching symbol is defined from the above 5 patterns. Several sliding tables are prepared for each winning mode.

  By setting this sliding table, it is set that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in a predetermined stop mode until the specified time (190 msec) elapses from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. It is possible to make the player have an impression as if the symbol arrangement (stop result) that stops in the visible range from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is determined by the operation of the player.

  In the sliding table setting process of S310, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is confirmed, and the sliding table uniquely corresponding to the set winning flag is set to the sliding table storage area of the RAM 106. Set to 106b. As a result, it is possible to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning mode (see FIG. 7), which is won in the lottery as much as possible within the specified time, on the activated line (see FIG. 6), It is possible to prevent the symbol combination corresponding to the winning mode that is not won in the lottery from stopping on the activated line.

  Here, as described above, the BB prize-winning flag is configured to be carried over to the next game until the BB prize is established, so that the lottery performed in one game is performed. The winning flag corresponding to any of the watermelon prize, the bell prize, the cherry bell prize, the 7-bell prize, and the replay prize, which are set as a result, and the carried-over BB prize prize flag are simultaneously set in the prize flag storage 106a. There is a case. In this case, instead of the BB prize, the process of setting the sliding table corresponding to the watermelon winning, the bell winning, the cherry bell winning, the 7 bell winning or the replay winning having the winning flag set in the sliding table storage area 106b is performed. Done. As a result, the winning flag is cleared for each game, and if the winning combination is not established, the status as a winning role will be lost. Watermelon prize, Bell prize, Cherry Bell prize, 7 Bell prize, The replay prize can be achieved more reliably. Then, the BB prize-winning flag corresponding to the BB prize which has not been established here is continuously maintained and carried over to the next game.

  By the way, in the sliding table setting process of S310, if the cherry bell winning flag is set in the winning flag storing area 106a, the cherry bell winning sliding table is stored in the sliding table storing area 106b. Here, the "cherry" symbol, which is the stop symbol of the left reel 32L when the cherry bell winning is realized, is arranged on the left reel 32L so that the intervals between the symbols of the same kind are 7 symbols, and therefore, it is described above. As described above, even when the left stop switch 42 is operated at any timing, the "cherry" symbol can be stopped at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions of the display window 26L. Further, the "bell" symbol, which is the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M when the cherry bell winning is established, is arranged on the middle reel 32M so that the interval between the symbols of the same kind is 5 symbols or less. Thus, the "bell" symbol can be stopped at the middle position of the display window 26M no matter what timing the middle stop switch 43 is operated.

  Therefore, in the slip bell table for cherry bell winning, no matter what symbol has arrived at the base position when the left stop switch 42 is pressed (that is, whatever symbol number has been reached), in the display window 26L. The "cherry" symbol is set to a stop mode in which the "cherry" symbol can be stopped at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions, and when the medium stop switch 43 is pressed, any symbol has reached the base point position (ie, , Whatever reaching symbol number), a stop mode in which the "bell" symbol can be stopped is set at the middle position in the display window 26M. As a result, when the Cherry Bell prize-winning flag is set, the stop symbols corresponding to the Cherry Bell prize are displayed on the middle line L2 by the cherry-bell prize sliding table regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 by the player. , Right downward line L4 or right upward line L5 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, it is possible to achieve the cherry bell prize without so-called omission.

  Further, when the 7-bell winning prize flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, the 7-bell winning slip table is stored in the sliding table storage area 106b. Then, the "7" symbol, which is the stop symbol of the left reel 32L when the 7-bell prize is established, is arranged on the left reel 32L so that the interval between the same symbols is 7 symbols, like the "cherry" symbol. Also, the "bell" symbol, which is the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M when the 7-bell winning is established, is arranged on the middle reel 32M such that the interval between the same symbols is 5 symbols or less as described above. Has been done.

  Therefore, even in the 7-bell winning sliding table, as in the cherry-bell winning sliding table, no matter what symbol has arrived at the base point position when the left stop switch 42 is pressed (that is, any reaching symbol number). Whatever), the "7" symbol is set to a stop mode at which any of the upper, middle, and lower positions in the display window 26L can be stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is pressed, any position is set as the base point. Even if the symbols have arrived (that is, regardless of the arrival symbol number), a stop mode in which the "bell" symbol can be stopped is set at the middle position in the display window 26M. As a result, when the 7-bell winning prize flag is set, the stop symbol corresponding to the 7-bell winning is displayed on the middle line L2 by the 7-bell winning sliding table regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 by the player. , Right downward line L4 or right upward line L5 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, it is possible to achieve the 7-bell prize without so-called omission.

  In this way, in the case of winning the prize-winning lottery, when the cherry bell prize in which three medals are paid out and the 7 bell prize in which two medals are paid out are won, the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44. Regardless of the timing, it is possible to display a stop symbol corresponding to the Cherry Bell prize or a stop symbol corresponding to the 7-bell prize on any of the middle line L2, the right downward line L4, and the right upward line L5 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, it is possible to establish the cherry bell prize and the 7-bell prize without so-called omission. Therefore, when the player starts the game with one or two coins, it is possible to surely establish the cherry bell prize or the seven bell prize without depending on an artificial operation. In addition, the game can be played in expectation of establishment of a cherry bell prize or a 7-bell prize while aiming at a stop symbol of other prizes (for example, BB prize).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the reel control process which is the process of S211 of the normal process (see FIG. 13) will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the reel control processing executed by the MUP 102 of the main control device 101.

  In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (S501). In the rotation start processing, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started to rotate in the previous game, and if not, the wait time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 106 is executed. To do. By performing such processing, the stepping motor control processing (see S106 in FIG. 12) of the timer interruption processing starts the acceleration processing of the stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Then, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stand by until they rotate at a constant rotation speed at a predetermined speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, the MPU 102 is able to generate a stop command by lighting and displaying lamps (not shown) of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant. Is notified to the player or the like.

  After the rotation start process of S501, the pre-stop process is then performed by the processes of S502 to S505. In this pre-stop processing, it is first determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated (S502). Then, when none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated (S502: No), the process of S502 is repeatedly executed to wait until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated (S502: Yes), the process proceeds to S503, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is operated, that is, the stop command. It is determined whether or not has occurred (S503). When the stop command has not been issued (S503: No), the process returns to S502 and waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. As a result, when the stop switch corresponding to the reel that is not rotating is operated, it is ignored.

  On the other hand, if a stop command is issued (S503: Yes), then whether or not the current stop command is the third stop command, that is, whether or not the stop switch is operated while only one reel is rotating. It is determined (S504). Then, when the current stop command is the third stop command (S504: Yes), the process of the following S505 is skipped, the pre-stop process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, in the case of the first stop command generated when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating or the second stop command generated when the two reels are rotating (S504: Yes), The process proceeds to S505, the sliding table first changing process is performed, and the pre-stop process is ended. Then, the process proceeds to S506.

  Here, the sliding table first changing process is a process of changing the sliding table stored in the sliding table storage area 106b of the RAM 106 before stopping the reel corresponding to the stop command. In the sliding table first changing process, for example, when the stop switches 43 and 44 other than the left stop switch 42 are operated to generate the first stop command, the sliding table is changed.

  Now, when the pre-stop processing of S502 to S505 is completed, it means that the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is operated to advance the game, and the stop command is generated. In such a case, the stop control process shown in S506 to S512 is then performed to stop the spinning reel.

  First, in S506, the symbol number of the reaching symbol reaching the lower stage at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input confirms the symbol number of the symbol reaching the lower stage. Then, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated from the data of the symbol number corresponding to the reached symbol in the sliding table set in the sliding table storage area 106b (S507). After that, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol which is actually stopped in the lower stage (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reaching symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stopped symbol are equal (S509), and if they are not equal (S509: No), the process of S509 is repeatedly executed. If they are equal to each other (S509: Yes), reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed (S510). Then, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (S511). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have not stopped (S511: No), the sliding table second changing process is executed. Perform (S512). Then, the process returns to S502 and the pre-stop process is executed again.

  Here, the second sliding table changing process is a process of changing the sliding table stored in the sliding table storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second sliding table changing process, the sliding table is changed based on the winning flag that has been set and the stop result of the reel that has stopped. For example, when only the bell winning flag is set, when the "bell" symbols of the left reel 32L number 12 and the middle reel 32M number 12 are stopped in the middle row, the left reel 32L is in the upper row. No. 13 and the No. 13 “7” symbol of the middle reel 32M are stopped, so the sliding table is changed to avoid the establishment of the BB winning.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S511 that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped (S511: Yes), a payout determination process is performed (S513), and this process is ended. The payout determination process is a process of setting the payout number of medals on the condition that the winning symbol combinations are lined up on the activated line.

  In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on each activated line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not the winning is achieved on the activated line. To judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination is the same as the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination is matched with the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, when the winning combination is not in agreement with the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. When the payout determination is completed for all the activated lines, the payout determination processing is ended.

  Next, the outline of the medal payout process of S212 of the normal process (see FIG. 13) will be described. In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area (not shown) in the payout determination process of S513 of the reel control process (see FIG. 16) is zero. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it is determined in the previous payout determination process (see S513 in FIG. 16) that the payout of medals has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the replay prize has been established based on the winning combination combination set in the payout determination process. Then, if the replay prize is not established, the medal payout process is ended as it is, and if the replay prize is established, the replay state setting process for setting the game state to the replay state is performed and the medal payout process is ended. To do. In the start waiting process (see S204 of FIG. 13) executed in the normal process described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

  On the other hand, when the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is ended. Regarding payout of medals, specifically, when the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the payout number is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after the addition is added. The credit is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value has reached the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the medal payout rotating plate is driven to eject medals from the hopper device 51. The medal tray 50 is paid out through the outlet 49. In the medal payout process, a process of changing the payout amount displayed on the payout amount display unit 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. When the current gaming state is the bonus state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a bonus state process executed in the process of S213 of the normal process (see FIG. 12) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a bonus state process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101.

  First, the outline of the bonus state process will be described. In the bonus state processing, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, a game in which the state of the slot machine 10 is continuously shifted to the RB state until a predetermined number of medals are paid out (250 in this embodiment) is executed. is there. Then, the JAC game is played 12 times in one RB state, and when the winning is achieved 8 times in the JAC game, the RB state is ended even before the JAC game is played 12 times. The bonus state is ended when the number of paid-out medals reaches a predetermined number, and when the number of paid-out medals reaches the predetermined number in the middle of the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state is ended.

  Next, details of the bonus state process will be described. In the bonus state process, first, it is determined whether the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the bonus state (S601), and when it is not the bonus state (S601: No), the BB determination process shown in S602 to S605 is executed.

  In the BB determination processing, first, it is confirmed whether or not the BB winning combination flag is set in the winning flag storing area 106a (S602), and when the BB winning combination flag is set (S602: Yes), the reel control is performed. Based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process executed by the process of S513 of the process (see FIG. 16), it is confirmed whether or not the BB winning is achieved (S603).

  In the process of S603, when the BB winning is established (S603: Yes), the BB start process is executed (S604). In the BB start process, the BB prize winning flag stored in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset, the setting flag stored in the state information storage area 106c is cleared, and then the BB setting flag is set to the state information storage area 106c. To be a BB game, which is one type of bonus game. Further, a process of setting 250 in the remaining payout counter provided in the state information storage area 106c for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the BB game, and displaying 250 in the remaining payout number display unit 61. I do. Incidentally, the determination as to whether or not the current game state is the bonus state (see S601) is made based on whether or not the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c.

  Subsequently, in the processing of S605, the RB start processing is executed (S605). In the RB start processing, the remaining JAC prize counter for counting the number of JAC prizes that can be established is set to 8, and the remaining JAC game counter for counting the number of remaining JAC games is set to 12. Each counter such as the remaining JAC prize winning counter and the remaining JAC game counter is provided in the state information storage area 106c. Further, in the RB start processing, the RB command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to know that the RB game is started is also set.

  Next, in the processing of S606, the status command is set (S607). Here, the state command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the current game state. That is, in the processing of S602, when it is determined that the BB winning combination flag is not set (S602: No), a state command meaning a normal game is set, and the BB winning is established in the processing of S603. If it is determined that the game has not been performed (S603: No), a state command that means a BB carryover game is set, and if the RB command has been set in the processing of S605, it means that it is a BB game. Set status commands.

  Then, after the processing of S607, the game number display processing is performed (S607), and the present processing ends. In the game number display process, when the current game state is not a BB game (RB game), a process of clearing the display of the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, or the like is performed.

  Further, in the processing of S601, when the gaming state is the bonus state (S601: Yes), based on the winning combination combination set in the payout determination processing executed in the processing of S513 of the reel control processing (see FIG. 16), It is confirmed whether or not a watermelon prize or a bell prize, which is a winning prize, has been established (S608). When the watermelon prize or the bell prize is established in the process of S608 (S608: Yes), the value of the remaining JAC prize counter is decremented by 1 (S609), and the value of the remaining JAC game counter is further decremented by 1 (S610). When the watermelon prize and the bell prize are not established (S608: No), one JAC game has been consumed, so the value of the remaining JAC game counter is decremented by 1 without performing the process of S609 ( S610).

  Subsequently, in the processing of S611, it is confirmed whether or not either the remaining JAC winning counter or the remaining JAC game counter has become 0 (S611). In the processing of S611, when either one is 0, that is, when the JAC winning is achieved 8 times or the JAC game is exhausted 12 times (S611: Yes), it means that the ending condition of the RB game is satisfied. In order to do so, the RB end process of resetting the values of the remaining JAC winning counter and the remaining JAC game counter is executed (S612). As a result, the JAC game can be played 12 times in one RB state, and if the winning is achieved 8 times during the JAC game, the RB state can be ended even before the JAC game is played 12 times.

  Then, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the remaining payout number counter is 0 (S613), and if it is not 0 (S613: No), the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number. , Which means that the ending condition of the BB game is not satisfied, the RB start process described above is executed (S614). After that, a state command indicating that the game is a BB game is set (S606), a game number display process is executed (607), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S611, when neither the value of the remaining JAC prize counter nor the value of the remaining JAC game counter is 0, that is, when the JAC prize has not been established 8 times and the JAC game has not been exhausted 12 times. (S611: No), it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the balance payment number counter is 0 (S615). In the process of S615, if the counter value is not 0 (S615: No), it means that the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number, and the ending condition of the BB game is not satisfied. Since it means, a state command that means a BB game is set (S606), a game number display process is executed (S607), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S615, when the count value of the remaining payout amount counter is 0 (S615: Yes), it means that the ending condition of the BB game is satisfied. Therefore, the bonus state ending processing shown in S616 to S617. To execute. In the bonus state ending process, first, the RB ending process described above is executed (S616), and then the BB ending process for clearing the data in the state information storage area 153b is executed (S617). Further, even if the count value of the remaining payout amount counter is 0 in the processing of S613 described above (S613: Yes), it means that the BB game ending condition is satisfied, so the BB ending processing of S617 is executed. To do. After the BB end process is performed, a state command indicating that the game is a normal game (that is, a normal game state) is set (S606), a game number display process is performed (S607), and this process is terminated. As a result, the bonus state can be ended when the number of paid-out medals reaches 250. Further, when the number of paid-out medals reaches 250 in the middle of the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state can be ended by the processing of S616.

  Next, each control process executed by the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. The processing of the MPU 181 is roughly classified into a display main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a display timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 1 msec), and a command input from the main control device 101. Command interruption processing for starting the received command and storing the received command in the received command storage area 185a. The command stored in the received command storage area 185a is checked in the display main process, and various processes are performed according to the content of the command. Hereinafter, a display main process, a start command process that performs a process for a start command among commands stored in the received command storage area 185a, a lottery result command process that performs a process for a lottery result command, and a process for an error command are performed. The error command processing will be described.

  First, the display main process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the display main process. This display main process is executed when the power is turned on by recovery from a power failure or by turning on the power switch 71, and the initial stage of various devices such as the display control device 81 and the auxiliary effect control unit controlled by the display control device 81. Processing, check processing of commands received from the main control device 101, power failure processing when a power failure occurs, and the like. The transfer processing of the resident image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 is also executed by the display surface processing as one of the initialization processing.

  When the display main process is executed, first, as one process of the initialization process, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 181, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 181 and the I / O device are performed. (S701). Then, the process proceeds to S702, and as one process of the initialization process, in the processes of S702 to S710, the image to be resident in the resident video RAM 189, that is, the main image at power-on, the rear image, the character pattern, the notification Image data corresponding to each image such as the effect image and the error message image is read from the character ROM 187 and transferred to the resident video RAM 189.

  Specifically, first, in the process of S702, the power-on main image data is first read from the character ROM 187, and the data is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a (S702). When the power-on main image data is stored in the buffer RAM 188a, the power-on main image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is then transferred to the resident video RAM 189 and stored in the power-on main image area 189a. (S703). If the data capacity of the main image data at power-on is less than or equal to the capacity (for example, 132 kilobytes) of one block of the NAND flash memory 187a, which is also the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 188a, by one processing of S702 and S703, When the power is turned on, all of the main image data is transferred to the resident video RAM, so the process directly proceeds to S704. If the data capacity of the power-on main image data is larger than the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 187a, all the power-on main image data are in the power-on main image area of the resident video RAM 189. The processes of S702 and S703 are repeatedly executed until the data is stored in 189a, and then the process proceeds to S704.

  Then, in the processing of S704, the image controller 188 is instructed to draw the main image at power-on (S704). Accordingly, the image controller 188 reads the power-on main image data stored in the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189, draws the power-on main image, and renders the drawn power-on main image. The corresponding drawing image data is temporarily stored in the normal video RAM 190, and then the process of transferring it to the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed at the display timing of the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. In this display, other image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, and a normal image is drawn by the image controller by the process of S711 described later. It will continue until it is instructed to.

  In the slot machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 187a is used as the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is stored in the character ROM 187 due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time before it is transferred to the video RAM 189. Therefore, as in the main display processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is first transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the power-on main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. By doing so, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 189, a player or a person involved in the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. . Therefore, the display control device 81 can transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. it can. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, and therefore, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65, so that it is immediately confirmed that the slot machine 10 has started its operation without any problem by power-on. The use of the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 187 can suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  After the processing of S704, it is then confirmed whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state, that is, whether or not the drive voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage (less than 10 V in this embodiment) (S705), and the system state is the voltage. If it is in the lowered state (S705: Yes), it is determined that the power is cut off, and the power outage process is executed (S706).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S705, when the system state is not the low voltage state (S705: No), the image data of the resident object except the main image data at power-on is sequentially stored in the NAND flash memory 187a from the character ROM 187. One block is read out and once stored in the buffer RAM 188a (S707). When one block of image data is stored in the buffer RAM 188a, the resident video RAM 189 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 189 is being used by reading the main image when the power is turned on (S708). While the video RAM 189 is in use (S708: Yes), the process of S708 is repeatedly executed to wait for the process. When it is determined that the resident video RAM 189 is unused (S708: No), the image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, and the area corresponding to the image data, that is, the rear image It is stored in any of the area 189b, the character design area 189c, the notification effect image area 189d, and the error message image area 189e (S709).

  As described above, when the image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, the buffer RAM 188a formed by the SRAM is provided on the way, so that the time from the character ROM 187 formed by the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed can be obtained. The image data that has been read out by being temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a, and when the resident video RAM 189 becomes unused, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 in a short time. You can As a result, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 189 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. The data stored in the resident video RAM 189 can be read without delay at the time of image drawing, the image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 can be drawn without delay, and the drawn image data can be transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65. You can

  After the processing of S709, it is determined whether or not all the image data that is the resident target has been transferred to the resident video RAM 189 (S710), and if there is any untransferred resident target image data (S710: No). , S705, the processes of S705 to S710 are executed again, and the process of transferring one block of image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 is performed. Here, every time one block of image data is transferred by the processing of S705, it is determined whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state. As a result, even if the resident target image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over a long period of time, even if the system state becomes a voltage drop state, the state can be surely grasped. it can.

  When it is determined by the process of S710 that all the image data that is the resident object has been transferred to the resident video RAM 189 (S710: Yes), then it is displayed in the normal time (when the special effect is not displayed). The image controller 188 is instructed to draw a normal image (S710). As a result, the image controller 188 reads the back image and the character design stored in the back image area 189b and the character design area 189c of the resident video RAM 189, draws a normal image, and temporarily renders the drawn image data. After being stored in the RAM 190, a process of transferring to the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed at the display timing of the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the normal image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the player or the hall related person can recognize that the initialization of the display control process is completed.

  Further, by the processing of S702 to S710, all the image data to be made resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189 in the initialization processing immediately after the power is turned on. The image controller 188 can perform image drawing processing while using the resident image data. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 189, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND flash memory 187a whose reading speed is slow at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 189 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81. Even if the character ROM 187 is configured by the NAND flash memory 187a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness from a player operating the start lever 41 or the stop buttons 42 to 44 to displaying an image on the auxiliary display unit 65. it can.

  Then, the interrupt mode that allows the command interrupt process and the display timer interrupt process is set (S712), the initialization process is terminated, and the process proceeds to S713. In the processing of S713, it is confirmed whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state, that is, whether or not the drive voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage (less than 10 V in this embodiment), as in the processing of S705 (S713). When the system state is the low voltage state (S713: Yes), it is determined that the power supply is cut off, and the power outage process is executed (S714).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S713, if the system state is not the low voltage state (S713: No), then it is determined whether or not the display timer interrupt processing is performed (S715), and the display timer interrupt processing is performed. In the case of (S715: Yes), the drive data output process of outputting drive data to the auxiliary effect part is executed (S716). As a result, the output of the drive data to the auxiliary effect production unit is controlled so as to be executed in a 1 msec cycle in which the display timer interrupt process is performed. The determination whether the display timer interrupt process is performed is turned on each time the display timer interrupt process is executed, and is turned off each time the drive data output process is executed. (Not shown) is provided in the work RAM 185, and this is performed by detecting the value of this interrupt processing execution flag. That is, if the interrupt process execution flag is on, it is determined that the display timer interrupt process has been performed (S715: Yes), and the drive data output process is executed (S716).

  In the processing of S715, it is determined that the display timer interrupt processing is not executed (S715: No), or when the processing of S716 is completed, then an unprocessed reception command is stored in the reception command storage area 185a. It is determined whether or not there is (S717). If there is an unprocessed received command (S717: Yes), a received command check process is executed (S718), the received command stored in the received command storage area 185a is analyzed, and the received command is responded to. The process is executed (S719). For example, if the received command is a start command, start command processing (see FIG. 19) is executed, if it is a lottery result command, lottery result command processing (see FIG. 20) is executed, and if it is an error command, error command processing (see FIG. 21) is executed. The details of each command process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 19 to 21.

  In the process of S717, it is determined that there is no unprocessed received command in the received command storage area 185a (S717: No), or when the process of S718 is completed, next, a random number value used when selecting an auxiliary effect is selected. The update process is executed (S719), the process returns to S713, and then the processes of S713 to S719 are repeatedly executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a start command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start command processing. This start command process is a process executed when the start lever 41 is operated and a start command indicating that there is a game start command is received from the main control device 101. The MPU 181 stores the command received from the main control device 101 in the received command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 in the received command check process of the display main process (see S718 in FIG. 18), and the command is the start command. If it is determined that the start command processing is executed.

  In this start command processing, first, information about the bet number included in the start command is extracted, and the extracted information about the bet number is stored in the bet number storage area 185b of the work RAM 185 (S801). As described above in the description of S209 of FIG. 13, the bet number suggested by the information included in the start command is the medal inserted by the player for the game in which the start command is indicated by the start command. The display control device 81 stores information on the bet number in the bet number storage area 185b, thereby assisting a game to be started in accordance with the bet number applied to the game. The control can be performed by the effect production unit (the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65).

  Then, in the start command processing, other processing corresponding to the start command is executed, such as performing control for causing the auxiliary effect producing section to execute various effects in response to the game start command grasped by receiving the start command (S802). ), And ends this processing. As a result, it is possible to cause the auxiliary effect production section to perform various effects at the start of the game.

  Next, the lottery result command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the lottery result command processing. This lottery result command processing receives from the main control device 101 a lottery result command indicating the result of the lottery (judgment of winning / losing combination) performed by the main control device 101 in response to a game start command by operating the start lever 41. This is the process executed when The MPU 181 stores the command received from the main controller 101 in the received command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 in the received command check process of the display main process (see S718 in FIG. 18), and the command is the lottery result command. When it is determined that there is, the lottery result command process is executed.

  In the lottery result command process, first, the information regarding the bet number stored in the bet number storage area 185b is confirmed, and whether the number of bet numbers multiplied by the start command indicated by the start command is three or not. It is determined whether or not (S901). When the bet number is 3 (S901: Yes), the effect corresponding to the bet number of 3 is started in the auxiliary effect section (the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65). The setting is made (S902), and the lottery result command processing is ended. As a result, by the drive data output process of the display main process (S716 of FIG. 18), each auxiliary effect part is driven so that the effect set is executed.

  At this time, based on another command received from the main control device 101, when changing the back image and the character design to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the back image area 189b and the character design area 189c of the resident video RAM 189 are supported. If the back image or the image data of the character pattern is resident, the image controller 188 reads the image data corresponding to the back image or the character pattern from the resident video RAM 189 and draws the image. As a result, the time for newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a long read time can be omitted, and thus the image controller 188 can immediately draw and generate a predetermined image. .. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed is used as the character ROM 187, the back image and the character design can be changed immediately.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S901, when it is determined that the bet number is not 3 (S901: No), the bet number applied to the game whose start command is indicated by the start command is 1 or 2 You can understand that it is a sheet. Therefore, next, it is determined whether or not the winning combination grasped by the lottery result command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command is in the BB winning mode (S903). When the BB winning mode is the winning combination (S903: Yes), a message "BB winning!" Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify the player that the winning combination is the BB winning mode. The "BB winning notification effect" is set (S904), and the lottery result command is ended. As a result, by the drive data output process of the display main process (S716 of FIG. 18), each auxiliary effect part is driven so that the BB winning notification effect is executed.

  When the winning combination is not in the BB winning mode as a result of the process of S903 (S903: No), the winning combination grasped by the lottery command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command is the watermelon winning combination. It is determined whether it is a mode (S905). When the watermelon winning mode is a winning combination (S905: Yes), a message “Watermelon winning prize!” Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to inform the player that the winning combination is a watermelon winning mode. The “watermelon prize notification effect” is set (S906), and the lottery result command is ended. As a result, by the drive data output process of the display main process (S716 in FIG. 18), each auxiliary effect part is driven so that the watermelon winning award notification effect is executed.

  If the winning combination is not the watermelon winning mode as a result of the processing in S905 (S905: No), then the winning combination grasped by the lottery command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command, is the bell winning combination. It is determined whether or not it is a mode (S907). When the bell winning mode is a winning combination (S907: Yes), a message "Bell winning!" Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to inform the player that the winning combination is a bell winning mode. “Bell winning notification effect” is set (S908), and the lottery result command is ended. As a result, by the drive data output process of the display main process (S716 in FIG. 18), each auxiliary effect part is driven so that the bell winning notification effect is executed.

  As described above, by the processing of S903 to S908, the winning combination by the lottery (combination determination of winning combinations) in the game in which the bet number is set to 1 or 2 is one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the Bell winning mode. If so, the auxiliary production unit can be caused to execute a BB winning award notification effect, a watermelon winning award notification effect, and a bell award notification effect that notify the player that the winning combination has been won.

  Here, as described above, when the number of bets is one or two, since the winning probabilities of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode are kept extremely low, the player is required to win the BB winning mode. It is highly likely that a game will be played with little expectation that a watermelon winning mode and a bell winning mode will be established, and conversely, that a cherry bell winning mode and a 7-bell winning mode will be established. In addition, when the cherry bell winning mode or the 7-bell winning mode is a winning combination, the winning combination can be achieved without fail even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at any timing. It is highly possible that the player who has started the game by playing two cards operates the stop switches 42 to 44 at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, if any of the BB prize mode, the watermelon prize mode and the bell prize mode is won as a winning combination, if the player does not notice it, the BB prize mode, the watermelon prize mode and the bell prize mode are all missed. Since this is a winning mode, there is a risk that the winning combination will be missed. In addition, since the winning of the BB winning mode is valid across the games until the BB winning mode is established, when the player finishes the game without noticing the winning of the BB winning mode, another player May establish the BB winning mode based on the winning of the BB winning mode, and the player who wins the winning of the BB winning mode may lose as a result.

  On the other hand, in the game in which the bet number is set to 1 or 2 by the processing of S903 to S908, if any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode is won, the winning Is announced by a BB winning notification presentation, a watermelon winning announcement presentation, and a bell winning announcement presentation. Since the notification is made without delay in accordance with the reception of the lottery result command transmitted from the main control device 101, as described above, the notification is made while the player cannot operate the stop switches 42 to 44. Be seen. Therefore, the player can know the winning of any one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode before operating the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the player plays the game by playing one or two, if the notification is given by the auxiliary display section 65, the winning combination (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode or bell winning mode) grasped by the notification Since the stop switches 42 to 44 can be operated aiming at the stop symbol in order to stop the stop symbol corresponding to the mode) on the activated line, those winning modes can be established with a higher probability. Further, when the winning of the BB winning mode is announced, even if the player fails to win the game, the player can continue to play the game until the BB winning mode is established by newly lending the medal. it can.

  Further, when the BB winning mode is carried over from the past game, and a plurality of winning combinations are set together with the winning combination in the lottery of this game, the sliding table setting process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101. In (see S310 of FIG. 14), a sliding table corresponding to a winning combination other than the BB winning mode is set, but in this lottery result command processing, when the bet number is set to 1 or 2 The winning combination determined by the result command is determined from the BB winning mode (see S903). As a result, if the winning combination for which the sliding table is set is the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode, the winning combination may be missed, but if the BB winning mode is set as the winning combination, Since the BB winning notification effect is preferentially performed, the player can be surely ascertained that the BB winning mode, which is more advantageous to the player, is the winning combination.

  As described above, in the lottery result command process, the command received from the main control device 101 is stored in the received command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 by the main process executed by the MPU 181, and the command is the lottery result. It is executed when it is determined to be a command. Then, the lottery result command is a reel control process (S211 in FIG. 13) for controlling the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R after the lottery (judgment of winning combination) accompanying the game start command is completed in the main control device 101. (Refer to S309 in FIG. 14) and then within about 1.5 ms at the latest (that is, after a time lag until the command is transmitted by the timer interrupt processing), the lottery result command is displayed and controlled. Sent to the device 81.

  Further, in the display control device 81, the image data corresponding to the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in various notification effects such as BB prize notification effect, watermelon prize notification effect, and bell prize notification effect is notified of the resident video RAM 189. Since it is previously resident in the effect image area 189d, the display control device 81 performs the BB winning notification effect, the watermelon winning notification effect, and the bell winning notification effect based on the lottery result command received from the main control device 101. In the case of determining, the corresponding image data is not newly read from the character ROM 187, but the image data pre-resident in the notification effect image area 189d of the resident video RAM 189 is read, so that the image controller 188 can read the image data. Each announcement effect image can be drawn. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 187, each announcement effect image is immediately output after the lottery result command is received. It is possible to display those notification effect images on the auxiliary display section 65.

  Therefore, between the time the player operates the start lever 41 and the time at which one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, assistance for notification of the winning combination is provided. It can be executed by the production unit (the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65). Therefore, the player can grasp the winning combination before operating any of the stop switches 42 to 44, and thus the grasped winning combination (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode or bell winning mode) is established. Can be surely aimed at by the player.

  As a result of the processing in S907, when the winning combination is not the bell winning mode (S907: No), if the bet number is 2, the cherry bell winning mode or the replay winning mode is set as the winning combination, or the winning combination is If it can be understood that it is not set (that is, it is out), and if the number of bets is one, the cherry bell winning mode, the 7 bell winning mode or the replay winning mode is set as a winning combination, It can be understood that the winning combination is not set (that is, the winning combination is out). Therefore, next, the information regarding the bet number stored in the bet number storage area 185b is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the bet number multiplied by the start command indicated by the start command is two. The determination is made (S909).

  If the bet number is 2 (S909: Yes), a message "Challenge the cherry bell!" Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a dedicated voice is output from the speaker 64 to exclusively use the upper lamp 63. The "cherry bell winning challenge effect" to be turned on is set (S910), and the lottery result command processing is ended. As a result, by the drive data output process of the display main process (S716 of FIG. 18), each auxiliary effect part is driven so that the cherry bell winning challenge effect is executed. If the bet number is not two (S909: No), it can be understood that the bet number is one. Therefore, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a message "Challenge the cherry bell / 7 bell!" The "cherry bell prize / 7 bell prize challenge effect" that causes the speaker 64 to output a dedicated sound and turn on the upper lamp 63 in a dedicated manner is set (S911), and the lottery result command processing is ended. Thereby, each auxiliary effect part is driven so that the cherry-bell winning / 7-bell winning challenge effects are executed by the drive data output process of the display main process (S716 of FIG. 18).

  By the processing of S910, the "Cherrybell winning a prize challenge effect" is executed in the auxiliary effecting unit. Therefore, when the game is played with two coins, it is expected that three medals will be paid out when the cherrybell winning mode is established. A feeling can be strongly given to the player. Further, in the processing of S911, "Cherrybell winning / 7-bell winning challenge effect" is executed in the auxiliary effecting unit. Therefore, in the case where the game is played by one sheet, the cherry-bell winning or 7-bell winning mode It is possible to strongly give the player a sense of expectation that three or two medals will be paid out by the establishment. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by hanging one or two while having fun, so that the player can be more strongly motivated to play the game to the end without leaving extra medals.

  Next, the error command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is a process for making the auxiliary effect part notify of an error detected by the main control device 101. If the command received from the main control device 101 is stored in the received command storage area 185a, and the command is determined to be an error command, this error command processing is executed.

  In this error command processing, first, information about the error type included in the error command is extracted (S951). Then, the display of the error message corresponding to the extracted error type is set (S952), and this error command processing is terminated. As a result, the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process causes the auxiliary display unit 65 to display a corresponding error message, blinks the upper lamp 63, and causes the speaker 64 to emit an alarm sound. Each auxiliary production section is driven.

  Here, as described above, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. Since the image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the message image area 189e, the display control device 81 reads out the resident image data based on the error command received from the main control device 101. Thus, the image controller 188 can immediately draw each error message image. Therefore, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 187, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 187, each error message is immediately output after the error command is received. Can be displayed on.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 10 of the first embodiment, all the image data to be made resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189 in the initialization process immediately after the power is turned on. After the processing is completed, the image controller 188 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 189. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 189, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND flash memory 187a whose reading speed is slow at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the auxiliary display unit 65. In particular, since the image data of the image frequently displayed and the image data of the image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81 are made resident in the resident video RAM 189, It is possible to maintain high responsiveness from the operation of the start lever 41 or the stop buttons 42 to 44 by a person to the display of any image on the auxiliary display section 65.

  Further, in the slot machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 187a is used as the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is transferred from the character ROM 187 due to its slow reading speed. Although it takes a lot of time to transfer to the resident video RAM 189, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is first transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the power-on main image is transferred. By displaying on the auxiliary display unit 65, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 189, the player or the hall-related person can display the main power-on time displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. You can check the image.

  Therefore, the display control device 81 can transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. it can. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, and therefore, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped. Also in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, so that it is immediately confirmed that the slot machine 10 has started its operation without any problem by power-on. Can be confirmed. Therefore, by using the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 187, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  21 to 62, one embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 200 will be described as a second embodiment. 22 is a front view of the pachinko machine 200 according to the second embodiment, FIG. 23 is a front view of the game board 213 of the pachinko machine 200, and FIG. 24 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 200.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the pachinko machine 200 includes an outer frame 211 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 211 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 211. And an inner frame 212 that is openably and closably supported. In order to support the inner frame 212, metal hinges 218 are attached to the outer frame 211 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 22), and the side provided with the hinge 218 serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 212 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 213 (see FIG. 23) having a large number of nails, winning holes 263, 264, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 212 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 213. In addition, in the inner frame 212, a ball launching unit 312a (see FIG. 26) that launches a ball to the front surface area of the game board 213 and a launching that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 312a to the front surface area of the game board 213. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 212, a front frame 214 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 215 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 214 and the lower plate unit 215, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 22), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 214 and the lower plate unit 215 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 212 and the locking of the front frame 214 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 221 of the cylinder lock 220 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 214 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, or the like, and a window portion 214c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 216 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 214, and the front surface of the game board 213 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 200 via the glass unit 216.

  On the front frame 214, an upper plate 217 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface protruding to the front, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 217. The bottom surface of the upper plate 217 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 22), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 217 is guided to the ball firing unit 312a by the inclination. A frame button 222 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 217. The frame button 222 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (FIG. 23) described later or when changing the effect contents of super reach. ..

  The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third symbol display device 281 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 200, there are 3 stages of “a town stage”, “a sky stage”, and “an island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect, which are performed in association with the entry into the first entry port 264 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 222 during a period in which no change effect is performed or during high-speed change. Every time the frame button 222 is operated, the “town stage” → “empty stage” is performed. ”→“ Island stage ”→“ City stage ”→ ... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 281 is configured to display a selection screen for the effect mode of super reach during normal reach, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 222 is displayed by the player. When it is operated to, the content of the effect at the time of super reach is changed.

  The front frame 214 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 214 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means perform a change control of the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 214c, electric decoration portions 229 to 233 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided. In the pachinko machine 200, these electric decoration parts 229 to 233 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, each of the electric decoration parts 229 to 233 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 214 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 22), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 234 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

  In addition, a small window 235 is formed on the lower side of the right illuminated portion 232 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 214 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 213 (see 23) is a visible sheet from the front of the pachinko machine 200. In addition, in the pachinko machine 200, a plating member 236 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 229 to 233 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operation unit 240 is disposed below the window 214c. The ball rental operation section 240 is provided with a frequency display section 241, a ball lending button 242, and a return button 243. When the ball rental operation unit 240 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 200, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 241 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 242 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 217 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 243 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 240 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 217 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 240 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 215 located below the upper plate 217, a lower plate 250 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 217 is formed in a central part of the lower plate unit 215 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 250, an operation handle 251 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 213 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 251, the driving of the ball firing unit 312a is permitted. Sensor 251a for pressing, a push button type stop switch 251b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 251 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 251 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 251a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 251. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 213 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 251 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 251a and the stop switch 251b are off.

  At the lower front portion of the lower plate 250, a ball removing lever 252 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 250 are discharged downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 252 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 250 opens, The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 252 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) for receiving balls discharged from the lower plate 250 is placed below the lower plate 250. The operation handle 251 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 250 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 250.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the game board 213 has a wooden base plate 260 that has been cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and has a large number of nails and wind turbines for guiding balls and rails 261, 262, a general winning opening 263, and a first prize. The ball entrance 264, the variable winning device 265, the variable display device unit 280 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 212. The general winning opening 263, the first winning opening 264, the variable winning device 265, and the variable display device unit 280 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 260 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 213. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 213 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 212 through the window portion 214c (see FIG. 22) of the front frame 214. The configuration of the game board 213 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front surface of the game board 213, an outer rail 262 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 262, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 262. The arc-shaped inner rail 261 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 261 and the outer rail 262 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 213, and the front and rear surfaces of the game board 213 and the glass unit 216 (see FIG. 22) surround the front surface of the game board 213. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed on the front surface of the game board 213 by the two rails 261 and 262 and the arc member 270 (a winning opening or the like is provided and It is the area that flows down.

  The two rails 261 and 262 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 312a to the upper part of the game board 213. A return ball prevention member 268 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 23) of the inner rail 261 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 213 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 262 (upper right part in FIG. 23), a return rubber 269 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined force or more hits the return rubber 269 to give momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 261 and the upper right end of the outer rail 262, a resin arc member 270 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. The plate 260 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as “LED”) 237a and a 7-segment display 237b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 23). A display device 237 is provided. The first symbol display device 237 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 310 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 200. The plurality of LEDs 237a perform a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not it is in the course of variation that accompanies the entry into the first entry port 264 (starting winning), or a stop symbol after the variation ends. As a result, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the starting winning is shown by a lighting state, and among the balls entered in the first entrance 264, the fluctuation of which is not yet executed (holding ball) The number of reserved balls, which is the number, is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display 237b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 237a are configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emitted colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 200 with a small number of LEDs.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 200, in the lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 264, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined, and when it is determined that it is a jackpot, the jackpot type is also determined. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 2R certainty variation jackpots, and time saving jackpots are prepared. The LED 237a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but when it is a big hit, a symbol according to the jackpot type is shown.

  Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 rounds jackpot, and the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 2 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, the “time saving jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds and is in a shortening state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

  The "high probability state" means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily enters the first entrance port 264. On the other hand, the "low-probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of jackpot is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change. In addition, in the “short-time probability state”, the short-time state (time-shortening state) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the first entrance port. A game state in which a ball easily enters 264. In addition, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 200, the time for which the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 264 is opened, or once. The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed depending on the hit.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 263 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 280 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 280 is a liquid crystal display that performs variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variable display of the first symbol display device 237, triggered by the entry into the first entry port 264 (starting winning). (Hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) composed of a third symbol display device 281 and a second LED configured to variably display the second symbol triggered by passage of the ball through the second entrance 267. A symbol display device 283 is provided.

  The third symbol display device 281 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 314, which will be described later, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 281.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 281 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 281, and FIG. 25 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 25B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main design is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear design consisting of a wooden box, of which the main designs with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached patterns simulating characters such as plane, furoshiki, and helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 310 (see FIG. 26) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the end. When transitioning to a high probability state (probability change state) after the jackpot ends, a variable display in which main symbols with odd numbers (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) are arranged is displayed. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low-probability state after the jackpot is over, a variable display in which main symbols (corresponding to “low-probability symbols”) to which even numbers are added are arranged is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 281 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. The upper third ⅓ is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from the top to the bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small region Ds1 is a region for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 264, and the small region Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 25B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, which suggests to the player that the jackpot is in a state where it is easier to make a transition to the big hit than usual. In the small area Ds2 in the center, usually, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 264 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 281 (first symbol display device 237), the number of times of entry is up to 4 times. Suspended, the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 237, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, it means that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of balls to enter the first ball entrance 264 is configured to be reserved up to 4 times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and is 3 times. It may be set to the number below or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 281, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 237, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, the variable display device unit 280 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in a lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 23, the description will be continued. The variable display device unit 280 is provided with a center frame 286 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 281. Third symbol display device 281 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main control device 310 is performed in the first symbol display device 237, in the display of the first symbol display device 237 A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 281.

  The second symbol display device 283 displays a variable display in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol) are alternately turned on every time the ball passes through the second entrance 267. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 200, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 283 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first entrance 264 is activated for a predetermined time (open). Is configured). The number of times the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 267 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 237 described above and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol reserve lamp 284. Two second symbol holding lamps 284 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 281.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 283 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol. It may be performed using a part of the display device 281. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 284 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 281. Further, the passage of the second ball entrance 267 is not limited to the maximum number of reserved balls 4 times as in the case of the first ball entrance 264, and is not more than 3 times or 5 times or more (for example, , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 237, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp 284.

  Below the variable display device unit 280, a first ball entrance 264 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 264, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 213 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is made in the main control device 310, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 237a of the first symbol display device 237. In addition, the first ball entrance 264 is also one of the prize holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

  A variable winning device 265 is arranged below the first ball entrance 264, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 265a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 200, when the lottery in the main control device 310 becomes a big hit, the LED 237a of the first symbol display device 237 is turned on so that the big hit is stopped after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, and The stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and the occurrence of the big hit is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 265a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 265a is closed after a predetermined time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 265a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning port 265a can be repeated 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The variable winning device 265 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 265a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open and close to the front with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 265a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 265a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 265a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 237a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 237 is turned on, the specific winning opening 265a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is performed. While the mouth 265a is open, a special opening is provided as a special opening state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 265a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 265a. It may be formed.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 213, and the certificate stamp etc. affixed to the adhesive space K1 is the front frame 214. It is visible through the small window 235 (see FIG. 22).

  Further, the game board 213 is provided with an outlet 266. Balls that have not entered any of the winning ports 263, 264, 265a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 266. On the game board 213, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 24, control board units 290 and 291 and a back pack unit 294 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 200. The control board unit 290 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 310), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 313), and a display control board (display control device 314). The control board unit 291 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 311), a firing control board (firing control device 312), a power supply board (power supply device 315), and a card unit connection board 316.

  In the back pack unit 294, a back pack 292 forming a protective cover portion and a payout unit 293 are unitized. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 310, the voice lamp control device 313, the display control device 314, the payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 315, and the card unit connection board 316 are housed in the board boxes 300 to 304, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 300 to 304 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 300 (main controller 310) and the board box 302 (payout controller 311 and launch controller 312), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 300 and 302, or if the board boxes 300 and 302 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 300 and 302 have been opened.

  The payout unit 293 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 294 and opens upward, a tank rail 331 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 330 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 331. A case rail 332 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 333 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 332 and paying out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 416 (see FIG. 26). ing. The tank 330 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 333. A vibrator 334 for applying vibration to the tank rail 331 is attached to the tank rail 331.

  Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 320, the firing control device 312 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 321, and the power supply device 315 is provided with a RAM erase switch 322. The state return switch 320 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 416 (see FIG. 26). The operation knob 321 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 322 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 200 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 200.

  The main control unit 310 is equipped with an MPU 401 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 401 includes a ROM 402 in which various control programs executed by the MPU 401 and fixed value data are stored, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 402 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 403, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sub control device by the data transmitting / receiving circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 311 and the voice lamp control device 313 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  In the main controller 310, main processing of the pachinko machine 200 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 283 is executed. The RAM 403 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 27, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 403 of the main control device 310 will be described. These counters and the like, in order to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281, and lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 283, the MPU 401 of the main control device 310. Used in.

  To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281, the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 283, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 42). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 403. The RAM 403 is provided with a holding ball storage area including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and in each of these areas, the first ball entrance 264 is stored. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the ball entry timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 403 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 264. Stored in. The value of the random number to be a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 402 of the main controller, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is set by the jackpot random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that is a big hit, it is determined as a big hit. In addition, this jackpot random number table is divided into two types, one for low probability (period during which the probability is not changing) and one for high probability (during probability changing) where the probability of being a jackpot is higher than that for the low probability. The number of random numbers included in the jackpot is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between low probability and high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 is for determining the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 at the time of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 9) to obtain the maximum value (for example, , A counter that can take values of 0 to 9 reaches 9) and then returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball is stored in the RAM 403 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 264. Stored in the area.

  Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved sphere storage area is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order, then in the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 237. The corresponding display mode is the one at the time of disconnection.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved sphere storage area is a big hit, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 237 is the big hit one. Becomes In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same reserved ball storage area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers that are a big hit at the time of low probability is 3, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the low probability big hit random number table. On the other hand, the number of random numbers that are a big hit at a high probability is 30, and the values are “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448. , 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored in the high probability jackpot random number table.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the random number that is a big hit stored in the low probability big hit random number table and the value of the random number that is a big hit stored in the high probability big hit random number table are duplicate values. The value of the random number that is a big hit for each is set so that it does not occur. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the value of the random number that is a big hit regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 200, that value may be input from the outside and the big hit may be apt to be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that is a big hit depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 200 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-9. In the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "6, 7, 8, 9", the jackpot type is "15R definite change that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds. On the other hand, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “4,5”, the jackpot type is “2R probability variation that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is two rounds. In the case of "big hit" and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0, 1, 2, 3", the big hit type shifts to a low probability state after the big hit with the maximum round number of 15 rounds. At the same time, it is a "time saving big hit" that is in a time saving state for 100 fluctuations.

  Thus, the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment is configured such that three types of hit types (15R certainty variation jackpot, 2R certainty variation jackpot, time saving big hit) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been done.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop pattern at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "rear out-of-front reach" (eg 98, 99), and after the same reach is reached, "final stop symbol other than before and after the reach symbol" "reach other than out-of-front / outside reach" (for example 90-97 range), Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely disengaged" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 403 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 264. Is stored.

  Further, a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random number values for which stop patterns are selected are provided in the ROM 402 corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is because the selection ratio of the stop pattern is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 200 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a large table is selected such that the range of random number values corresponding to the stop pattern of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It is easy to select "Completely missed". In this table, the "front-rear outreach" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than front-rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and it is difficult to select "rear-rear outreach" or "reach other than front-rear-reach". In the low probability state, a table with a narrow range of random values 0 to 79 corresponding to the “completely missed” stop pattern is selected in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 264. This makes it difficult to select “Completely out”. In this table, the range of the random number values corresponding to the stop pattern of "reach other than out of front / back" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than out of front / rear" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, since it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entry port 264, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 281 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop pattern of "out-of-front / rear reach" is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 421 and the display control device 314 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 281. .. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed the second entrance (through gate) 267 on either the left or the right. Is obtained when The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-153", it is determined as a winning, and the symbol "○" as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 283. Is displayed and the first entrance 264 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 36). While being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

  As described above, the RAM 403 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 310, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 are performed according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 200 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 283 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 26, the description will be continued. The RAM 403 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 27, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 401 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 401 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored. The RAM 403 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 315 even after the power of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 403 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 403 stores the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to elimination of power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 200 is restored to the state before power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 403. Writing to the RAM 403 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 42) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 403 is executed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 41). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 401 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 is input when the power is shut down due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 401. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  The RAM 403 further includes a reserved ball number counter 403a. The number of hold balls counter 403a holds the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 281) on the first symbol display device 237 based on the entry (starting winning) into the first inlet 264. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (number of waiting times) up to four times. The on-hold ball number counter 403a has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 every time a ball enters the first ball entrance 264 and the number of held balls in variable display increases. (See S1403 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the pending ball number counter 403a is decremented by 1 each time the variable display based on the entry (starting winning) into the first entry slot 264 is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 37).

  The value of the hold ball number counter 403a (that is, the hold ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 313 by the hold ball number command (see S1406 in FIG. 39). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313 every time the ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 264 and the reserved ball number counter 403a is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 313 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 310 every time the hold ball number counter 403a is incremented by 1, and the value of the variable display hold ball number itself held in the main control device 310. Can be obtained. As a result, the variable display holding ball number managed by the holding ball number counter 423a of the voice lamp control device 313 deviates from the actual variable display holding ball number held in the main control device 310 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it happens, the deviation can be corrected by the next command of the number of reserved balls received.

  The voice lamp control device 313 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to be held, and a display hold device for notifying the number of balls to be held to the display control device 314 each time the number of balls to hold is changed. Send the ball count command. The display control device 314 displays the reserved sphere number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 281 based on the reserved sphere number notified by the display reserved sphere number command.

  On the other hand, the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313 is matched with the hold ball number and the ball entry timing (starting winning timing) into the first ball entry port 264. Then, the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer of the RAM 403 are also included and notified to the voice lamp control device 313.

  When the hold lamp number command is received by the voice lamp controller 313, the voice lamp controller 313 detects whether the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, or the stop pattern selection counter C3 included in the hold ball number command. From each value, the stop display mode when the corresponding variable effect based on the winning prize is performed is estimated, and the estimated stop display mode and the value of the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the number of reserved balls command Therefore, it is determined whether or not to perform a series of continuous notice effects for the variable effect that is being held at that time.

  The continuous announcement effect is a type of announcement effect that suggests that the result of the lottery that accompanies the starting winning is likely to be a big hit (advance announcement), and all the variation effects (variable display) that are held at the time of winning the prize. ), The same or related symbols are displayed along with the variation effect on the third symbol display device 281. For example, over all of the pending variable effects, immediately after the stop display of the variable effects, by displaying the “bubble” image on the third symbol display device 281, the jackpot symbol does not appear as the stop symbol of the variable effects. Even if the jackpot is not a big hit, the player continuously sees the “bubble” images immediately after the fluctuation stops over a plurality of fluctuation displays, so that the jackpot is given to the player after the end of the continuous notice production. The obtained expectation can be given and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

  In addition, "Egg" is displayed during the first variation production, "Chick" is displayed during the second variation production, "Chicken" is displayed during the third variation production, and during the fourth variation production. Display "chicken group" (however, if the number of holding balls at the time the continuous notice effect is set is 3 or less, display "chicken group" in the last fluctuating effect for which continuous notice effect is set) As a result, the symbol displayed by the continuous notice effect is changed gradually (step up) every time the variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the player gradually changes the symbol. By looking at, when the chicken group is displayed, the player can be expected to be a big hit in the variation effect in which the chicken group is displayed.

  In addition, when the variation effect for which the continuous notice effect is set is 3, the continuous notice effect is performed in the order of "egg" → "chick" → "chicken group", and the variation effect for which the continuous notice effect is set is 2. In some cases, the continuous announcement effect is performed in the order of “egg” → “chicken group”, and when the variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is set is 1, “chicken group” is suddenly displayed. In this way, when the number of variable productions for which the continuous notice production is set is 3 or less, the symbols in the middle are skipped and the chicken group is displayed suddenly, so that the player suddenly displays the chicken group displayed. Looking at it, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that is a big hit in the variation effect in which the chicken group is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 200, in the main controller 310, the respective values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired at the time of winning the start prize are controlled by the voice lamp controller by the number of reserved balls. 313 is notified, and the voice lamp control device 313 determines the start of the continuous announcement effect and sets the mode of the continuous announcement effect based on the values of the various counters and the values of the held balls notified by the on-hold ball number command. To do. As a result, the processing in the main control device 310 can be concentrated on the lottery processing, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 200, that is, the game state to be transitioned based on the entrance into the first entrance 264. On the other hand, if the MPU 421 having a high processing capability is used for the voice lamp control device 313, the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect can be set in various modes.

  Further, the number of holding balls and the values of various counters can be transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313 with one holding ball number command. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 313, it is possible to accurately grasp the correspondence between the values of the various counters acquired in association with the start winning and the number of reserved balls at the time when the start winning is detected. When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is decided, the number of reserved balls to which the continuous announcement effect is added can be accurately grasped. Therefore, as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls and the values of various counters are transmitted from main control device 310 to voice lamp control device 313 by another command, control in voice lamp control device 313 is facilitated. be able to.

  An input / output port 405 is connected to the MPU 401 of the main controller 310 via a bus line 404 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 405 has a payout control device 311, a voice lamp control device 313, a first symbol display device 237, a second symbol display device 283, a second symbol holding lamp 284, and a lower opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 265a. Is connected to a solenoid 409 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 401 sends various command and control signals to them via an input / output port 405. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 405 is connected with various switches 408 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like, which are not shown, and a RAM erase switch circuit 453, which will be described later, provided in the power supply device 315. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 453.

  The payout control device 311 drives the payout motor 416 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 411, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 412 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 411, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 413 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 413 of the payout control device 311 is, like the RAM 403 of the main control device 310, a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 411 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 411 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 413 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 315 even after the power of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 413 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 401 of the main controller 310, the NMI terminal of the MPU 411 is also configured such that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 411, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 40) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 415 is connected to the MPU 411 of the payout control device 311 via a bus line 414 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 310, the payout motor 416, the firing control device 312, and the like are connected to the input / output port 415, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 311 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 311, but not to the main control device 310.

  The firing control device 312 controls the sphere firing unit 312a so that the sphere launching force is adjusted according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 251 when the main control device 310 issues an instruction to fire a sphere. The ball firing unit 312a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, if the touch sensor 251a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 251 and the stop switch 251b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (not operated), the operation handle 251 is operated. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of 251 and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 251.

  The sound lamp control device 313 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 426, and outputs light and extinction in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 229 to 233, the display lamp 234, and the hold lamp 285) 427, It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 281 performed by the display control device 314 such as the variation effect (variation display) and the continuous notice effect. The MPU 421, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 422 storing a control program executed by the MPU 421, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 423 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 425 is connected to the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 via a bus line 424 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main controller 310, a display controller 314, a voice output device 426, a lamp display device 427, a vibration sensor 428, a frame button 222, etc. are connected to the input / output port 425, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 313 monitors the input from the frame button 222, and when the frame button 222 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 426 and the lamp display device 427 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 314 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 281, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 314. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Further, the vibration sensor 428 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 200, since the ball entering the ball entrance is an important factor that determines the game state, the flow of the ball is changed by vibration to prevent the ball from intentionally entering the ball entrance. There is a need. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 428 that the pachinko machine 200 is vibrated by the player or the like, an error command for notifying the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 314. In addition, the voice lamp control device 313 determines an error in accordance with the command from the main control device 310 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 313, and issues an error command including the error type. It is transmitted to the display control device 314. In the display control device 314, control for displaying an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 281 without delay is performed.

  The RAM 423 of the voice lamp control device 313 is provided with at least a holding ball number counter 423a. The holding ball number counter 423a is a variable effect (fluctuation display) performed on the first symbol display device 237 (and the third symbol display device 281), like the holding ball number counter 403a of the main control device 310. It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls (waiting times) to be held for the variable effect held in the control device 310.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 313 cannot directly access the main control device 310 to acquire the value of the pending ball number counter 403a stored in the RAM 403 of the main control device 310. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 313 counts the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 310, and the reserved ball number counter 423a manages the number of reserved balls.

  Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 313 receives the number-of-hold-balls command transmitted from the main control device 310 when the number-of-hold-balls of variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 264. The value of the holding ball number counter 403a of the main control device 310 (that is, the variable display holding ball number held in the main control device 310) included in the holding ball number command is stored in the holding ball number counter 423a ( (See S2007 in FIG. 46).

  Further, the voice lamp control device 313 receives the variation pattern command which is the instruction command of the variation display from the main control device 310, and when the variation display mode in the third symbol display device 281 is set in accordance with the reception, the suspension display is held. The value of the ball number counter 423a is decremented by 1 (see S2205 in FIG. 47). Thus, the value of the reserved ball number counter 423a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 310, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the reserved ball number counter 403a of the main control device 310. ..

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 423a is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 281. That is, the voice lamp control device 313 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the holding ball number counter 423a in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, or the holding ball number counter 423a in response to receiving the variation pattern command. In order to notify the display control device 314 of the value of the stored sphere number counter 423a after the storage or the update, the display reserved device number command is transmitted to the display control device 314.

  When the display control device 314 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number symbol for the value of the reserved ball counter 423a of the voice lamp control device 313 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 281 (see S2751 of FIG. 57A). As described above, the value of the pending ball number counter 423a is changed in synchronization with the pending counter 403a of the main control device 310. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 281 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the holding counter 403a of the main control device 310. Therefore, the third symbol display device 281 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The RAM 423 also indicates a command storage area (not shown) in which a command received from the main control device 310 is temporarily stored until a process corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not variable display should be started. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown) and the like. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp processing device 313 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed. The fluctuation start flag is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 310 is received (see S2002 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 281. (See S2102 of FIG. 47).

  The display control device 314 is connected to the voice lamp control device 313 and the third symbol display device 281, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 313, a variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 281 (variation). (Production) and continuous notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 314 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 315 is provided with a power supply unit 451 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 200, a power failure monitoring circuit 452 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 322 (see FIG. 24). And an erase switch circuit 453. The power supply unit 451 is a device that supplies an operating voltage required for each of the control devices 310 to 314 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 451 takes in a voltage of AC 24 V supplied from the outside, and a voltage of 12 V for driving various switches such as various switches 408, solenoids such as solenoid 409, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 310 to 314 as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 452 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 401 of the main control device 310 and the MPU 411 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 452 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 451, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage is less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 310 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 310 and the payout controller 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 451 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 310 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 40).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 453 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 310 when the RAM erase switch 322 (see FIG. 24) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 200 is powered on, the main control device 310 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 311 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 311.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 314. The display control device 314 includes an MPU 431, a ROM (program ROM) 432, a work RAM 433, a character ROM 434, a resident video RAM 435, a normal video RAM 436, an image controller 437, an input port 438, and an output port 439. And bus lines 440 and 441.

  The input side of the input port 438 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 313, and the output side of the input port 438 is connected to the MPU 431, ROM 432, work RAM 433, character ROM 434, and image controller 437 via the bus line 440. ing. The resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are connected to the image controller 437, and the output port 439 is connected via the bus line 441. Further, the third symbol display device 281 is connected to the output side of the output port 439.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 200 is a model having a completely same specification of the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 281 even if it is a different model having a different lottery probability of a big jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 314 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 431, the character ROM 434, the image controller 437, the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 436 will be described first, and then the ROM 432 and the work RAM 433 will be described.

  First, the MPU 431 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 281 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 313.

  The character ROM 434, the image controller 437, the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 436 are all the character ROM 187, the image controller 188, and the resident video RAM 189 provided in the display control device 314 of the slot machine 10 according to the first embodiment. It has the same configuration or function as the normal video RAM 190.

  That is, the character ROM 434 is a memory that stores image data displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and in order to store a large amount of image data, a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and an inexpensive NAND flash is provided. It is composed of memory. In this embodiment, a 2 gigabyte NAND flash memory is used. As a result, since many images displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be stored, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be diversified in order to further enhance the interest of the player. ing.

  Further, the character ROM 434 is the same as the arbitration circuit 187b provided in the character ROM 187 in the first embodiment, which performs data address conversion in order to read / write data while avoiding the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 434a. A known arbitration circuit 434b having a function (for example, see Patent Document 1) is provided.

  The image controller 437 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 281 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 437 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 35) transmitted from the MPU 431, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c, which will be described later. While expanding the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 281, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. .. The image controller 437 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 281 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 437 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 431 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 431 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 431 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49), and instructs the image controller 437 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 437 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 281.

  As described above, the MPU 431 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 437 and gives the image controller 437 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 437 causes the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 431 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 437 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 437 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 431 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  Note that the image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 based on an instruction from the MPU 431 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 314, the MPU 431 instructs the image controller 437 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 435 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  As a result, after the initialization process is completed, the image controller 437 can perform the image drawing process while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 composed of the NAND flash memory 434a whose reading speed is slow at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 281.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 435 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 310 or the display control device 314. Even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Further, when the display control device 314 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435, the display control device 314 needs to draw from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 431 is configured to instruct the image controller 437 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 436 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 constituted by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 281. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 436 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 435, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 435. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 435 can be suppressed.

  Like the buffer RAM 188a provided in the image controller 188 in the first embodiment, the image controller 437 has a buffer RAM 437a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 434a. There is.

  The MPU 431 gives an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 437 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 434 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 is transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 437 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 435 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 437a according to this transfer instruction in accordance with various information. When the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is not used, the buffer RAM 437a is read. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred to the storage source end address.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 434 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 437a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436, the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 435 and 436 cannot be used for the image drawing processing, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing can be performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 281 from being delayed.

  The image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 by the image controller 437. Therefore, the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 281 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 435 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 434 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on, like the display control device 81 according to the first embodiment. A time main image area 435a, a back image area 435c, a character symbol area 435e, an error message image area 435f are provided, and at the same time, a power-on fluctuation image area 435b and a third symbol area 435d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 435a is similar to the power-on main image area 189a of the first embodiment, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while the display control device 314 is performing the initialization process at power-on. This is an area for storing data corresponding to the main image at power-on to be displayed. In the power-on fluctuation image area 435b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and the entry into the first entrance 164 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result in the main control device 310 in a variation effect.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 451 is started, the MPU 431 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a. Then, the transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 437 (see S2202 and S2203 in FIG. 57).

  Here, referring to FIG. 29, a power-on fluctuation image will be described. FIG. 29 shows that the display control device 314, immediately after turning on the power, turns on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 314 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a, and then the resident video RAM 435. The remaining image data to be stored in the RAM is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 314 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 435a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command, which is the variation start instruction command, is received from the voice lamp control device 313, the display control device 314 displays the power-on main image on the display screen as shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on stop image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on stop of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol as shown in FIG. 29 (c). The image and the image are displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, the result of the lottery performed in the main control device 310 is judged from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the voice lamp control device 313, and in the case of a “big hit”, FIG. The image shown in FIG. 29 is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and when it is “out”, the image shown in FIG. 29C is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 431 used the image data stored in the power-on main image area 435a for the image controller 437 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 was transferred to the resident video RAM 435. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player and persons involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 281. it can. Therefore, the display control device 314 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 281. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 at the time of power-on, it is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the third symbol display device 281 starts its operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately confirm that the operation efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 434.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 264, a fluctuation image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 435b, and the images shown in FIGS. 29B and 29C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 281. As described above, since the MPU 431 instructs the image controller 437, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect by using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 435b, so power-on. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 264 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, it is possible to immediately display the corresponding variation effect on the third symbol display device 281. it can.

  Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are stored in the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on variation image area 435b of the resident video RAM 435, a momentary power failure occurs. If the data resident in the resident video RAM 435 remains when the power failure occurs, the image data resident in the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on fluctuation image area 435b is used to restore the power when the power is restored. It is possible to immediately display the turning-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image on the third symbol display device 281.

  Returning to FIG. 28, the description will be continued. The back image area 435c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as in the back image area 189b of the first embodiment. Here, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 435c in the back image will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. 30 and 31 are explanatory diagrams for explaining three types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 for each back image, and FIG. Is for the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage”, FIG. 30 (b) is for the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 31 is for the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage”. Are shown respectively.

  Of the back surfaces A to C, the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B are, as shown in FIG. 30, all images that are longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the horizontal direction. It is prepared in the ROM 434. The image controller 437 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while horizontally scrolling the image from left to right.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as a display area, and then the image between the positions a and a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as a display region, the third symbol display device 281 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed due to such connection.

  When the frame button 222 is operated by the player to change the stage, the MPU 431 first sets the position between a and a ′ as the initial position of the display area, and the image at the initial position is the third symbol display device. The image controller 437 is controlled so as to be displayed at 281. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 437 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and further the display is performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 437 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as the image of the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the image between position a and position c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 281 so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31, the rear image on the rear surface C is displayed in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... It is displayed on the device 281. Specifically, the back surface C is an image of a mountain rising over the island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island, with the displayed position fixed, the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 281. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes over time.

  When the player operates the frame button 222 to change the stage to the “island stage”, the rear surface image shown in FIG. 31A is displayed as the initial rear surface image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 31A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue with the passage of time, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 31B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 31B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black over time, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 31C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 31C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 31 (a) is returned to and the back images of FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (c) are displayed again on the third symbol display device 281.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 435c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 30A, the rear surface A corresponding to the town stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 435. It is stored in the image area 435c. Usually, since the game is often played without changing the stage while the town stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed, all the image data of the back face A corresponding to the town stage that is frequently displayed is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 435c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 434 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 314 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage has only a partial area of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b, the resident video RAM 435. Stored in the back image area 435c. Also, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 31 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b) excluding FIG. 31 (b) is after power-on. Is stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 during the start-up process of FIG.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 222 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 222 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to change the back image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data of all the back images resident in the resident video RAM 435. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may increase the cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, the initial position of the back image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a ′ or the range of FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b). The image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. 31A and 31B is fixed and stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, when the stage is changed at any timing by the operation of the frame button 222 by the player, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 435 is displayed. By using the image data resident in 435c, the initial position of the back surface B or the back surface C is immediately changed to the third symbol display device 281. It is displayed, also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 435 and suppress an increase in cost.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal RAM 436 during the period. As a result, since the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 436 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 can be saved. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 436 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 281.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images of FIGS. 31A and 31B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. The ranges in FIGS. 31A and 31B are set so that the transfer from the character ROM 434 to the normal RAM 436 can be completed while the character ROM 434 is in progress. Accordingly, while displaying the images of FIGS. 31A to 31B, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 31B to 31C and 31C to 31A is displayed in the normal video RAM 436. 31 (a)-(b) using the image data resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the images are stored in the normal video RAM 436 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images of FIGS. 31B to 31C and 31C to 31A can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 281 with the passage of time. it can.

  The image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 on the rear surface B and the rear surface C is stored in the rear image dedicated sub area provided in the image storage area 436a (see FIG. 28) of the normal video RAM 436. As a result, the back-side image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back-side image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back-side image can be displayed reliably.

  In the back B, the image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 are the images corresponding to the image between the positions b ′ and b. Duplicate data is stored. Then, by the control of the image controller 437 by the MPU 431, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by using the image data stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 281 by using the image data stored in the RAM 436, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 281 with a smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 431 controls the image controller 437 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 281 by using the image data of the normal video RAM 436, and then, The MPU 431 controls the image controller 437 so that the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 281 by using the image data in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. To do. As a result, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 281 so that the image flows to the left.

  Returning to FIG. 28, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 435d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281. That is, in the third symbol area 435, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 25) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 281, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 187 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entry into the first ball entrance 264 occurs, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 281 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 237. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 435d, as a main symbol without numbers "0" to "9", a main symbol consisting of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet character, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even after a lapse of a predetermined time after one variable effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the main symbol without the number as the third symbol is displayed in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 200 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 281.

  The character symbol area 435e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as in the first embodiment. In the pachinko machine 200, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 435e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the main control device 313, the device 314 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434, but preliminarily stores it in the character design area 435e of the resident video RAM 435. By reading the resident image data, the image controller 437 can draw a predetermined image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434, the character design can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 434.

  The error message image area 435f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 200, like the error message image area 189e of the first embodiment. In the pachinko machine 200, when the voice lamp control device 313 detects vibration from the output of the vibration sensor 428 attached to the back surface of the game board 213, the voice lamp control device 313 causes the display control device to display the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Notify 314. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 313 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 313 notifies the display control device 314 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. Then, when the display control device 314 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 281.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 200, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 435f, the display control device 314 causes the error message of the resident video RAM 435 to be based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 435f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 437. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 435, even if the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 434, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  Like the normal video RAM 190 of the first embodiment, the normal video RAM 436 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and includes an image storage area 436a, a first frame buffer 436b, and a second frame buffer 436c. Is provided at least.

  The image storage area 436a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The image storage area 436a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435, the MPU 431 stores the image data required for subsequent image drawing in the sub area provided from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436. , The image controller 437 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is stored. As a result, the image controller 437 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 431 from the character ROM 434, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a via the buffer RAM 437a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 431 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 437 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 431 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction by simply transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 437, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The image controller 437 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 431 into either one of the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for the one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 281. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 281 executes the process of displaying the image for the one frame.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c as the frame buffers, the image controller 437 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 281.

  Then, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading out the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 281 have a drawing process for the image for one frame. The MPU 431 alternately designates one of the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame, thereby When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 436b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 436b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 436c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 436b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 436c. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The ROM 432 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 431 and fixed value data, and has at least a data table storage area 432a.

  The data table storage area 432a, for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 310, a display data table in which the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 with the passage of time, and the main control For the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in addition to one effect based on the command from the device 310, an additional data table describing the display content to be displayed with the passage of time and the display data table are displayed. This is an area in which transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 among the image data used in one rendering and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing are stored.

  The display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 based on the command from the main control device 310, and, for example, a variable effect, a demonstration effect, and a confirmation. Display data tables corresponding to display effects and restart effects are prepared.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol without the numbers "0" to "9", is stopped and displayed, and only the background image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 200 is not playing a game.

  Further, the final display effect is the third symbol display device when the stop symbol is fixedly displayed by receiving the finalizing command (display finalizing command) from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 after the variable directing effect. It is an effect displayed in 281. For example, when the stop symbol is a detached symbol, an effect of emphasizing the detachment is performed, and when the stop symbol is one of 15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot and 2R probability variation jackpot, each jackpot is highlighted. The performance is performed. By visually recognizing the finalized display effect, the player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol.

  Further, the restart effect vibrates the third symbol when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 310 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect. It is an effect to display the made image on the third symbol display device 281. In the third symbol display device 281, the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the variation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and the stop symbol is not fixed at that time. Can be recognized.

  In the data table storage area 432a, one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect, the fixed display effect, and the restart effect is stored. In addition, as for the variation display data table which is the display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, one table for one variation effect pattern, that is, 32 tables in total are prepared.

  Further, in the variable display data table, when the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 and the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of the stop display of the variation effect do not match, for example, the variation A special variation display pattern table is also provided, which is used when the main control device 310 gives an instruction for an out-of-stop pattern when the effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for winning. This special variation causes the third symbol to be variably displayed at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 is received, and the confirmation command is received. In accordance with the above, a special stop symbol indicating a deviation as a stop symbol (for example, symbols displayed as “3” “4” “1” in order from the left column) is fixed.

  When the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control apparatus 310 via the voice lamp control apparatus 313 does not match the stop design to be displayed when the variation effect is stopped and displayed, the display control apparatus 314 executes the line in the main control apparatus 310. There is a possibility that the variation effect and the final display effect cannot be performed by correctly reflecting the result of the drawn lottery. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, the special variation effect is performed in such a case, and after the variation display, the special stop symbol indicating the special deviation is definitely displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so the main control device Even if the result of the lottery in 310 is out of order, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 281 from being mistakenly given a jackpot confirmed display effect. In addition, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, if the lottery result in the main control device 310 is a big hit, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 200 shifts to the special gaming state. The player can continue playing the game without anxiety. Further, by making the confirmation display a special stop pattern, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 200 may be in the jackpot state even if the confirmation display is off. Even if the confirmation display is off, the pachinko machine 200 is in a big hit state, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) for which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is represented as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing a sprite on the third pattern display device 281 such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 281 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variation table display data table, one background image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2, ...) As the drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, in that image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing light insertion and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 281, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since the display data table for change is fixed, only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image, is specified. This rear surface type displays one of the rear surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected from the player (one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”) or the rear surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

  When it is specified by this back surface type to display one of the back surfaces A to C, the MPU 431 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 431 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 281) is started. In this case, the MPU 431 was displaying the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 281) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 281) is started.

  Further, the position information is, in accordance with the back surface type, drawing of an image based on the information indicating the elapsed time after the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the display database (or the third symbol display device 281). Display) may be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 281) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  For the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 310.

  Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 310 is the third symbol. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the number attached to the symbol and displaying the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is currently performed, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. Even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted by switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is being performed this time, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 32) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect to be defined in the display data table is Have been described.

  The MPU 431 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313, reads it from the data table storage area 432a, and displays it in a work RAM 433 described later. The data is stored in the data table buffer 433b, and the pointer 433e described later is initialized to 0. Then, the pointer 433e is incremented by 1 each time the drawing processing for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, By specifying the content of the image to be drawn, creating a drawing list (see FIG. 35) described later, and sending the drawing list to the image controller 437, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 433e, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, in the display control device 314, the program to be executed by the MPU 431 is not changed in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 433b.

Here, like the conventional pachinko machine, when it is configured to activate the program executed by the MPU 431 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is changed, with the diversification of the effect image. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 314 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 433b. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 314, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This is because, in the pachinko machine 200, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the performance. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. Can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 200 is configured to determine in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning.

  Next, details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the additional data table. As described above, the additional data table describes the display content to be displayed with the passage of time for the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 310. It was done. Here, “adding to one effect” means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 310, for example, displaying an image that is not normally displayed in one effect. Then, it includes the concept of superimposing another effect on the one effect, changing a part or all of the tone in the one effect, and changing the image displayed in the one effect. ..

  That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 310. Or the drawing contents necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in the one effect, and the drawing contents required for changing and displaying the image displayed in the one effect are preset. Is.

  In the present embodiment, the continuous notice additionally displayed to the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main control device 310. A case where the display content for displaying the effect is defined by the additional data table will be described.

  That is, the additional data table is prepared, for example, corresponding to the continuous notice effect additionally set for the variable effect, and specifically, the display mode of the continuous notice effect is “bubble” or “egg”. , "Chick", "chicken", and "chicken group" are stored in the data table storage area 432a.

  In this additional data table, the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is finely defined in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed in the image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 281 to draw a sprite, such as a semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 33, two effects (effect 1, effect 2) and two characters (character 1, character 2) are associated with the address “0097H” defined in the display data table, respectively. Sprite type (effect type, character type), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. On the other hand, when there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to the address in the additional data table. None data is specified (corresponds to the address “0001H” in FIG. 33).

  It should be noted that, as in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 33, "00FDH") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect to be defined in the additional data table is Have been described.

  When the MPU 431 receives the continuous notice command from the voice lamp control device 313, the MPU 431 reads an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice mode indicated by the continuous notice command from the data table storage area 432a, and the additional data table of the work RAM 433 described later. It is stored in the buffer 433c. Then, each time the pointer 433e is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433e is displayed from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. After that, the image content to be drawn next is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 35) described later is created.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 33, when the pointer 433e becomes “0097H”, the MPU 431 is defined in various sprites defined in the display data table address “0097H” and in the additional data table address “0097H”. The effect 1, effect 2, character 1, and character 2 sprites are added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 437 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 433e is "0001H", since None data is defined in the address "0001H" of the additional data table, it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address "0001H" of the display data table is displayed. A drawing list is generated based on various sprites defined in "0001H".

  Then, by sending the drawing list to the image controller 437, the drawing instruction of the image is given. Thus, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 433e, and the drawing content defined by the additional data table is added, so that the display data table and the additional data table are The image as defined is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, in the display control device 314, an effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313. When, for example, another effect image (for example, a continuous notice effect image) is displayed in addition to (for example, a variable effect image), an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be additionally displayed is added to the additional data table buffer. By setting it to 433c, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thereby, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, a display in which an image in which other effect images are superposed is defined for each original effect image. If a data table is separately prepared, a display data table of 32 × 5 = 160 types must be prepared. However, like the pachinko machine 200, a data table corresponding to another effect image is separately defined as an additional data table. By doing so, it is sufficient to prepare 32 + 5 = 37 types of displays and additional data tables, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 432a. Therefore, it is possible to store a data table corresponding to various kinds of effects in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 432a, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effect images.

  Further, like the present pachinko machine 200, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 433b, Even when it is determined to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to another effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b. Only by setting in the data table buffer 433c, other effect images to be additionally displayed can be added to the original effect image and easily displayed.

  Since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433c and the additional data table buffer 433c are set. From the table, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer while updating the pointer 433e at each time, and to easily create one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. Can be generated. Therefore, even when the display of other effects is determined by the voice lamp control device 313 or the like in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 310, the effect to be additionally displayed is displayed. By defining the display content with the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a variety of effect displays from a small number of data tables.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 435 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 435, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 432a.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer should be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 34). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. None data which means that is defined (corresponds to the address “0002H” in FIG. 34).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 434 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436) start address. Is included.

  As in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 34, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data that should be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 431 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313, and if a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table exists, the selection is performed. The transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 432a and stored in the transfer data table buffer 433d of the work RAM 433 described later. Then, each time the pointer 433e is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433e is displayed from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. Transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be started at that point in time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433d while creating a drawing list (see FIG. 35) described later. And add the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 34, when the pointer 433e becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 431 transfers the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table to the display data table and the additional data table. It is added to the drawing list created based on the above, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 437. On the other hand, when the pointer 433e is "0002H", None data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 437 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a in accordance with the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 436a without fail. Then, by using the image data stored in the image storage area 436a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 434 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 200, in the display control device 314, the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table 344d, the sprite image data used in the display data table is surely transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 at a desired timing. Can be transferred.

  Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be finely controlled while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 436. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 281. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 28, the description will be continued. The work RAM 433 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 431 executes various programs, and includes a simple image display flag 433a, a display data table buffer 433b, an additional data table 433c, and a transfer data table. 433d, a pointer 433e, a drawing list area 433f, a clock counter 433g, a stored image determination flag 433h, and a drawing target buffer flag 433i.

  The simple image display flag 433a indicates whether or not to display the power-on time images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 29A to 29C on the third symbol display device 281. It is a flag that indicates. This simple image display flag 433a is an image in order to display the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 281 in the initialization process of the main process (see FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 431 after the power is turned on. When the controller 437 is instructed to draw the main image when the power is turned on, the controller 437 is turned on (see S2204 in FIG. 57). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 435, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 281, It is set to OFF (see S3105 in FIG. 60B).

  The simple image display flag 433a is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 431 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 49), and the simple image display flag is displayed. If 433a is on, a simple command determination process (see S2408 of FIG. 49 (b)) and a simple display setting process (FIG. 49 (b) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. ) S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 433a is off, command determination processing (see FIGS. 50 to 54) and display are performed so that various images are displayed according to the command received from the voice lamp control device 313. The setting process (see FIGS. 55 to 59) is executed.

  When the simple image display flag 433a is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 431 in the V interrupt process (see S3001 in FIG. 60A), and the simple image display flag 433a is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 is executed. If the simple image display flag 433a is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 433b is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 according to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 313. The MPU 431 determines an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 based on a command from the voice lamp control device 313, selects a display data table corresponding to the effect from the data table storage area 432a, and The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 433b. Then, the MPU 431 adds the pointer 433e one by one, and on the basis of the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, the image controller 437 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 35) in which the instruction contents of the image drawing are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  The additional data table buffer 433c is displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b according to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 313. It is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to effects (such as continuous announcement effects). The MPU 431 writes the None data, which means that there is no display object to be additionally displayed in the additional data table buffer 433c, at the same time as storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 433b. Clear the contents.

  After that, the MPU 431, based on a command from the voice lamp control device 313, etc., of the effect to be displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b. When there is an effect to be additionally displayed by judging the presence / absence, an additional data table corresponding to the effect is selected from the data table storage area 432a and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. To do.

  Then, the MPU 431 adds the pointer 433e one by one, and the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table buffer 433c are stored. Based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the additional data table, a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 35) describing the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 437 is generated for each frame. .. As a result, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is additionally displayed on the effect corresponding to the display data table on the third symbol display device 281. If the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 433c, since None data is stored in the additional data table buffer 433c, the third symbol display device 281 has the effect corresponding to the display data table. Is displayed as is.

  The transfer data table buffer 433d is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b in response to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 313. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 433b, the MPU 431 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 432a and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 433d. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b is stored in the resident video RAM 435, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 431 clears the contents by writing None data, which means that there is no transfer target image data, to the transfer data table buffer 433d.

  Then, the MPU 431 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433d while incrementing the pointer 433e by one. If so (that is, if None data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 35) that describes the instruction content of the image drawing to the image controller 437 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a in accordance with the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can always be stored in the image storage area 436a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 434 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

  The pointer 433e corresponds to the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image from the display data table, the additional data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 433b, the additional data table buffer 433c and the transfer data table buffer 433d. This is for designating an address from which data transfer data information should be acquired. The MPU 431 temporarily initializes the pointer 433e to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 433b. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (S2403 in FIG. 49). (Refer to S2711 in FIG. 55), the value of the pointer 433e is incremented by one.

  Every time such updating of the pointer 433e is performed, the MPU 431 selects the address indicated by the pointer 433e from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. A drawing list (see FIG. 35) to be described later is created by specifying the drawing contents defined in Section 1), and a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433d. The transfer data information of the image data is acquired and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  As a result, when the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 433c, The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b or the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be easily changed. .. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433d is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 436a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 434 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

  The drawing list area 433f is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c, and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433e. This is an area for storing a drawing list for instructing the image controller 437 to draw an image for one frame.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 437 to draw an image of one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design, 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, Reserved ball count symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 437 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436) in which image data of a corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 437 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 437 into either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 433i.

  The MPU 431, in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c, draws content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 433e and other images to be drawn. Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, based on the contents of (for example, a held image displaying the number of held balls and a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error) ) Is generated and the detailed information is rearranged for each sprite to create a drawing list.

  Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are specified from the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table, and other image contents. Generated according to the sprite type. That is, the area of the resident video RAM 435 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 431 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 431 displays a display data table and additional data for other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) in the detailed information of each sprite. Copy the information specified in the table as is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 431 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the backmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., Error pattern).

  The image controller 437 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  Further, in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433d, the MPU 431, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 433e, transfers the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 434 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 436a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 437 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 434 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436.

  The clock counter 433g is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b. MPU431 sets the time data which shows the production time of the production displayed based on the display data table according to storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 433b. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 281 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (see FIG. 49). Each time the display setting process is executed, the clock counter 433g is decremented by 1 (see S2713 in FIG. 55). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 433g becomes 0 or less, the MPU 431 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Perform various processing that should be performed.

  For the stored image discrimination flag 433h, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 435, is the image data corresponding to that sprite stored in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436? It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not.

  The stored image determination flag 433h is generated by the initial setting process (see S2201 in FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 431 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image discrimination flag 433h generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 436a.

  Then, the stored image determination flag 433h is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 431. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to the one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 436a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 436a as the one sprite will always be in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

  Further, the MPU 431 refers to the stored image determination flag 433h when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data does not reside in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, and refers to the image of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the data is already stored in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 435 (see S3212 in FIG. 61). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 436a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3213 in FIG. 61). The image controller 437 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 436a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. This can prevent wasteful transfer from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, and can reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 314 and the traffic on the bus line 440. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 433i is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 437 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 433i is 0, the first frame buffer 436b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 436c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 437 together with the drawing list (see S3302 in FIG. 62).

  As a result, the image controller 437 executes a drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 437 reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 281 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 281 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 433i is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 437 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 433i, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c each time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 431 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 49) is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 62).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame, thereby When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 436b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 436b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 436c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 436b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 436c. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 36 to 42. The processing of the MPU 401 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is regularly (in this embodiment, 2 ms cycle) started. There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process will be performed. The main process will be described.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 401 in main controller 310. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S1101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 310 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 899, 9, 99, 250), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 403.

  Next, the process for displaying by the first symbol display device 237 and the variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 281 are executed (S1104), and then the first entrance opening The start winning process associated with winning the H.264 is executed (S1105). The details of the variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39, respectively.

  After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S1106), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S1107), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 251 with the touch sensor 251a and that the hit switch 251b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 310 instructs the launch controller 312 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the variation process (S1104) executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this variation process (S1104). This variation process (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36), and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S1201). As the big hit, during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and the first symbol display device 237 at the time of big hit, and during the predetermined time after the big hit game is included. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S1201: Yes), this processing is ended.

  If it is not a big hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is changing (S1202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is not changing. (S1202: No), then, after the variable display on the first symbol display device 237 is stopped, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed (S1203). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1203: No), this processing is ended as it is. Thereby, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1204, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1203: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a (the variable display reserved ball number N reserved in the main control device 310). Is greater than 0 (S1204), and the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a (reserved ball number N) is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a (reserved ball number) N) is decremented by 1 (S1205), and the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is shifted (S1206). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the holding sphere storage area to the execution area side, namely, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first reserved area, the third reserved area → the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area → the third reserved area. After the data shift process, the variation start process of the first symbol display device 237 is executed (S1207). The fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1204, when it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a (reserved ball number N) is 0 (S1204: No), the state where the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 281, that is, It is determined whether or not the demonstration is in progress (S1208). In this determination processing, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 314 via the voice lamp control device 313, it is determined that the value of the holding ball number counter 403a (holding ball number N) is greater than 0. It is determined that the period is during demonstration.

  If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S1208: No), the demo command is set (S1212), the present process is terminated, and if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S1208: Yes), This processing is ended as it is. The demo command set in the process of S1212 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 403, and in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 42) described later executed by the MPU 401. , To the voice lamp control device 313. The voice lamp control device 313 transmits this demo command to the display control device 314 as it is, and the display control device 314 controls the third symbol display device 281 to display the demonstration effect in accordance with this demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, when the variable display is not started when the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop, the demo command can be set and the demonstration effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether the changing time has elapsed (S1210). The display time during change of the first symbol display device 237 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and this change time elapses. If not (S1210: No), the display of the first symbol display device 237 is updated (S1211), and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 237a of the first symbol display device 237, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Note that the fluctuation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the fluctuation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is incremented by 1 each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 237 has elapsed (S1210: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 237 is set (S1212). The stop symbol is set in advance by a variation start process (S1207) described later with reference to FIG. That is, in the process of S1206, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved sphere storage area, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter Depending on the value of C2, it will be a pattern that becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot after the jackpot (probability variation jackpot that the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds jackpot) or a 2R probability variation jackpot (the maximum round number becomes a high probability state after two rounds of jackpots) It is determined whether the symbol is the probability variable jackpot to be transferred) or the hourly jackpot (the jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is lit when the 15R probability variation big jackpot is lit after the jackpot, the red LED is illuminated when the 2R probability variation jackpot is lit, and the red LED and the blue LED are illuminated when the time saving jackpot is achieved. Turn on the LED and. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1212, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 281 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED on the first symbol display device 237. Then, a confirmation command is set to confirm (S1213), and this processing ends. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 313 transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 314 as it is. The third symbol display device 281 stops the variation when the variation time elapses, and by receiving the confirmation command, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 281 is determined.

  Next, the fluctuation start process (S1207) executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S1207). This variation start processing (S1207) is executed in the variation processing (see FIG. 37) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 36), and based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, The lottery of “big hit” or “out” is carried out (judgment determination), and the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 is determined.

  In the variation start process, first, a lottery (win / win determination) process for determining whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is performed (S1301). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, when the state (mode) that the pachinko machine 200 can take is a normal low probability, “7,307,582” of the numerical values 0 to 899 of the first random number counter C1 becomes a winning value, and the pachinko machine 200 has a winning value. When the possible states (modes) have a high probability, “28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596 , 618,656,681,716,750,772,809,836,866,892 "is the winning value. In the process of S1301, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved sphere storage area is compared with these hit values, and when they match, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. .

  Then, as a result of the processing in S1301, if it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (S1301: Yes), a big hit display is made based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area. The mode is set (S1302). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first hit type counter C2, that is, the 15R probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots, or the maximum round number has a high probability after 2 rounds of jackpots The display mode of the first symbol display device 237 (lighting state of the LED 237a) is set based on whether the 2R certainty variation jackpot to shift to the state or the short-time jackpot to shift to the low-probability state after the jackpot of maximum 15 rounds. To be done. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 281, the jackpot type (15R certainty variation jackpot, 2R certainty variation jackpot, time saving jackpot) is the stop type. Is set. In addition, among the numerical values 0 to 9 of the first hit type counter C2, in the case of "0, 1, 2, 3", after that, the state shifts to the low probability state (time saving big hit), and in the case of "4,5" After that, it shifts to a high-probability state (2R probability variation big hit), and in the case of "6, 7, 8, 9", it shifts to a high probability state (15R probability variation big hit) thereafter.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S1303). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 237 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the big symbol symbol is stopped in the third symbol display device 281 is determined. It At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 403 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  When it is determined in the process of S1301 that the jackpot is not a big hit (S1301: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is set to a display mode corresponding to the deviation symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the front / rear outreach, the reach other than the front / rear outreach, or the complete outreach is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set such that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is different depending on the high probability state or the low probability state. There is.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of disengagement is determined (S1305), the display time of the first symbol display device 237 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol comes off on the third symbol display device 281. Is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S1303, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 403 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the process of S1303 or the process of S1305 ends, next, a variation pattern is determined and a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 314 of the variation pattern type is set (S1306). The fluctuation pattern is selected from a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) stored in the ROM 402 according to the result of the lottery in S1301 and the fluctuation time determined in S1303 or S1305.

  In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as fluctuation patterns for disconnection, "disconnection (for long time)", "disconnection (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", "disconnection super reach", "disconnection special reach", etc. “Various patterns are defined, and 15R fixed jackpot / short-time jackpot are commonly used as fluctuation patterns, including“ 15R shared normal reach ”,“ 15R shared super reach ”, and“ 15R shared special reach ”. As a pattern, various kinds of "15R probability variable special reach" are defined, various "special fluctuation" are defined as variation patterns for 2R probability variable big hits, and "common normal reach" types and "shared supermarket" Various "reach" and "shared special reach" are defined. . Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected according to the result of the lottery in S1301 and the fluctuation time determined in the processing of S1303 or S1305.

  Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 314 of the stop type set in the processing of S1302 or S1304 is set (S1307). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 403, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 313 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 42). It The voice lamp control device 313 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 314. When the process of S1307 ends, the process returns to the fluctuation process.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39, the start winning processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S1105). This start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 264, and if there is a starting prize. From the value indicated by the various random number counters that have been held and the value held by the various random number counters that have been held, the permission determination process for starting the continuous notice effect in the third symbol display device 281 is executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 264 (starting prize) (S1401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 264 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 264 (S1401: Yes), the value of the pending ball number counter 403a (the pending ball number N of the variable effect pending in the main control device 310) is It is determined whether it is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1402). Whether or not there is a winning in the first ball entrance 264 (S1401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 264, if the number N of operation-holding balls is not N <4 (S1402: No) , Return to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 264 (S1401: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a (the number of reserved balls N) is set. 1 is added (S1403), and the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S1103 are stored in the empty holding area of the holding ball storage area of the RAM 403. The first area is stored (S1404).

  Next, the number N of reserved balls updated by the process of S1403 and the respective values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area by the process of S1404 are set. The included reserved ball number command is created (S1405), the created reserved ball number command is set (S1406), the start winning process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The number of reserved balls command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 403, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 42). The voice lamp control device 313 manages the number of holding balls in the voice lamp control device 313 based on the holding ball number N included in the holding ball number command, and also controls various counters included in the holding ball number command. Based on the value, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 401 of the main control device 310 when the power of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 401 in the main control device 310. Then, the MPU 401 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 403 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 311, and the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 413 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 411 in the payout control device 311 and the MPU 411 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a startup process executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 when the main control device 310 is powered on will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1601). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 313 and the payout control device 311) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 403 is permitted (S1603).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 322 (see FIG. 24) provided in the power supply device 315 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 322 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1605), and if it is not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1611 in this case as well.

  If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1605: Yes), the RAM judgment value is calculated (S1606), and the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, and in such a case, the process proceeds to S1611. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 403, as will be described later in the processing of S1712 in FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 403 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 311 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). When the payout control device 311 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 413, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 310 executes the initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of RAM 403.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 322. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 322 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 403 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 403 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 403 is set (S1613). After the initialization process of the RAM 403 is executed, the process proceeds to S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 322 is not turned on (S1604: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S1605: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 403 is held (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 311 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 311 is in a state in which the game ball payout control can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 413.

  In the process of S1610, interruption is permitted (S1610). Then, the process shifts to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a main process executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each processing of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 36), the output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 234 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). External output processing to be transmitted to () (S1701). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S1101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 36) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 311 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the number-of-holding-balls command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 39) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command and the like necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 281 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 312.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 are read (S1703), and then, in the case of a jackpot state, a specific winning opening (large opening) of the variable winning device 265. A large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the (mouth) 265a is executed (S1704). That is, the specific winning opening 265a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 265a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 265a. When any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 265a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 265a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device 283 is executed (S1705). Briefly described, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the passing timing, and at the same time, the second symbol display device 283. The variable display of the second symbol is carried out. And the lottery of the second symbol is carried out by the value of the second hit random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 264 is opened for a predetermined time.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1706). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 403 (S1706: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 452 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1707). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process moves to S1701 and the above-described processes after S1701 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1707: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1708, S1709).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 and 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 403, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1709).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  In addition, in the processing of S1706, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1706: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 452 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 40 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1710 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that the power supply has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 311 and voice lamp control device 313). And transmits (S1711). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1712), access to the RAM 403 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 403 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S1706 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1705 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 310, since the power-off occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1701. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1701 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 401 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S1601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1701 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 310 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 310 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 47. The processing of the MPU 421 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 43, a startup process executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1801). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1917 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time (see FIG. 44). It is determined whether or not it was started during the execution of () (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 44, when the voice lamp control device 313 receives a power-off command from the main control device 310 (see S1914 in FIG. 44), the power-off process of S1917 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1917 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1802: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1917 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 310) only on the MPU 421 of the voice lamp control unit 313 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 423 is destroyed (S1803).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 423 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 423 by the process of S1806. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 423, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 423. If the data destruction of the RAM 423 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804 and the initialization of the RAM 423 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 423 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 423 (the memory of the RAM 423 is lost due to the power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 423 has been destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1804. On the other hand, this startup process is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1917 is completed, or only the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 423, the data of the RAM 423 is determined to be normal (S1803: No), and the process proceeds to S1808.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1802: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1917, the voice lamp control device 313 is executed. The MPU 421 has been reset and started. In such a case, the power-off process is in the middle of execution, so the storage state of the RAM 423 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1804 and the initialization of the RAM 423 is started.

  In the process of S1804, the entire storage area of the RAM 423 is checked (S1804). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 423, all storage areas of the RAM 423 are cleared to 0.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 423 (S1805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 423 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1806). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 423. On the other hand, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 423 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 423 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 423 is notified by the display lamp 234. The voice output device 426 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 423, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 314 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 281. You can

  In the process of S1808, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1917 is executed (see S1916 in FIG. 44). That is, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1917 is executed. Therefore, the process of S1808 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is a case after the power failure occurs and the processing is started in a state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1917 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 313 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 423 is set (S1810), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 423 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 310.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1808 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the startup process this time was started after the power was completely cut off, for example, and the process of S1804 to S1806 is performed. This is a case where the processing has been started or the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 has been reset (started without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 310) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 423, S1809, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1810, the initial value of the RAM 423 is set (S1810), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1811), the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that the clear processing of S1809 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 423 have already been cleared by the processing of S1804 when the processing of S1808 is reached via the processing of S1804 to S1806. When only the MPU 421 of the voice lamp control device 313 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 423 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 313 is saved. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a main process executed by the MPU 421 in the audio lamp control device 313 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1901 was executed last time (S1901), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1901: No), the process proceeds to S1912 without performing the processes of S1902 to S1911. In the processing of S1901, it is the processing related to display (effect) in S1902 to S1911 that determines whether or not 1 ms has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display process of (1) and the command determination process of S1913 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1913 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception failure of the command transmitted from the main control device 310, and by executing the process of S1912 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to make the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 314 set by the processes of S1903 to S1913 are transmitted to the display control device 314. Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 234 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1909 described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1904). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 426 or the lamp display device 427. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 314 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 281. If the power is not turned on, the process goes to S1905 without the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1905, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the retained quantity display update process is executed (S1906). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 200 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 281 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is a command as a display control device. 314 is transmitted. In the retained quantity display updating process, a process of turning on the retaining lamp 285 according to the value of the retaining sphere number counter 423a is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1907). In this frame button input monitoring / rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 222 operated by the player in order to enhance the rendering effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 222 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation on the frame button 222 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 314 that the frame button 222 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect is not executed or when the frame button 222 is pressed during the high speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed and a rear image change command for the display control device 314 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in this back image change command, the display control device 314 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preview character appears at the start of the variation display, pressing the frame button 222 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this change, or by pressing the frame button 222 during the reach production, the expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It is also possible to change to a holding effect and to use the frame button 222 as an enter button for selecting one of the reach effects. If the frame button 222 is not provided, the process of S1907 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process ends, the vibration sensor input monitoring process is performed (S1908). The vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from the vibration sensor 428 and detecting whether or not vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 200.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 428 is read from the vibration sensor 428 (S1951), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level. (S1952). As a result, if the vibration level is lower than the predetermined level (S1952: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is ended and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 44).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S1952: Yes), it is determined that the pachinko machine 200 is vibrated, and the audio output device 426 is set to output an alarm sound (S1953) and displayed. An error command for notifying the occurrence of a vibration error is set to the control device 314 (S1954), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 44). Thereby, in the display control device 31, a process of displaying an error message image notifying the vibration error on the third symbol display device 281 is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 44, the description of the main process is continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) is completed, then the ramp edit process is executed (S1909), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S1910). In the lamp editing process, the lighting pattern of the illumination portions 229 to 233 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 281. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 426 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 281, and the sound is output from the voice output device 426 according to the setting. Further, when the output of the alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring processing (see FIG. 45) (see S1953), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by the sound editing / output processing, and the alarm sound is output by voice. It is output from the output device 426.

  After the process of S1910, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1911), and the process proceeds to S1912. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 281 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 310. The lamp edit process of S1909 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit / output process of S1910 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 281.

  In the process of S1912, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 281, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 310, and the command is displayed on the display control device 314. The variable display process, which is the process set for transmission, is executed. Details of this variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 310 is performed (S1913). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1913 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 433 (S1914). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 310. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1914 (S1914: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are both turned on (S1916), and the power-off process is executed (S1917). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1918), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 426 and the lamp display device 427 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information about the occurrence of power failure is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1914 (S1914: No), it is determined whether the RAM 423 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 423 (S1915), and the RAM 423 is destroyed. If not (S1915: No), the process returns to S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 423 is destroyed (S1915: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 281 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 200 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 423 has been destroyed, the voice output device 426 and the lamp display device 427 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the command determination processing (S1913) executed by the MPU 421 in the audio lamp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1913). This command determination process (S1913) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 44) performed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 310. .. In addition, this process also determines the start of the continuous announcement effect by the third symbol display device 281 when the number of reserved balls command is received from the main control device 310.

  In the command determination processing, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 310 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 423, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 310. It is determined whether or not (S2001). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 423 is turned on (S2002), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S2003). , Return to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 423, and in a variation display process (see FIG. 47) described later, a display variation pattern for notifying the display control device 314 of the start of variation effect and the variation pattern type. Used when setting a command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 310 (S2004). Then, if it is determined that the stop type command is received (S2004: Yes), the display stop type command is set in order to directly transmit the stop type command to the display control device 314 (S2005).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2004: No), then it is determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 310 (S2006). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the hold ball number counter 403a of the main control device 310 included in the hold ball number command (that is, held by the main control device 310). The number of holding balls of the variation effect is extracted and stored in the holding ball number counter 423a of the voice lamp control device 313 (S2007).

  Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 310 when the balls win the first ball entrance 264 (start prize), every time there is a start prize, the process of S2008 is performed. The value of the reserved ball number counter 423a of the voice lamp controller 313 can be matched with the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a of the main controller 310. Therefore, even if the value of the hold ball number counter 423a of the voice lamp control device 313 deviates from the value of the hold ball number counter 403a of the main control device 310 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 313 detects a start winning. The value of the reserved ball number counter 423a can be corrected to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a of the main controller 310.

  After the processing of S2007, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 314 of the value of the reserved ball number counter 423a updated by the processing of S2007 is set (S2008). Thereby, in the display control device 314, processing is executed so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Then, the continuous notice determination process is executed (S2009), and the process returns to the main process. In this continuous notice determination process, the value of the number of reserved balls received from main controller 310 by the number of reserved balls command and the values of first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2 and stop pattern selection counter C3 It is determined whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect in which the notice effect images are continuously displayed over the variable effect held at the time point. Further, when the continuous notice production is performed, is the same notice type continuous notice production mode in which the same image (for example, “bubble” image) is displayed over a plurality of variable productions as the continuous notice production mode? , Related images are displayed in order each time a fluctuating effect is performed (for example, each image is displayed in the order of "egg" → "chick" → "chicken" → "chicken group") Step-up type continuous notice effect It decides whether to make it an aspect.

  Specifically, the determination as to whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect is made based on the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 at the time when the number of reserved balls command is transmitted. The result of the lottery that is performed corresponding to the reserved balls that are held in step S4 and the stop type after the fluctuating effect are estimated, and the determination is performed based on the estimation result and the number of reserved balls that are held at that time. For example, when it is estimated that the stop type after the fluctuating effect is the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the out-of-front / rear reach, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is performed with a predetermined probability. Further, in this case, the larger the number of reserved balls, the higher the probability that the continuous announcement effect may be performed.

  In addition to this, when the estimated lottery result is a big hit, continuous notice production may be performed with a predetermined probability regardless of the stop type, or the result of the lottery is off. However, when the stop type is reach, that is, when it is estimated that the reach is out of front / rear and reach other than out of front / rear, the continuous announcement effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. As described above, the condition for determining the continuous announcement effect may be set as appropriate according to the playability of the pachinko machine 200.

  Further, as the continuous notice effect mode, the condition of the same effect type or the step-up type may be appropriately set. For example, a random number counter may be provided inside the voice lamp control device 313, and the continuous notice presentation mode may be determined according to the value of the random number counter.

  In the pachinko machine 200, in the main controller 310, the respective values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired at the time of winning the start prize are controlled by the voice lamp controller by the number of reserved balls. 313 is notified, and the voice lamp control device 313 determines the start of the continuous announcement effect and sets the mode of the continuous announcement effect based on the values of the various counters and the values of the held balls notified by the on-hold ball number command. To do. As a result, the processing in the main control device 310 can be concentrated on the lottery processing, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 200, that is, the game state to be transitioned based on the entrance into the first entrance 264. On the other hand, if the MPU 421 having a high processing capability is used for the voice lamp control device 313, the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect can be set in various modes.

  Further, the number of holding balls and the values of various counters can be transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313 with one holding ball number command. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 313, it is possible to accurately grasp the correspondence between the values of the various counters acquired in association with the start winning and the number of reserved balls at the time when the start winning is detected. When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is decided, the number of reserved balls to which the continuous announcement effect is added can be accurately grasped. Therefore, as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls and the values of various counters are transmitted from main control device 310 to voice lamp control device 313 by another command, control in voice lamp control device 313 is facilitated. be able to.

  As a result of the processing in S2006, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed. (S2010), the process proceeds to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 313, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 423, and if the command is used by the display control device 314, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted to the device 314. The demo command and the confirmation command received from the main control device 310 are set as the display demo command and the display confirmation command by the process of S2010, and are transmitted to the display control device 314.

  Next, the variable display processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 421 in the audio lamp control device 313 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this variable display processing (S1912). This fluctuation display process (S1912) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313, and as described above, the fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. In order to do so, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 310, and a variation display process that is a process set to transmit the command to the display control device 314 is executed. In addition, the value of the number-of-holding-balls counter 423a is updated along with the display of the variable effect, and the number-of-holding-balls for display is set and generated to notify the updated number of holding balls to the display control device 314. When it is determined to perform the continuous announcement effect for the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the display variation pattern command, the continuous announcement command is set after the display variation pattern command.

  In the fluctuation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 423 is on (S2101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 310. The process ends and returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the process of S2003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46). The variation pattern type in the generated variation effect is acquired from the RAM 423 (S2103).

  Then, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 314 of the obtained variation pattern type is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 314 (S2104). In the display control device 314, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. The display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, with the setting of the display variation pattern command, the value of the reserved ball number counter 423a is decremented by 1 as the reserved ball is consumed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball is set). (S2105), a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display controller 314 of the reserved ball count indicated by the value of the updated reserved ball count counter 423a is set (S2106). The display control device 314 executes a process of displaying on the third symbol display device 281 a number of holding sphere numbers corresponding to the number of holding spheres indicated by the display holding sphere number command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of held balls by counting the number of held ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is decided to perform the continuous notice presentation by the processing of S2009 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 46) for the variation presentation corresponding to the display variation pattern command set by the processing of S2104. (S2107), if it is determined to perform the continuous announcement effect (S2107: Yes), the continuous announcement command for notifying the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set to the display control device 314 (S2108). , This process ends and returns to the main process. On the other hand, in the process of S2107, when the decision to perform the continuous announcement effect has not been made (S2107: No), the variable display process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the continuous notice command set by the process of S2108 is additionally displayed with respect to the variable effect according to the continuous notice effect mode determined by the process of S2009 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46). The type of continuous notice image (any one of “bubble”, “egg”, “chick”, “chicken” and “chicken group”) is included. When the display control device 314 receives the continuous notice command, the third effect by adding the continuous notice image of the type indicated by the continuous notice effect command to the variation effect performed based on the previously received variation pattern command for display. The processing is executed so as to display the image on the display device 281.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 62. The processing of the MPU 431 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 313, and one frame of the image controller 437. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 431 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 431 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 313 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

  In the main process, when the MPU 431 is activated when the power is turned on, first, an initial setting process accompanying the power is turned on is executed (S2301). Specifically, processing such as initializing the MPU 431 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 433, the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 436 is performed. Further, the work RAM 433 is provided with various flags, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting processing, after the initial setting of the image controller 437, the image controller 437 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 281. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 281. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 281 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the pachinko machine 200 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup has started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 435a of the resident video RAM 435 (S2202). The transfer instruction includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 434 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 435), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 435a is included, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to generate image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 435. It is transferred to the area 435a.

  Then, when the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 437 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 431. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 431 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 437 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is transferred to a register provided inside the image controller 437 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 431 reads out the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 437, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 435a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 435a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 437 by the processing of S2202, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 435b of the resident video RAM 435 (S2203). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 434 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 435). The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 435b which is the transfer destination is included, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 435b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 435b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 435b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 437 by the processing of S2203, then the simple image display flag 433a is set. Is turned on (S2204). As a result, while the simple image display flag 433a is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 60A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 434 to transfer the image is executed (see S3002 in FIG. 60A).

  Further, the simple image display flag 433a indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 434 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49 (b)), the simple command is executed so that the image-on-image (image-on-main image or image-on-variant image) shown in FIG. 29 is drawn. The determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 49B) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 49B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, since the NAND type flash memory 434a is used as the character ROM 434, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 435 is due to the slow reading speed. It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 281, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player or the hall related person, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 281. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 314 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 314. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 at the time of power-on, so that it is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the third symbol display device 281 starts its operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately confirm that the operation efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 434.

  In the display control device 314 of the pachinko machine 200, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display device 281 displays the game, there is a ball (start prize) in the first ball entrance 264, and the main controller 310 issues a voice lamp control to start the variation effect. When it is through the device 313, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 29B and 29C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281, but the character ROM 434 is displayed. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, so that the main image is kept displayed for a long time after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 200, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 435 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2204, the interrupt permission is set (S2205), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2205, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49A is a flow chart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 314, the MPU 431 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 433 (S2301), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 35) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 437, the image controller 437 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 437 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 431. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 437 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 433a is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 433a is not on, that is, If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has been completed, so that it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 281, a command determination process (S2402) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2403) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2402), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 313 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 433b, and the display data table is opposed to the set display data table. The transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 433d. When the continuous notice command is stored, the continuous notice additional data table corresponding to the type of the continuous notice image is set in the additional data table buffer 433c.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 310, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the stop type command, the continuous notice command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the variation effect or the continuous notice effect selected by the main control device 310 or the voice lamp control device 313, and the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 281 is displayed. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54.

  In the display setting process (S2403), in the third symbol display device 281 based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table buffer 433c by the command determination process (S2402) and the like. The content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specifically specified. Further, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect is set in the display data table buffer 433b. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59.

  After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2404). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 that is specified by the display setting process (S2403) or the simple display setting process (S2409). The type of sprite (display object) is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 433a is on, the image controller 437 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 435. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 433b is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 434 for normal use is sent to the image controller 437 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 433d. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a of the video RAM 436 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 313, the image controller 437 is continuously operated. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview production or the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 434 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2404), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405). The drawing list shown in FIG. 35 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 437 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 437 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display device 314 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 433, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear outreach). , Complete disengagement) is compared with the stop type table corresponding to the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the simple image display flag is on (S2401: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has not been completed. , In order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 29 on the third symbol display device 281, a simple command determination process (S2408) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S2409) is executed, and the process of S2404. Move to.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2402), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314, will be described. First, FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 50, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2403) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2503).

  Then, first of all the unprocessed commands, it is determined whether or not there is a display reserved ball count command (S2504), and if there is a display reserved ball count command (S2504: Yes), the reserved ball count command processing is performed. Is executed (S2505), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 51A, details of the reserved ball number command processing (S2505) will be described. FIG. 51A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This reserved ball number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display reserved ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

  In the hold ball number command processing, first, a new hold ball number command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2403) that the display hold ball number command is processed in the ON state is turned on (S2601), and then the display hold ball is held. Information on the number of reserved balls included in the number-of-balls command is acquired (S2602). In the process of S2602, if two or more display reserved ball count commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball count information is acquired from the last stored display reserved ball count command. Thereby, the latest information on the number of reserved balls can be obtained.

  Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls acquired in the process of S2602 is turned on, and the number determination flags corresponding to the other number of reserved balls are turned off. (S2603), the process returns to the command determination process.

  Thereby, in the display setting process, when the new holding sphere number command flag is ON, by referring to the number determination flag, the number of holding spheres for the number of holding spheres corresponding to the number determination flag that is set ON The reserved image data is expanded so that is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the process of S2504 that there is no display reserved ball count command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display commit command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a confirmation command for display (S2506) (S2506: Yes), the confirmation command process is executed (S2507) and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, details of the confirmation command process (S2507) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a flowchart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

  In the confirmation command processing (S2507), the confirmation command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2403) that the display confirmation command has been received in the ON state is set to ON (S2611), this processing is terminated, and the command determination is executed. Return to processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the state of the confirmation command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display of the confirmation display effect is started on the third symbol display device 281 so that the display of the confirmation display effect is started. To execute. Further, when the display setting of the variable effect is processed, if the finalized command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set for the variable effect is passed, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The display setting process is executed so that the display is set.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the process of S2506 that there is no display confirmation command (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display demo command (S2508) (Yes in S2508), the demo command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to S2501.

  Details of the demo command process (S2509) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 51C is a flowchart showing the demo command processing. This demo command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display demo command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

  In the demo command processing (S2509), first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the data table storage area 432a and set in the display data table buffer 433b (S2621). Next, it is necessary to write the None data in the additional data table buffer 433c to clear its contents, and in the demonstration display data table, it is necessary to newly transfer the image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. Since the drawing of the image is regulated so as not to exist, the corresponding transfer data table is not prepared in the data table storage area 432a, so the None data is also written in the transfer data table buffer 433d to clear the contents (S2622). ).

  Next, the time data corresponding to the demo display is set in the clock counter 433g (S2623), and the pointer 433e is initialized to 0 (S2624). Then, the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is displayed in the ON state on the third symbol display device 281 is set to ON, and the final display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the ON state. The fixed display flag shown is set to OFF, and the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being turned on is set to OFF (S2625), the demo command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this demo command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 433e initialized by the process of S2624 is updated, while the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b by the process of S2621 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 433e is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 281 is specified. In the display setting process, the time of the demonstration effect defined by the demo display data table is measured using the time counter 433g in which the time data corresponding to the demo display is set in the process of S2623, and the process of S2625 is performed. Based on the states of the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag set by, when the display setting control timing counter 433g is timed and it is determined that the demonstration effect in the demonstration display data table is finished, the effect to be displayed next As a result, control is performed so that the demonstration effect is displayed again.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the process of S2508 that there is no display demo command (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. (S2510), if there is a display variation pattern command (S2510: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S2511), and the processing returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2511) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

  In the variation pattern command processing (S2509), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 432a. And sets it in the display data table buffer 433b (S2631).

  Here, since the judgment of the start of fluctuations is always made in the main control device 310 for several seconds or more, no more than two fluctuation pattern commands for display are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command judgment processing is executed. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2631, in the case where it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. The table is set in the display data table buffer 433b.

  If the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern having a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 433b, the change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control. When instructed by the device 310, while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 281, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 310. ) Is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern having the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 433b, it is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having the variation time is instructed by the main control device 310, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 433b is finished, the confirmation command from the main control device 310 is issued. Until the display confirmation command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 281 is controlled by the display setting process so that the restart effect is displayed. Therefore, the player changes the restart effect. It is visually recognized as a part of the production, and the change of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 281 is made without a feeling of strangeness until the stop display of the third symbol is confirmed. It is possible to keep watching.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2631 is determined, read from the data table storage area 432a, and set in the transfer data table buffer 433d (S2632). Then, the contents are cleared by writing the None data in the additional data table buffer 433c (S2633).

  After that, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each of the variation display data tables corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the process of S2631 is turned on, and other The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variable display data table of is set to OFF (S2634). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S2634, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b corresponds to. Can be judged. Then, in the display setting process, it is determined whether or not there is a contradiction between the fluctuation pattern of the set fluctuation display data table and the stop pattern set by the display stop type command received later. As will be described later, the display data table corresponding to the special variation is set in the display data table buffer 433b.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b by the process of S2631, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 433g (S2635), The pointer 433e is initialized to 0 (S2636). Then, the confirmation command flag, the demo display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S2637), and further, the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2638), and the variation pattern command is set. Ends and returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 433e initialized by the processing of S2636 is updated, while the display data table for fluctuation set in the display data table buffer 433b by the processing of S2631. From the drawing, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433e is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 281 is specified, and at the same time, it is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433e. The image controller 437 is operated so that the transferred transfer data information is extracted and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436. Control.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 433g in which the time data corresponding to the demo display is set in the process of S2635 is used to measure the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table, and the fluctuation display data is displayed. When it is determined that the fluctuating effect in the table is finished, if the confirmation command (display confirming command) from the main control device 310 is received, the fixed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and predetermined after the fluctuating effect is finished. If the confirmation command (display confirmation command) cannot be received within the time, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Here, if both the confirmation command for display and the variation pattern command for display are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the confirmation command for display is given priority, Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command will not be performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, since the presence / absence of the display commit command is determined first, the commit command process that is the process corresponding to the display commit command is always executed first, while the display command The process corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and like the process of S2637, the confirmation command flag set by the display confirmation command can be turned off by overwriting. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is given priority, Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command will not be performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination processing, since the presence / absence of the display demo command is determined first, the demo command processing, which is the processing corresponding to the display demo command, is always executed first while the display demo command is always executed. Processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 433b by the display demonstration command is overwritten with the display data table for variation as in the processing of S2631. You can Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the process of S2510 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a display stop type command. If there is a display variation type command (S2512) (S2511: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2513), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, details of the stop type command processing (S2513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process is a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

  In the fluctuation type command processing, first, the stop corresponding to the stop type information (either the 15R certainty variation jackpot, the 2R certainty variation jackpot, the time saving jackpot, the front / rear reach, the non-front / rear reach, or the complete disconnection) indicated by the display stop type command. The type table is determined (S2641), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the display device 281 is finally set (S2642).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2643).

  Here, as described above, in the display data table for change, after the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change based on the data table, type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. As, offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2404), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2643, and the specified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 435d of the resident video RAM 435 as described above.

  After the process of S2643, the comparison flag is then turned on (S2644), the stop type command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process. By turning on this comparison flag, in the display setting process, there is no contradiction between the variation pattern of the variation display table set by the above-described variation pattern command setting process and the stop symbol set by the process of S2642. If there is a contradiction, the display data table corresponding to the special fluctuation is set in the display data table buffer 433b as described later.

  It is to be noted that the main controller 310 always makes a determination of the start of the fluctuation at a time of several seconds or more, so that it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2641, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2642.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the jackpot stop symbol will be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 even if the player actually misses the jackpot. In addition, there is a fear that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 200 becomes a big hit and that the reliability of the pachinko machine 200 is deteriorated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set, and in fact, if it is a big hit, the complete disengagement stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Also, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 200 shifts to the big hit state, it is possible to please the player.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the process of S2512 that there is no display stop type command (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a continuous notice command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a continuous announcement command (S2514) (S2514: Yes), the continuous announcement command process is executed (S2515), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the continuous notice command process (S2515) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the continuous notice command processing. This continuous advance notice command process executes a process corresponding to the continuous advance notice command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

  In the consecutive notice command processing, first, a new consecutive notice command flag for notifying the transfer setting processing (S2405) that the consecutive notice command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2651). Next, determine the additional data table for continuous notification corresponding to the continuous notification image type (either "bubble", "egg", "chick", "chicken", or "chicken group") indicated by the continuous notification command. The determined additional data table for continuous notice is read from the data table storage area 432a and set in the additional data table buffer 433c.

  Accordingly, in the display setting process, for the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, the continuous notification corresponding to the continuous notice additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c by the process of S2652. The display content of the image for the next one frame on the third symbol display device 281 is specified so that the notice effect is additionally displayed.

  After that, among the continuous notice image determination flags provided for each continuous notice image type, the continuous notice determination flag corresponding to the continuous notice image type included in the continuous notice command is turned on, and the continuous notice image types corresponding to other continuous notice image types are turned on. The advance notice determination flag is set to OFF (S2652), the continuous advance notice command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the new consecutive notice command flag set in the process of S2651 is turned on, it is determined that the predetermined notice additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 433c by the consecutive notice command process. The determination is made, and the continuous notice type corresponding to the continuous notice additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433c is specified from the continuous notice determination flag set in the process of S2652. Then, the image controller 437 is instructed to transfer the image data necessary to display the specified continuous notice type.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the process of S2514 that there is no continuous notice command (S2514: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a back image change command (S2516). ), If there is a back image change command (S2516: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2517), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 314.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag that notifies the transfer setting process (S2405) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2661). Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each back surface image type (back surface A to C), the back surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and other back surface images The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2662), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2661 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2662. When the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to these back images is resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 437 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the back surface image determination flag set in S2662 indicates that The type of the back image to be displayed at the time point is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type storing the image data corresponding to the range of the back image (resident Video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 222 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than 2 back image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2662, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 200, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 200.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the process of S2516 that there is no back image change command (S2516: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a frame button operation command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a frame button operation command (S2518) (S2518: Yes), the frame button operation command process is executed (S2519), and the process returns to S2501.

  Details of the frame button operation command process (S2519) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing the frame button operation command processing. This frame button operation command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the frame button operation command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

  In the frame button operation command, the frame button operation flag indicating that the frame button has been operated in the ON state is set to ON (S2671), this process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, based on the frame button operation flag set by the process of S2671, the frame button was operated while the super reach selection screen was displayed on the third symbol display device 281 according to the variable display data table. When is detected, a process for updating the type of super reach to be displayed later is executed. This allows the player to select a desired super reach effect.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the process of S2518 that there is no frame button operation command (S2518: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2520). If there is an error command (S2520: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2521) and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2521) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2681). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S2682), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2681, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S2682, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in step S2682 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

  Returning to FIG. 50, when it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2520 (S2520: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2522), and the process returns to S2501.

  In the processing of S2501 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes). ), And the processes of S2502 to S2522 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2501 to S2522 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2501 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2408) executed when the simple image display flag 433a is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 29, that is, the display table confirmation command and the display variation pattern. Only the command and the stop type command for display are extracted, and the process corresponding to each command is the fixed command process (see FIG. 51B), the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 52A), and the stop type. The command process (see FIG. 52 (c)) is executed, and other commands are discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 433b in the processing of S2631. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 435a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 435b of the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, in the process of S2632, the process of writing the None data in the transfer data table buffer 433b and clearing the content thereof is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59, details of the above-described display setting process (S2403) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described. First, FIGS. 55 and 56 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 55, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2701), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2701: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, the processes of S2702 to S2710 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2711. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S2701: YES), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to OFF (S2702), and then S2703 to S2710. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

  In the process of S2703, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball number command flag is on (S2703), and if the new reserved ball number command flag is on (S2703: Yes), it is displayed in the previous command determination process. It is determined that the number of reserved balls command has been processed, and the reserved image setting process is executed (S2704).

  Here, the details of the hold image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the reserved image setting process. This hold image setting process causes the third symbol display device 281 to display the number of holding balls corresponding to the number of holding balls notified from the voice lamp control device 313 in accordance with the fact that the display holding ball number command is processed. This is a process for expanding image data.

  In the reserved image setting process, first, the number discrimination flag is referred to, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number discrimination flag that is set to ON is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 281 (see FIG. 25). The reserved image data to be displayed in () is expanded (S2751). In the task processing, based on this expanded reserved image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the reserved image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the hold image setting process, after the process of S2751, the new hold number command is set to OFF (S2752), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 55, after the reserved image setting process (S3104) or in the process of S2703, if it is determined that the new reserved sphere number command flag is not on, that is, is off (S2703: No), then It is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S2705). If the error occurrence flag is on (S2705: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S2706).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 281, and first refers to the error determination flag to determine all the error determinations that are set to ON. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 281 is expanded (S2761).

  In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S2761, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S2762), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 55, after the warning image setting process (S2706) or in the process of S2705, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2705: No), then the frame button It is determined whether the operation flag is on (S2707). If the frame button operation flag is on (S2707: Yes), the frame button operation process is executed (S2708).

  Here, details of the frame button operation process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing the frame button operation processing. In this process, when the player operates the frame button 222 while the selection screen for selecting the display mode of the super reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the super reach to be displayed is displayed according to the operation. This is a process for selecting a mode.

  In the frame button operation processing, first, after setting the frame button operation flag to OFF (S2771), it is determined whether or not the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (S2772). This super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 according to the display data table for change set in the display data table buffer 433b, and is set in the V interrupt process executed last time. When the image controller 437 is instructed to draw the sprite for the super reach selection screen based on the display data table for use, it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Then, in the process of S2772, if it is determined that the super reach selection screen is not displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (S2772: No), the frame button operation process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S2772, if it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (S2772: Yes), the super reach type flag provided for each display mode of the super reach is set. Among them, in accordance with a predetermined order, only the super-reach type flag corresponding to one display mode is turned on, and the other super-reach type flags are set to be off (S2773), Return to the display setting process.

  In the present embodiment, when defining the display of the super reach of the mode selected by the player in the display data table for variation, the drawing content corresponding to the display mode of each super reach is defined for each address. In the display setting process, when the contents of the display data table are expanded in the process of S2712 described later, only the drawing contents corresponding to the display mode of the super reach in which the super reach type flag is turned on are extracted. As a result, in the task process, the type of sprite (display object) corresponding to the display mode of the selected super reach is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle. Since various parameters are set, the super reach effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the selected display mode.

  Returning to FIG. 55, after the frame button operation process (S2708) or in the process of S2707, when it is determined that the frame button operation flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2707: No), then the comparison is performed. It is determined whether the flag is on (S2709). If the comparison flag is on (S2709: Yes), the comparison process is executed (S2710).

  Here, details of the comparison process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the comparison process. This process is based on the variation pattern command for display, when the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b and the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display conflict, In order to change the production to a special variation production in which the third symbol is variably displayed at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 is received. Processing.

  In the comparison process, first, of the data table discrimination flags, the data table discrimination flag set to the ON state is specified, and the fluctuation stored in the display data table buffer 433b is determined from the specified data table discrimination flag. The type of the display data table for use is specified (S2781). Next, of the stop symbol determination flags, the stop symbol determination flag that is set to the on state is identified, and the set stop symbol is identified from the identified stop symbol determination flag (S2782).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the type of the variable display data table identified by the process of S2781 and the stop symbol identified by the process of S2782 match (S2783). As described above, the fluctuation display data table is prepared for each fluctuation pattern. For each fluctuation pattern, there is a deviation, 15R fixed jackpot / time / short jackpot common use, 15R probability variation jackpot usage, 2R probability variation jackpot usage, ··and so on. Therefore, in the processing of S2783, for example, when the stop design is set to the jackpot design, it is determined that these do not match, even though the display data table for variation corresponds to the variation pattern for deviation. ..

  In the process of S2783, if it is determined that the matches (S2783: Yes), the process proceeds to S2788, the comparison flag is set to OFF (S2788), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S2783: No), first, the display data table for special variation in which the special variation is defined is set in the display data table buffer 433b, and the additional data table buffer 433c and the transfer data table are set. The None data is written in the buffer 433d to clear the contents (S2784).

  Then, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the special stop symbol (for example, the symbols displayed as “3”, “4”, and “1” from the left column) is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to other stop symbols Is set to off (S2785), and time data corresponding to the effect time of the special variation effect is set to the clock counter 433g (S2786). As described above, the special variation effect changes the third symbol at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 is received. Since it is displayed, the effect time is set to a long time (for example, 3 minutes). Therefore, the time counter 433g is set with 3 minutes (180,000 milliseconds) / 20 milliseconds = 9000 as time data corresponding to the effect time of the special variation effect.

  Then, the pointer 433e is initialized to 0 (S2787), the comparison flag is set to OFF (S2788), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  In this way, based on the display variation pattern command, when the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b and the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command are inconsistent, special Since the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 433b, the third symbol display device 281 displays the special variation effect in which the third symbol keeps changing at high speed. Since a special stop symbol is set as the stop time symbol, when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 is received, the special stop symbol is received. Can be confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display 281.

  Here, when the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control apparatus 310 via the voice lamp control apparatus 313 does not match the stop symbol to be displayed when the variation effect is stopped and displayed, the display control apparatus 314 uses the main control apparatus. There is a possibility that it is not possible to properly reflect the result of the lottery performed in 310 to perform the variation effect and the finalized display effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, the special variation effect is performed in such a case, and after the variation display, the special stop symbol indicating the special deviation is definitely displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so the main control device Even if the result of the lottery in 310 is out of order, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 281 from being mistakenly given a jackpot confirmed display effect. In addition, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, if the lottery result in the main control device 310 is a big hit, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 200 shifts to the special gaming state. The player can continue playing the game without anxiety. Further, by making the confirmation display a special stop pattern, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 200 may be in the jackpot state even if the confirmation display is off. Even if the confirmation display is off, the pachinko machine 200 is in a big hit state, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

  Returning to FIG. 55, after the comparison process (S2708) or in the process of S2709, when it is determined that the comparison flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2709: No), the process proceeds to S2711. To do.

  In S2711, pointer update processing is executed (S2711). Details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process is performed by the corresponding drawing content or transfer from the display data table, the additional data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 433b, the additional data table buffer 433c and the transfer data table buffer 433d. This is a process of updating the pointer 433e that specifies the address at which the transfer data information of the target image data should be acquired.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 433e (S2791). That is, in principle, the pointer 433e is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 433e is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 433e, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 433e is updated by the process of S2791, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b, whether the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 433e is End information or not. Is determined (S2792). As a result, if it is End information (S2792: Yes), it means that the pointer 433e has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b past the address at which the actual data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b is the demo display data table or the restart display data table (S2793), and the demo display data table or the restart display data is displayed. If it is a table (S2793: Yes), the pointer is set to 1 (S2794), and the time corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b. The data is set in the clock counter 433g (S2795), and the process proceeds to S2797. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, and therefore the demonstration effect or the restart effect is repeated on the third symbol display device 281. Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2793, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b is neither the demo display data table nor the restart display data table (S2793: No), the pointer 433e The value is subtracted by 1 (S2796), and the process proceeds to S2797. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table and the restart display data table, for example, the variable display data table or the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b, , Since the drawing content of the previous address in which the End information is written is always expanded, the third symbol display device 281 displays the final image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

  As a result of the processing of S2792, if it is determined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b that the data of the address indicated by the pointer 433e updated by the processing of S2791 is not End information, S2793 to S2795. The processing in step S29 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to step S2797.

  In the process of S2797, it is determined whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S2797), and if the confirmation command flag is off instead of on (S2797: No), the pointer update process is terminated and the display setting is performed. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is ON (S2797: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313, and therefore the display data table buffer. The value of the pointer 433e is set to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the End information is stored in the display data buffer set to 433b (S2798), and the value of the clock counter is set to 1. (S2799), the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, when the confirmation command is received, in the display setting process, the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table can be expanded and the start of the confirmed display effect can be controlled.

  Returning to FIG. 55, after the pointer updating process, the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table buffer 433c are changed to the address indicated by the pointer 433e updated by the pointer updating process. The drawing contents are expanded (S2712). In the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing image expanded in the process of S2712 along with the pending image and the warning image previously expanded, and for each sprite. , Various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined. When None data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 433c is cleared with the None data, the None data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 433c.

  Next, the value of the clock counter g is decremented by 1 (S2713), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 433g after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2714). Then, when the value of the clock counter 433g is 1 or more (S2714: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 433g is 0 or less (S2714: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b has elapsed. At this time, if the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 433b, the confirmation command (display confirmation command from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 314 is executed at the end of the effect. ) Is to be transmitted, it is checked in the subsequent process of S2715 whether the confirmation command flag is ON (S2715).

  As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2715: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 314. The display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b, and the None data is written in each of the additional data table buffer 433c and the transfer data table buffer 433d to clear their contents (S2716). Next, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the fixed display is set in the clock counter 433g (S2717), and the value of the pointer 433e is further initialized to 0 (S2718). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF (S2719), then, the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the 0 state is set to ON (S2720), and the content of the stop symbol determination flag is kept as it is in the work RAM 433. Is copied to the previously stopped symbol determination flag provided in (S2721), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, in the case where the display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 433b, etc., in response to the end of the effect, a confirmation command (display confirmation) is issued from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the conventional art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 431 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 314, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2721 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect changes according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start of until a predetermined time elapses, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2404), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S2721, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2715, if the confirmation command flag is OFF instead of ON (S2715: No), the process proceeds to S2721 shown in FIG. 56, and it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is ON (S2722). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S2722: Yes), the determination result (S2714: Yes) in the process of S2714 means that the confirmed display effect has ended, so the confirmed display flag is set to off. After that (S2723), the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b (S2724), and then time data corresponding to the presentation time of the data display is set in the clock counter 433g (S2725). Then, the pointer 433e is initialized to 0 (S2726), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S2727), and the V interrupt processing ends.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the time the fixed display effect ends, automatically, The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  It is to be noted that the branch condition of S2722: Yes is satisfied when the fixed display effect is being performed. In this case, the contents of both the additional data table buffer 433c and the transfer data table buffer 433d are processed by the processing of S2717. It has been cleared. Therefore, in the process of S2724, the clearing process of those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 431 can be reduced.

  In the process of S2722, if the confirmed display flag is not on but on (S2722: No), then it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S2728). If the demo display flag is on (S2728: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process is terminated and V Return to interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2728, when the demo display flag is not on but on (S2728: No), the determination result (S2714: Yes) in the process of S2714 means that the variable effect has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received within a predetermined time after the variation effect is finished, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect is set in the display data table buffer 433b in order to start the restart effect. In response to this, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S2729), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after addition has reached a predetermined value (S2730).

  Then, when the restart timer counter is not the predetermined value (S2730: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. When the restart timer counter has a predetermined value (S2730: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b, and the None data is stored in the additional data table buffer 433c and the transfer data table buffer 433d, respectively. Are written to clear their contents (S2731). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the clock counter 433g (S2732), the value of the pointer 433e is further initialized to 0 (S2732), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, in the display control device, the confirmation command (transmitted from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the end of the variation effect. When the display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Then, as described above, the restart effect is an effect for displaying the image in which the third symbol is vibrated on the third symbol display device 281, so that the player uses the third symbol on the third symbol display device 281. When it is visually recognized that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the fluctuation of is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol is not fixed at that time.

  After the last drawing content defined by the restart display data table is expanded, the drawing content is expanded from the beginning of the restart display data table again by the pointer update processing described above. Therefore, until the display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 313 or a new display variation pattern command is received, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  The simple display setting process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 433a is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) is the same as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 after the production time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image is finished, For a predetermined time, it is specified that one of the power-on fluctuation images (one of FIGS. 29 (b) and 29 (c)) according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed. A process of setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 433i is performed. In addition, when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) to be originally received from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 is not accepted after the production time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image is finished. The process of setting the display data table that defines restarting the variation effect of the variation image at power-on in the display data table buffer 433b is performed.

  Further, in the comparison process, the variation pattern instructed by the display variation pattern command is compared with the stop type instructed by the display stop type, and if they do not match, the symbol is a disengagement symbol (FIG. 29 ( (See c)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2405) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described. First, FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 433a is on (S3001). If the simple image display flag 433a is on (S3001: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has not been transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3002), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 437 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3001, if the simple image display flag 433a is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 434. It has been transferred to the RAM 435. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S2603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 434 is performed to the normal video RAM 436. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3002), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3002).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 437 (S3101), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3101: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 437 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3102). In the process of S3102, when the image controller 437 is instructed to transfer the image data and then a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 437, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the process of S3102 that the transfer process is not completed (S3102: No), the image transfer process is being continuously performed by the image controller, and thus the resident image transfer setting process is completed. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3102: Yes), the process proceeds to S3103. Further, as a result of the processing in S3101, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 437 (S3101: No), the processing proceeds to S3103.

  In the process of S3103, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 have been transferred (S3103), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3103: No), it is not A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 437 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 (S3104), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 437 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 437 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 437 to the resident video RAM 436. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 434 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (resident video RAM 435 in this case), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 435 in which the resident target image data should be stored is included. The image controller 437 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 434, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 431.

  If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the process of S3103 (S3103: Yes), the simple image display flag 433a is set to OFF (S3105), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50B) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 50B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 50 to 54) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 55 to 59) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 281 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 434 is performed to the normal video RAM 436 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) (see S3001: No in FIG. 60A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 431 should be resident in the resident video RAM 435 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Then, the MPU 431 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 435 to be retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 435 by the resident video RAM 435 becomes resident in the resident video RAM 435 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the display control device 314 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 435 while using the image controller. At 437, an image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 composed of the NAND flash memory 434a whose reading speed is slow at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 282.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 435, image data of frequently-displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main controller 310, a voice lamp controller 313, and a display controller 314 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. It is possible to maintain high responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a normal image transfer setting process (S3003) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3003).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 433e updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 433d by the pointer update process (S2711) of the display setting process (S2403) previously executed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3202), and if it is transfer data information (S3202: Yes), the character ROM 434 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 433 ( In step S3203, the transfer start flag indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3204), and the process proceeds to step S3205.

  In the process of S3202, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but None data (S3202: No), the processes of S3203 and S3204 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3205. In the process of S3205, it is determined whether or not an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 437 after the previous transfer process is completed (S3205), and if the transfer instruction is set (S3205: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 437 is completed (S3206).

  In the process of S3206, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 437, and when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 437, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S3206 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3206: No), the image transfer processing is being continued in the image controller 437, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3206: Yes), the process proceeds to S3207. Further, as a result of the process of S3205, even when the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 437 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3205: No), the process proceeds to S3207.

  In the process of S3207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3207). If the transfer start flag is on (S3207: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3208), the image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3203 is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to S3216. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S3207: No), then it is determined whether or not the new continuous notice command flag is on (S3209).

  If the new continuous notice command flag is on (S3209: Yes), it means that the continuous notice command is processed and the continuous notice additional data table for continuous notice effect is set in the additional data table buffer 733c. Therefore, after the new continuous notice command flag is set to OFF (S3210), the image data of the continuous notice image corresponding to the continuous notice determination flag in the ON state among the continuous notice determination flags provided for each type of continuous notice images. The start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 434 in which is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436) are specified (S3211), and the specified various types are specified. After the image data indicated by the information is set as the transfer target image, S3216 The process proceeds to.

  In the process of S3209, if the new continuous notice command flag is not on but on (S3209: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3212). If the back image change flag is on (S3212: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3212), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the determination flags, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 434 that stores the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer The head address of the destination (normal video RAM 436) is specified (S3214), the image data indicated by the various kinds of specified information is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to S3216.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 436. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3214, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is the back image A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S3216, it is determined whether the transfer target image is already stored in the normal video RAM 436 (S3216). The determination in the process of S3216 is performed by referring to the stored image determination flag 433h. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image is read from the stored image determination flag 433h, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is stored in the normal video RAM 436. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 436.

  If the transfer target image is stored in the normal video RAM 436 as a result of the processing in S3216 (S3216: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. The normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is. This can prevent wasteful transfer from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, and can reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 314 and the traffic on the bus line 440. it can.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3216, if the transfer target image is not stored in the normal video RAM 436 (S3216: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image is set (S3217). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 437 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image, and the image controller 437 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list as the basis. In addition, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 437 to the normal video RAM 436. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 434 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 436), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 for storing the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 437 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 434, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 431.

  After the processing of S3217, the stored image discrimination flag 433h is updated (S3218), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the storage image determination flag 433h is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image to “on”, and also in the sub area of the same image storage area 436a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process for the continuous notice command is executed in the previously executed command determination process and corresponds to the continuous notice image indicated by the continuous notice command. When the additional data table is set in the additional data table 433c, the image data of the continuous notice image used in the additional data table can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 435 is included in the image data used for the back image. The image data not stored in the image area 435c can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313, and the display data table Since the corresponding transfer data table is set in the transfer data table 344d, the sprite image data used in the display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 at a desired timing.

  Here, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 436a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 434 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

  Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be finely controlled while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, details of the above-described drawing process (S2406) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2404) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 35 is generated (S3301). That is, in the processing of S3301, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined by the task processing. The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process, the start address and the end address of the character ROM 434 where the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list and the final address. The (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 435 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 431 is According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and those information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 433i are transmitted to the image controller (S3302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 433i is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 433i is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 436b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 436c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 434 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436), the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 434 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 437a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 437a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 436, in consideration of the time when the normal video RAM 436 is in the unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 431 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 437 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 281. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 281 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3302, the drawing target buffer flag 433i is updated (S3303). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 433i is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 431 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 49) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed The first frame buffer 436b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 436b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 436c. ..

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 436b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 436c. . After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 200 of the second embodiment, the display control device 314 is used according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313. A display data table is selected, read from the data table storage area 432a, stored in the display data table buffer 433b, and the pointer 433e is initialized to 0. Then, the pointer 433e is incremented by 1 each time the drawing processing for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, By specifying the content of the image to be drawn, creating a drawing list (see FIG. 35) described later, and sending the drawing list to the image controller 437, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 433e, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, in the display control device 314, the program to be executed by the MPU 431 is not changed in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 433b.

Here, like the conventional pachinko machine, when it is configured to activate the program executed by the MPU 431 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is changed, with the diversification of the effect image. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 314 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 433b. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 314, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

  In addition, a display data table is prepared for each effect in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The reason is that, in the pachinko machine 200, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted momentarily based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and thus It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each of such effects. In this manner, a display data table is prepared for each effect, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. Can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 200 is configured to determine in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, in the display control device 314, an effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (for example, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313 or the like (for example, , Variable effect images) and other effect images (for example, continuous notice effect images) to be displayed, additional data tables corresponding to the additional effect images to be additionally displayed are added to the additional data table buffer 433c. By setting the effect image, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thereby, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, the display data defined by adding another effect image for each original effect image. If a table is prepared separately, a display data table of 32 × 5 = 160 types must be prepared. However, like the pachinko machine 200, a data table corresponding to another effect image is separately defined as an additional data table. Thus, it is sufficient to prepare 32 + 5 = 37 types of displays and additional data tables, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 432a. Therefore, it is possible to store a data table corresponding to various kinds of effects in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 432a, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effect images.

  Further, like the present pachinko machine 200, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 433b, Even when it is determined to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to another effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b. Only by setting in the data table buffer 433c, other effect images to be additionally displayed can be added to the original effect image and easily displayed.

  Since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433c and the additional data table buffer 433c are set. From the table, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer while updating the pointer 433e at each time, and to easily create one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. Can be generated. Therefore, even when the display of other effects is determined by the voice lamp control device 313 or the like in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 310, the effect to be additionally displayed is displayed. By defining the display content with the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a variety of effect displays from a small number of data tables.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 200, all the image data to be made resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435 during the initialization process immediately after the power is turned on. Therefore, after the initialization process is completed, the resident video RAM 435 becomes resident. An image drawing process can be performed by the image controller 437 while using the generated image data. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 composed of the NAND flash memory 434a whose reading speed is slow at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device. In particular, image data of an image that is frequently displayed and image data of an image that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 310, the audio lamp control device 313, the display control device 314, and the like are displayed on the resident video. Since it is made resident in the RAM 435, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness from various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing to displaying any image on the third symbol display device 281.

  In the pachinko machine 200, when a display data table to be used is selected according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313, the pachinko machine 200 is used in the effect specified by the display data table. Of the sprite image data to be transferred, transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 435, and transfer data defining transfer timing thereof. The table is set in the transfer data table 433d, and every time the pointer 433e is updated, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite which is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433e and at which the transfer is to be started is acquired. , That turn It transmits the data information to the image controller 437 by the transfer instruction and drawing list.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a in accordance with the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 436a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 434 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 436. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 281. be able to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 200, since the NAND flash memory 434a is used as the character ROM 434, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 due to its slow reading speed. Although it takes a lot of time to transfer to the resident video RAM 435, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is first transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, and the power-on main image is transferred. By displaying on the third symbol display device 281, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player and hall related persons were displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The main image can be checked when the power is turned on.

  Therefore, the display control device 310 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 281. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 at the time of power-on, so that it is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped. Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third display device 218, and it is confirmed that the pachinko machine 200 has started its operation without any problem by power-on. You can check immediately. Therefore, by using the NAND flash memory 434a having a low read speed for the character ROM 434, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from being deteriorated.

  The "drawing content" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "drawing information" described in the claims, and the "sprite type", "backside type", "symbol type offset" described in the above embodiment "Corresponds to" specific information "described in the claims," drawing list "described in the above embodiments corresponds to" instruction information "described in the claims, and described in the above embodiments The "storage RAM type and address of data of sprite (display object)" of "corresponding to" image instruction information "in the claims, and the" transfer data information "in the above embodiment is It corresponds to the “transfer instruction information” described in the range. Further, the "fluctuation effect", "demo effect", "confirmed display effect", and "restart effect" described in the above embodiment correspond to the "display type" described in the claims, and correspond to the above embodiment. The “variable effect” described corresponds to the “dynamic display effect” described in the claims, and the “continuous notice effect” described in the above embodiment is the “second display type” described in the claims. The “display data table” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “first prescribed information” described in the claims, and the “additional data table” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the It corresponds to the “second regulation information” described in the range, and the “transfer data table” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “third regulation information” described in the claims. Further, the “third symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “identification information” described in the claims, and the “15R certainty variation jackpot”, “2R certainty variation jackpot”, “time saving” described in the above embodiment. The “big hit” corresponds to the “predetermined game value” described in the claims. Further, the “confirmation command” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “first command” described in the claims, and the “fluctuation pattern command” described in the above embodiments is described in the claims. The "stop command" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "third command" in the claims.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  For example, in the above-described first embodiment, the case where the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 187, reads the image data from the character ROM 187, and transfers the image data to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not a thing. For example, the MPU 181 transmits an image data transfer command to the image controller 187, and the image controller 181 receives the transfer command and transfers the image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. You can go. In this case, the image data is stored in the address of the character ROM 187 storing the image data to be transferred, the transfer destination video RAM (resident video RAM 189 or normal video RAM 190), and the transfer destination video RAM. The power address is specified in the transfer command transmitted by the MPU 181, and the image controller 188 reads the image data stored in the address position of the character ROM 187 specified by this transfer command, and the specified transfer destination. The read image data may be stored in the designated address area of the video RAM. Further, in this case, the image controller 188 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 187 in the buffer RAM 188a, and when the image controller 188 does not use the transfer destination video RAM, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a. May be stored in the transfer destination video RAM.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the MPU 431 transmits the transfer data information of the image data to the image controller 437 by including it in the drawing list, and the image controller 431 receives the transfer data information and sends the resident video from the character ROM 434. The case where the image data is transferred to the RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 431 may directly access the character ROM 434, read image data from the character ROM 434, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436. Then, in this case, the MPU 431 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 434 in the buffer ROM 437a, and then the MPU 431 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 of the transfer destination is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer ROM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 of the transfer destination.

  In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 of the transfer destination is unused is that the image controller 437 is accessing the resident video RAM 435 (that is, is in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 437 is accessing the normal video RAM 436 (that is, in use). ) And are provided in the image controller 437, and the MPU 431 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

  Alternatively, the MPU 431 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 437 and the resident video RAM 435, or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 437 and the normal video RAM 436, and from the state of the signal, the resident signal is used. It may be confirmed whether the video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 437 starts or ends access to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436, the image controller 437 notifies the MPU 431 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 431 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 437 scans the third symbol display device 281, whether the scanning is during the blank period (see FIG. 11), the MPU 431 confirms the driving state of the image controller 437, or the image If the scanning state is in the blank period, the video RAMs 435, 436, 536 may be determined to be unused according to the notification from the controller 437. As a result, only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 281 of the image controller 437 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be performed easily.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPUs 181 and 431 do not manage the respective video RAMs using the addresses of the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the normal video RAMs 190 and 436, respectively. In the address system commonly used by the normal video RAMs 190 and 436, different address areas may be assigned to the respective video RAMs to manage the respective video RAMs. By doing so, the MPUs 181 and 431 do not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 189 or 435 or normal video RAM 190 or 436) to be accessed to the image controller 188 or 437, but simply specify the address. By simply designating, the image controllers 188, 437 can judge whether the area designated by the address is for the resident video RAMs 189, 435 or the regular video RAMs 190, 436. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 181, 431 to the image controller 188, 437, simply specify the address set in the common address system. Since it is sufficient, it is possible to simplify the structure of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the second embodiment, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 431 to the image controller 437, as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the storage RAM type is not included and the setting is simply made in the common address system. Since it suffices to specify the storage destination address using the created address, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the character ROMs 187 and 434 are directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) to which the MPU 181 and 431 and the image controller are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The ROMs 187 and 434 may be directly connected to the image controllers 188 and 437. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROMs 187, 434 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROMs 187, 434 are connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or the image controllers 188, 437 via the bridge circuit. It may be provided by connecting to. By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controllers 188 and 437 or the internal bus (bus line 440) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM are used as they are, and the NAND flash memory is used. Character ROMs 187 and 434 configured by 187a and 434a can be connected. Even when the character ROMs 187 and 434 are connected via the image controllers 188 and 437 and the bridge circuit, the MPUs 181 and 431 may directly access the character ROMs 187 and 434.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROMs 187 and 434 are configured by the NAND flash memories 187a and 434a has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage unit, for example, , A hard disk, or the like. Although such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, by configuring the display control devices 81 and 314 as described in each of the above embodiments, it is possible to display an image at a desired time. Can be displayed without.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are connected to the image controllers 188 and 437 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. , 437 may be directly connected to an internal bus (bus line 440). When the character ROMs 187 and 434 are connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or the image controllers 188 and 437 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 may be connected to the bridge circuit. . If the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the existing image controllers 188 and 437 or the internal bus (bus line 440) are not configured to directly connect the resident video RAMs 189 and 435. However, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 can be easily provided in the display control devices 81 and 314.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where one resident video RAM 189, 435 and one normal video RAM 190, 436 are provided in the display control devices 81, 314 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is limited to this. However, more video RAMs may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  Although the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 are configured by 1-port type (1 input / output port) DRAMs in the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, a multiport RAM may be used.

  Further, although cases have been described with the above embodiments where the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 are configured by separate memories, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM is a resident area. It may be divided into a normal area and a normal area, and the same contents as the resident video RAMs 189, 435 and the normal video RAMs 190, 436 may be stored in the respective areas. When the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the I / O port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by the read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

  The types of image data stored in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 in each of the above embodiments are examples, and the types are appropriately set according to the contents of the images displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281. It may be one that is done. In this case, an image corresponding to an image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 immediately in response to a reception command received from the main control device 101 or the voice lamp control device 313 or other input from the outside. Preferably, the data resides in at least resident video RAM 189,435.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which a part of the image data stored in the character ROMs 187, 434 is transferred to the resident video RAMs 189, 435 and made resident, but all the image data stored in the character ROMs 187, 434 are described. May be transferred to the resident video RAMs 189, 435. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROMs 187 and 434 does not exist in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435, the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 use the drawing image data obtained by the drawing by the image controllers 188 and 437. It may be used as a dedicated memory for storing.

  In each of the above embodiments, the resident video RAMs 189, 435 have been described for the case where the contents thereof are retained without being overwritten during power-on, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control unit 101 or the audio lamp is not limited thereto. Based on a command received from the control device 313, image data to be made resident in the resident video RAMs 189, 435 based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the images to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 are greatly different. May be overwritten and updated. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while changing the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAMs 189, 435 when the power is turned on, and is retained in the resident video RAMs 189, 435 without being updated even when the other resident images are updated. You may leave it to continue. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPUs 181 and 431 directly access the character ROMs 187 and 434 to read out image data to be newly resident, and the read image data is read via the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a. The transfer may be performed while the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are not used (that is, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while the transition image is displayed, the MPUs 181 and 431 send a transfer command (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controllers 188 and 437, and the image controllers 188 and 437 In accordance with the transfer command (transfer data information), the image data to be resident is read from the character ROMs 187 and 434, and the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are not in use (that is, the image corresponding to the transition image) via the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a. The data may be transferred during the period when the data is not read.

  When updating the resident video RAMs 189 and 435, the image data corresponding to the transition image is previously transferred from the character ROMs 187 and 434 to the normal video RAMs 190 and 436, and the images stored in the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 are stored. The transition image may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 using the data. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPUs 181 and 431 directly access the character ROMs 187 and 434 to read the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read image data via the buffer RAM 188a. You may do so. Alternatively, the image controllers 188 and 437, which have received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPUs 181 and 431, access the character ROMs 187 and 434 to read the image data to be newly resident, and buffer the read image data. You may make it transfer via RAM188a. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 189 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 189 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a are provided inside the image controllers 188 and 437 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controllers 188 and 437. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 440). When the character ROMs 187 and 434 are connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or the image controllers 188 and 437 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROMs 187 and 434 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (there are many data signal exchanges). Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the bus line 440).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a is set to one block of the NAND flash memories 187a and 434a has been described, but the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be set appropriately. You may. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen included in the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third pattern display device 281, a period during which scanning is performed on a blank region that is a scanning region other than the display region in which the actual image is displayed (blank period In the above, the storage capacity of the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a may be a data capacity such that the transfer of image data from the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 or the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 or the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 is performed during the unused period of each of the video RAMs 189, 190, 435, 436 and 536 which occurs during this blank period. By using, it can be surely performed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where one buffer RAM 188a, 437a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROMs 187 and 434 is stored in one buffer RAM, the images stored in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 or the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 from another buffer RAM are stored. It may be configured to transfer data. The image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROMs 187 and 434 is stored in one area. The image data may be transferred from another area to the resident video RAM 189, 435 or the normal video RAM 190, 436. In any case, the image data read from the character ROMs 187, 434 is written in the buffer RAM, and the image data written in the buffer RAM is written in the resident video RAMs 189, 435 or the normal video RAMs 190, 436. Since the transfer can be processed in parallel with the transfer, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

  In the first embodiment described above, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189 after power-on. Image data corresponding to an image may be transferred from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 190 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 190 is used to display the power-on main image on the auxiliary display section 65 while the character ROM 187 is resident in the resident video RAM 189. Image data to be transferred can be transferred. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 189 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 189. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the second embodiment, after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is turned on, the power-on main image area 435a of the resident video RAM 435 and the power-on variation on the resident video RAM 435 after the power is turned on. Although the case of transferring to the image area 435b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 after the power is turned on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 436 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 281 while displaying the power-on image from the character ROM 434. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 435. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 435 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 435. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189 via the buffer RAM 188a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 189 while the image data corresponding to the main image is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image is resident from the character ROM 187 without passing through the buffer RAM 188a when the power is turned on. The video RAM 189 may be directly transferred to the main image area 189a when the power is turned on. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 190, and the auxiliary display is performed by using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 190. By displaying the main image at the time of power-on in the unit 65, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 189 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189. In this case, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character RAM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 without passing through the buffer RAM 188a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without using the buffer RAM 188a.

  Similarly, in the second embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are transferred from the character ROM 434 via the buffer RAM 437a to the power-on main image area 435a and power-on of the resident video RAM 435. Although the case of transferring to the time-varying image area 435b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 434 while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on time varying image is transferred. , Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on variation image area 435b of the resident video RAM 435 without the buffer RAM 437a. You may. Further, the main image at power-on and the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 after power-on, and stored in the normal video RAM 436. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 435 is transferred. If the image data is not read out from the memory, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 without passing through the buffer RAM 437a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without using the buffer RAM 437a.

  In the first embodiment, the display control device 81 has described the case where the rear image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed based on the content of the command received from the main control device 101, but in addition to this, Alternatively, separately from this, an operation button capable of changing the back image of the auxiliary display portion 65 by the player is provided in the slot machine 10, and when the operation button is operated by the player, the back image is changed. You may. Specifically, when the player operates the operation button, the output signal output from the operation button is input to the input / output port 186 of the display control device 81, and the MPU 181 receives the input from the operation button. When it is confirmed that the operation button has been operated by the player, it is decided to change the back image, and the image data corresponding to the back image to be displayed after the change stored in the back image area 189b of the resident video RAM 189 is determined. The image controller 188 may be instructed to draw an image by using the image. As a result, after the player operates the operation button, the changed rear image is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 using the image data stored in the rear image area 189b of the resident video RAM 189. be able to. Therefore, even when the character ROM 187 is configured by using the NAND flash memory 187a having the read speed, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the rear image after the change in response to the operation of the player immediately. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when the player operates the frame button 222, the voice lamp control device 313 generates a rear image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 314 changes the rear image. The case where the rear face image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and the effect mode of super reach are changed based on the command or the frame button operation command has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 313 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 200 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 310, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 314 can change the rear image and the effect mode of super reach according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 314 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 200 and change the rear face image and the super-reach effect mode according to the game state. If the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the changed presentation mode is resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 435c.

  Further, the display control device 314 may not only change the back image based on the back image changing command, but may change the back image according to the display data table or the transfer data time table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed back image may be transferred in advance from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, a new rear image is displayed in the sub area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 in which the rear images A to C are stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that the sub-images are stored in the transfer data table. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that the back image is stored. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. Therefore, the process of the display control device 314 is performed. It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

  In the first embodiment, when the output signals of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are input to the main control device 101 and the main control device 101 detects a sensor error, an error command is issued. When the display control device 81 causes the display control device 81 to immediately display an error message on the auxiliary display unit 65 using the image data resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM 189. However, the output signals of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are input to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 detects a sensor error. When the display control device 81 is configured to detect the presence or absence and a sensor error is detected You may immediately display the error message to the auxiliary display unit 65 by using the image data that has been resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM189. This eliminates the need to send and receive the error command from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81, and thus the error message can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 earlier.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor 428 is input to the voice lamp control device 313, and when the voice lamp control device 313 detects a vibration error, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 314. As a result, the case where the display control device 314 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 281 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor 428 is sent to the main control device 310. The main control device 310 may be input and a vibration error may be detected, and an error command for notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 310 to either the voice lamp control device 313 or the display control device 314. .. When an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313, the voice lamp control device 313 receives the error command and further transmits an error command to the display control device 314 to notify the error. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor 428 may be input to the display control device 314, and the display control device 314 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when the vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 55) by turning on the error occurrence flag and further turning on the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error. When it is determined that the warning image is set, the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 57B). In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 313 to the display control device 314, so that the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 earlier.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor 428 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor 428, or together with the vibration sensor 428, the magnet sensor of the game board 213 is used. It may be attached to the back side. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by the magnetic field of a magnet or the like and to intentionally enter the entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 310, the audio lamp controller 313, and the display controller 314. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 310, when it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 by the main control device 310 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is generated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 310 to the display control device 314 via the voice lamp control device 313 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 313, when it is determined that the voice lamp control device 313 applies a magnetic field to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 313 to the display control device 314. Then, in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 435 of the display control device 313, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 218 is made resident. The display control device 313 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 218 when receiving an error command that conveys a magnetic field error from the main control device 310 or the voice lamp control device 313. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 310, when it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 by the display control device 314 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 313. May turn on the error occurrence flag and turn on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 218. Thereby, when the display control device 314 receives an error command from the main control device 310 or the voice lamp control device 313 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 314 stores the character ROM 434. Even when configured with the NAND flash memory 434a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 425, the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error without delay is shown in the third pattern. It can be displayed on the display device 281. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 281, so that an illegal action is given to the player. Can be deterred.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the display control device 81 drives the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64 may display the auxiliary display portion 65. It may be configured to be driven by an audio lamp control device provided separately from the display control device 81 to be driven. In this case, the command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received by the voice lamp control device, and the display control device 81 is based on the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device based on the command from the main control device 101. The auxiliary display unit 64 may be controlled. Further, the command transmitted from the main control device 101 may be received by the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 may transmit the command to the audio lamp control device in accordance with the received command. By separately providing the display control device 81 that drives the auxiliary display unit 65 and the audio lamp control device that drives the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64, the display control device 81 can concentrate on drive control of the auxiliary display unit 65. In the auxiliary display section 65, more diverse and complicated image display can be executed, and the interest of the player can be increased.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the configuration in which only one type of BB prize is provided as the winning mode in which the privilege of shifting to the bonus state is provided when the winning is achieved, is described. It may be configured. Further, the total number of paid-out medals in the bonus state may be set to different values according to the state transition winning combination in which the winning is achieved. That is, in the process of S604 of the bonus state process (see FIG. 17), the value set in the remaining payout amount counter may be changed according to the winning state transition winning combination. Further, in the process of S606 of the bonus state process (see FIG. 17), when the state command which means the BB game is set, the type of the state transition winning combination in which the winning is achieved is also set. You may. As a result, in the display control device 81, the effect produced by the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, and the upper lamp 63 can be changed according to the state transition winning combination in which the winning is achieved.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the total number of medals paid out in the bonus state that shifts when the BB winning is established is set to 250 is set (setting of the remaining payout number counter in S604 of FIG. 17). However, the value set as the total number of paid-out medals (the number of remaining paid-outs) may be an arbitrary number within the range specified by law or the like.

  In the first embodiment described above, in the JAC game performed when the gaming state is in the bonus state, the case where the winning probability of the watermelon prize and the bell prize, which are small wins, is set higher than that in the general game state will be described. However, the winning probability of either the watermelon prize or the bell prize may be set higher than that in the normal gaming state. Further, the respective winning probabilities in the bonus state may be determined such that the degree of increase in the winning probability of the watermelon winning with a large number of paid-out medals is larger than that of the bell winning. As a result, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game can be increased, so that the player can receive a large number of medals with a small number of medals. Further, since the medal payout of the total number of medal payouts can be carried out in a short time, the operating rate of the slot machine 10 can be increased even for the hall side. In addition, a bonus-only prize mode that is established only when the gaming state is in the bonus state is provided, and the number of medals paid out is set to be large, and in the bonus state, the winning probability of the bonus-only prize mode is set to be higher than other prize modes. It may be configured to be performed. Further, the winning of the bonus-only winning mode may be performed only when three coins are played. As a result, even if the bonus game can be played with one or two cards, the player can play the bonus game with three cards.

  In the above-described first embodiment, only when the game is played with one or two medals inserted, that is, when the game is played with one or two medals, the special small winning a prize, the cherry bell, is won. The case where the lottery table is set so as to hold is explained, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and when the game is played with three coins inserted, that is, the game is played with three coins. Also in this case, the lottery table may be set so that the winning of the cherry bell is achieved. When the game is played with three coins and the Cherry Bell winning is established, the number of coins to be paid out may be three, or may be any other number. In addition, the winning probability of the cherry bell prize when the game is played with three coins may be set by a lottery table so as to be smaller than other BB prizes, watermelon prizes, bell prizes, and replay prizes. As a result, it is difficult to win the cherry bell prize when three coins are applied, and it is possible to make the player easily recognize that it is a special small winning combination.

  Similarly, in the first embodiment described above, the case where the lottery table is set so that the 7-bell prize, which is the special small prize award, is established only when the game is played with one piece, has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery table may be set so that the 7-bell winning is achieved even when the game is played with two or three cards. When the game is played with two or three coins and the 7-bell prize is established, the number of paid-out medals may be two or any other number. It is more preferable to set the number of medals to be paid out to 3 when the 7-bell winning is achieved in the case of multiplying by 2. This is because the player can play another game by using the three medals, so that the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. . In addition, the winning probability of the 7-bell prize when the game is played with three cards may be set by a lottery table so as to be smaller than other BB prizes, watermelon prizes, bell prizes, and replay prizes. This makes it difficult for the 7-bell prize to be established when three coins are applied, and thus it is possible to make the player easily recognize that it is a special small winning combination. On the other hand, the probability of winning a 7-bell prize when playing a game with two coins is such that the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game is less than two coins, together with other prizes including the Cherry Bell prize. It is preferable that it is set by a lottery table.

  In the first embodiment, when the game is played with one or two coins, and if a normal small win prize such as a watermelon prize or a bell prize is established, three coins are paid out as the medal payout number. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other medal payout numbers may be set. In this case, the number of medals paid out for the watermelon prize and the number of medals paid out for the bell prize may be set to be different. Further, the number of medals to be paid out for the watermelon prize or the bell prize when one or two is multiplied may be set to be larger than the maximum bet number (3 in the first embodiment). This allows the player to play the game while expecting the establishment of a watermelon prize or a bell prize in which many medals are paid out when the game is played with one or two coins. In addition, a multiple of the maximum bet number (3 in the first embodiment) may be set as the number of paid-out medals for watermelon prizes and bell prizes when one or two coins are multiplied. As a result, if a watermelon prize or a bell prize is established, it is only necessary to play a game (a game with three coins) in which the maximum number of bets that can be expected to be paid by the formation of a BB prize is obtained. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Further, the number of medals to be paid out for the watermelon prize or the bell prize at the time of hanging one or two pieces may be set to 12 and 6 as in the case of hanging three. As a result, it is not necessary to change the number of paid-out medals according to the number of bets, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load. Further, the number of paid-out medals for watermelon may be set to different numbers depending on whether it is a one-sheet or two-sheet arrangement. In some cases, the number of medals to be paid out for the bell prize may be set to be different. Further, the number of medals to be paid out for at least one of the watermelon prize and the bell prize may be set to two when one is hung. As a result, the player can enjoy another game while inserting the two medals and expecting the establishment of the Cherry Bell winning combination in which three more medals are paid out. The winning probability of each prize mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to the number of medals inserted is less than 100% in the case of one-player or two-player. desirable. The ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case has been described in which the game is played with one piece or two pieces, and three medals are paid out when the Cherry Bell winning is achieved, but this is not always the case. However, the number of medals to be paid out in this case may be set to a multiple (for example, 6 or 9) of the maximum bet number (3 in the first embodiment). .. Also by this, if the Cherry Bell winning is achieved, the medals can be consumed only by playing a game (a game with three coins) in which the maximum number of bets that can be expected in establishing the BB winning is high. You can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. On the other hand, the number of medals to be paid out may be set to two when the Cherry Bell winning is established when one coin is hung. As a result, the player can enjoy another game while inserting the two medals and expecting the establishment of the Cherry Bell winning, in which three more medals will be paid out, without leaving extra medals. You can enjoy the game until the end. Even in these cases, it is desirable that the winning probability of each winning mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of paid-out medals in one game to the number of inserted medals is less than 100%. The ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

  In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the game is played with one coin and two coins are paid out when the 7-bell prize is established, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the medal payout number in this case may be set to a multiple (for example, 3, 6, 9, etc.) of the maximum bet number (3 in the first embodiment). As a result, if the 7-belt winning is established, the medals are consumed only by playing the game (game with three coins) in which the maximum number of bets that can be expected to be obtained by winning the BB winning is obtained. As a result, the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Also in this case, it is desirable that the winning probability of each winning mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to the number of medals inserted is less than 100%. The ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

  In the first embodiment described above, when the game is played with one coin, the winning or non-winning prizes of the Cherry Bell prize and the 7 Bell prize are drawn as candidates for the winning combination, and three medals are paid out when the Cherry Bell prize is established. It has been explained that the two coins are paid out when the 7-bell prize is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two coins are paid when the cherry-bell prize is won. The medal payout may be performed, and three medal payouts may be performed when the 7-bell winning is achieved. As a result, when the Cherry Bell winning is established, two medals are paid out, so the player inserts the two medals and expects to establish the Cherry Bell winning, in which three medals are paid out. However, you can enjoy another game and enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Also, when the 7-bell prize is established, three medals are paid out, so the player can insert the three medals and play another game while expecting the BB prize to be established. You can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. On the other hand, when the game is played with one piece, it may be configured to determine whether or not only the Cherry Bell prize is won. As a result, in the case where the number of bets is one to three, the 7-bell prize is not included as a winning combination, so that the index value IV = 5 can be omitted from the lottery table and the lottery table is stored. The storage capacity of the table storage area 105a can be reduced, and the processing load of the lottery processing can be reduced. Further, in this case, if the number of medals to be paid out when the cherry bell prize is established is set to 3, the player inserts three medals to be paid out when the cherry bell prize is established, and the player Furthermore, while expecting to win the BB prize, another game can be played, and the game can be enjoyed to the end without leaving extra medals. Further, if the number of medals to be paid out when the Cherry Bell winning is established is set to 2, two medals to be paid out when the Cherry Bell winning is established are inserted, and the player further pays three coins. You can enjoy another game while expecting the success of winning the Cherry Bell prize where medals are paid out, and you can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Even in these cases, it is desirable that the winning probability of each winning mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of paid-out medals in one game to the number of inserted medals is less than 100%. The ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%. For example, in the case where the 7-bell prize is not included as the special child winning combination in one piece and only the Cherry Bell winning is supported and the number of medals paid out in the Cherry Bell winning is set to 3, the winning probability is about 3 The winning probability may be set to about 1 / 2.6, or when the number of medals to be paid out in the cherry bell winning is set to two.

  In the first embodiment, in the lottery table, any one of BB prize, watermelon prize, bell prize, cherry bell prize, 7 bell prize and replay prize is assigned as the prize form corresponding to the index value IV, and the prize form is assigned. In the lottery, the case where any one of these winning modes is set as a winning combination has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of these winning modes may be set for one index value IV. When the winning mode is assigned and the winning is confirmed at the one index value IV, a plurality of winning modes assigned to the one index value IV may be simultaneously set as a winning combination. For example, a BB prize and a bell prize may be simultaneously set as a winning combination by assigning a BB prize and a bell prize to one index value IV, or a watermelon prize and a replay prize may be assigned to one index value IV. By assigning, the watermelon winning combination and the replay winning combination may be simultaneously set as the winning combination. Here, when a BB prize that is carried over to the next game when the winning is not established and another winning mode (for example, a bell winning) that is not carried over to the next game are simultaneously set as a winning combination, the next game is played. The sliding table corresponding to another winning mode (bell winning) that cannot be carried over may be preferentially stored in the sliding table storage area 106b. As a result, it is possible to establish the winning establishment in the other winning modes, and carry over the BB winning to the next game to establish the winning establishment. In addition, if a watermelon prize and a replay prize are set as a winning combination at the same time, a sliding table is provided that specifies that either the watermelon prize or the replay prize will stop on the activated line. You may make it store in the storage area 106b. As the sliding table, the stop symbol corresponding to the watermelon prize, which is more advantageous to the player than the replay prize, can be stopped from the arrival symbol that has reached the base position when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. In the case, the stop mode is defined so as to stop at the stop symbol corresponding to the watermelon prize, and if the stop symbol corresponding to the watermelon prize cannot be stopped, stop so as to stop at the stop symbol corresponding to the replay prize. It is preferable to use the one whose mode is defined. As a result, while the watermelon prize that is more advantageous to the player than the replay prize is established as much as possible, the replay prize can be established when the watermelon prize cannot be established. Then, in this case, the player can be replayed without inserting medals.

  In the above-described first embodiment, when the game is played with one coin, the 7-bell prize is achieved, and two medals are paid out, the gaming state of the slot machine 10 remains the general gaming state. The game state of the slot machine 10 may be shifted to the special game state at the time of playing two cards when a game is played with one game and a 7-bell prize is established and two medals are paid out. Then, when the special game state when playing with two cards is entered, the lottery table is configured so that the winning probability of the cherry bell winning mode when playing with two cards is set to be higher than that in the general gaming state. Good. As a result, if two medals are paid out due to the establishment of a 7-bell prize when one coin is hung, the player inserts the two medals and pays out three medals. You can enjoy another game with a sense of expectation.

  In the first embodiment, when in the general game state, the prescribed number of bets for medals is set to 1 to 3 and the number of medals can be multiplied by 1 or 2 or 3 Although the case where the game is configured to start has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the specified number of bets on medals is set to 1 or 3 and 1 or 3 is multiplied. The game may be started in response to only the above. As a result, when two medals remain in the player's hand, the player expects that three medals will be paid out due to the establishment of the Cherry Bell prize, while letting the medals remaining one by one be inserted. You can entertain the game at least twice in total.

  In addition to the normal game state, the specified number of bets for medals is set to 1 to 3 even in the bonus state, and it can be used for one, two, or three Then, the game may be started. Alternatively, even in the bonus state, the prescribed number of bets on medals may be set to one and three, and the game may be started in response to one and three stakes. .. If the game is played with one or two cards in a bonus state, the lottery table is configured so that the winning probability of the Cherry Bell prize and the 7-bell prize is set low or the winning probability is set to zero. Good. In addition, the lottery table may be configured such that the winning probability of the watermelon winning or the bell winning in the one-piece and two-piece hangings is higher than the winning probability in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of medals to be paid out for the watermelon prize or the bell prize in the one-piece and two-piece arrangements may be set to be larger than the number of medals to be paid out (3 pieces) in the normal gaming state. However, the probability of winning in each winning mode and the number of medals paid out are set so that the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game in the one-player and two-player games in the bonus state is smaller than the expected value in the three-player game. May be set. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the bonus game by multiplying by three as much as possible. In addition, the winning probability and the number of paid-out medals corresponding to each winning mode when the game is played with one and two in the bonus state may be set to be the same as in the normal gaming state. In this case, the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game to the number of bets is less than 100% for both 1 and 2 coins, so if the game is repeated by 1 or 2 coins, the number of medals However, it will decrease. Therefore, the player can be made to play the bonus game by multiplying three cards.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case has been described in which the game is not limited to the remaining number of medals at the player's hand, and can be played by one and two medals in the general game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only when the number of virtual medals stored and stored by the credit function is less than three, the winning mode and the winning probability of the first embodiment by one and two Alternatively, the game may be played with the number of paid-out medals. For example, in the process of S205 of the normal process (see FIG. 13), when it is determined whether or not the bet number is the specified number, the value of the credit counter that counts the number of virtual medals is checked, and the value is 3 If the above value is set, the specified number of bets is set to 3 so that the game can be played only by multiplying three cards. If the value of the credit counter is less than 3, the specified number of bets is set to 1 and By setting the number of coins to two, the player may be allowed to play the game with the prize mode, the probability of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out in the first embodiment by multiplying by one or two. As a result, when there are three or more virtual medals, the game can always be played with only three medals, so that the medals are consumed quickly and the operating rate of the slot machine in the hole can be reliably increased. .. On the other hand, when the number of virtual medals is less than 3, one or two medals are used to win a cherry bell prize in which three medals are paid out or a seven bell prize in which two medals are paid out. Since it is possible to aim the player to play the game, the slot machine 10 can give the player the motivation to use up the medals without excess.

  In the first embodiment, not only the remaining number of medals at the player's hand, but in the normal game state, the winning mode, the winning probability, and the number of medals paid out in the game executed by one and two medals are fixed. Although the case where it is configured to be as described above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the processing of S206 of the normal processing (FIG. 13), when it is determined that there is a start command, the value of the credit counter immediately before the start command (that is, the number of virtual medals) is temporarily stored in the RAM 106. Every time, in the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), when setting the one-drawing lottery table (see S406) or the two-winning lottery table (see S405), or in the reel control process (see FIG. 16), the payout determination When the processing (see S513) is performed and the number of temporarily stored virtual medals immediately before the start command is three or more, payout of medals per game by one or two The winning mode and the winning mode are set so that the expected value of the number becomes smaller than the expected value obtained by the winning mode, the winning probability and the medal payout number shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. The rate and medal payout number may also be set. In this case, the expected value may be reduced by setting the winning probability of the Cherry Bell winning or the 7 Bell winning when the game is played with one or two coins. As a result, when there are three or more virtual medals, it is possible to play the game under three-card play under a much more advantageous condition than when playing the game with one-card stack or two-card stack, The player starts playing the game with three pieces, and the medals are consumed quickly. Therefore, it is possible to reliably increase the operating rate of the slot machine in the hall. On the other hand, when the number of temporarily stored virtual medals immediately before the start command is less than three, the winning mode shown in FIGS. The winning probability and the number of paid-out medals may be set. As a result, when the number of virtual medals is less than 3, one or two medals are used, and a cherry bell prize is given in which three medals are paid out or a seven bell prize is paid in which two medals are paid out. Since it is possible to cause the player to play the game with the aim of, the slot machine 10 can give the player the motivation to use up the medals without excess.

  Further, in addition to the above two modified examples, or in addition to the above two modified examples, when the number of virtual medals stored and stored by the credit function is two, the above-mentioned FIG. The game may not be played with the winning mode, the winning probability, and the number of medals paid out as shown in FIG. In this case, the game may not be played at all by one-player game, and the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game in one-game game is the winning mode shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. The winning mode, the winning probability, and the number of medals paid out may be set so as to be smaller than the expected value obtained by the winning probability and the number of medals paid out. In the former case, in the process of S205 of the normal process (see FIG. 13), when it is determined whether or not the bet number is the specified number, the value of the credit counter that counts the number of virtual medals is confirmed, and the value is checked. If 2 is 2, the prescribed number of bets may be set to 2 so that the game cannot be played with one bet. In the latter case, when it is determined that there is a start command in the process of S206 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the value of the credit counter immediately before the start command (that is, the number of virtual medals) is temporarily stored in the RAM 106. In the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), the one-piece-placing lottery table (see S406) is set, and the payout determination process (see S513) is performed in the reel control process (see FIG. 16). In this case, if the number of temporarily stored virtual medals immediately before the start command is two, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game per one coin is as shown in FIG. The prize mode, the winning probability, and the number of medals paid out are set so as to be smaller than the expected value obtained by the winning mode, the probability of winning, and the number of medals paid out. It may be. As a result, when only two virtual medals remain, the player can play the game with two coins. Therefore, it is possible to settle whether or not three medals are paid out in one game.

  In the above-described first embodiment, even if the game is played with one or two cards when the BB winning flag is carried over, the winning mode and winning of the game performed by the one and two games The case where the probability is configured to be the same as when the BB winning flag is not carried over has been described, but the probability is not limited to this. For example, in the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), when setting the one-drawing lottery table (see S406) or the two-drawing lottery table (see S405), carry over from the previous game to the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning BB winning flag is set, the lottery table may be set so as to increase the probability of being missed. As a result, if the result of the lottery is missed, only the carried-over BB winning prize flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. Therefore, the sliding table setting executed in S310 of the lottery process (see FIG. 14). In the processing, the slip table corresponding to the BB winning can be stored. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the BB prize.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the information about the bet number is included in the start command and transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is different from the start command. Information regarding the bet number may be transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 by a command. For example, the information regarding the bet number may be transmitted by a dedicated command (hereinafter, referred to as a “bet number notification command”) or may be included in the lottery result command and transmitted. When the bet number notification command is prepared, the command received from the main control device 101 is stored in the received command storage area 185a in the main process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, and the command is the bet number notification command. If the command is a command, the bet number notification command process is executed, the bet number notification command process extracts information about the bet number included in the bet number notification command, and the extracted information about the bet number is stored in the bet number storage area. You may make it store in 185b. When the lottery result command includes information on the bet number, the bet number information is extracted from the lottery result command and stored in the bet number before the processing of S901 in the lottery result command process (see FIG. 20). It may be stored in the area 185b. When the information about the bet number is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 by a command other than the start command and the lottery result command, the timing of the transmission of the command is the lottery result command after the start command is transmitted. Prior to the transmission of. As a result, in the display control device 81, based on the number of bets placed on the game started by the operation of the start lever 41 and the result of the lottery performed on the game, the auxiliary effect production section (upper lamp 63, It is possible to determine the mode of various effects produced by the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65), and the player can play the game with various expectations depending on the effects of the auxiliary effect unit.

  In the first embodiment, in the lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command when the bet number is 1 or 2 is the BB winning mode. In the case of a plurality of winning combinations including the winning combination, the auxiliary performance unit (the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65) is configured to preferentially start the BB winning notification performance that notifies that the BB winning mode is the winning combination. ) Has been described (see S903 and S904 in FIG. 20), but if the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is the BB winning mode and the watermelon winning mode, the BB winning mode and the watermelon Start the "BB prize / watermelon prize notification performance" in the auxiliary performance unit to notify that two winning modes have been set as a winning combination. Control may be. Further, when the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is the BB winning manner and the bell winning manner, the BB winning manner and the bell winning manner are set as the winning combination. The BB winning / bell winning notification effect "may be controlled to start in the auxiliary effecting unit. As a result, when the "BB prize / watermelon prize notification effect" or the "BB prize / bell prize notification effect" is executed in the auxiliary effector, the player simultaneously performs the BB prize mode and the watermelon prize mode or bell prize mode. It can be understood that the winning combination has been set. Therefore, with respect to the game in which the notification effect is performed, it is possible to instruct the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 to establish the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode, and the BB winning mode in the subsequent games. It is possible to allow the player to continue the game with a sense of expectation that the above will be established.

  In the first embodiment, in the lottery result command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command when the bet number is 1 or 2 is the BB winning mode. If so, the case has been described in which the BB winning announcement is performed to notify that the BB winning mode is the winning combination. However, as a candidate for the winning combination when the bet number is one or two, the special game state is set. In the case where a plurality of types of state transition winning combinations that give the transition privilege are provided, in the lottery result command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command has a predetermined state. If it is determined that the transition winning combination is included, the notification effect that notifies that the predetermined state transition winning combination is a winning combination is an auxiliary production. (Top lamp 63, a speaker 64, an auxiliary display unit 65) may be controlled so as to be executed. It should be noted that the predetermined state transition winning combination for which the notification effect is performed may be a part of the plurality of types of state transition winning combinations, or all winning combinations.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in the lottery result command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command when the bet number is 1 or 2 is the watermelon winning combination. In the case of the mode or the bell winning mode, the case has been described in which the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode is the winning combination, or the bell winning notification mode is performed, but the bet number is 1 or 2 When there are other winning combinations that may be missed depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the player as candidates for the winning combination when the number is one, the MPU 181 of the display control device 81. In the lottery result command processing executed by, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command If it is determined that the winning combination is a winning combination, the auxiliary production section (the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65) is caused to execute the notification production for notifying that the winning combination is the winning combination. You may control. If there are multiple winning combinations that may be missed, the announcement effect may be executed only when some of the winning combinations become winning combinations. On the other hand, when the winning combination is achieved, the notification effect may be executed.

  The stop symbol of each winning pattern in the first embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the stop symbol. However, it is desirable that the symbols that are not missed are set as the stop symbols for the cherry bell prize and the 7 bell prize.

  The probability of winning each prize form in the first embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the above-mentioned winning probability. Further, the number of medals paid out for the watermelon prize and the bell prize in the first embodiment is an example, and the number of medals paid out is not limited to the above. However, it is desirable that the probability of winning the Cherry Bell prize or the 7-bell prize is higher than that of the other prize modes in the one-piece or two-piece arrangement. In addition, the winning probability and the number of medals paid out for each winning mode are set so that the ratio of the expected number of medals paid out to the number of bets is less than 100% and close to 100% in the case of one-shot or two-shot. It is desirable to do.

  In the first embodiment, the slot machine having three reels arranged in parallel and having five lines as effective lines has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, five reels are arranged in parallel. It may be a slot machine or a slot machine having three effective lines. Further, the activated line may be changed according to the bet number. For example, when the bet number is 3, the effective line is set to 5 lines, when the bet number is 2, the effective line is set to 3 lines, and when the bet number is 1, the effective line is set. May be set to one line. When the number of effective lines is set to three, for example, the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the lower line L3 shown in FIG. 6 may be set, or the middle line L2, the lower right line L4, and the like. The upper right line L5 may be set.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the maximum bet number is 3 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the maximum bet number may be set to an arbitrary value of 2 or more. For example, the maximum bet number may be four. In this case, if the game is played with a bet number less than the maximum bet number, the winning probability of each prize mode is set so that the prize mode in which the maximum bet number (or a multiple thereof) is paid out is highly probable. Good. Also, if the maximum bet number is 4, if the game is played with one bet, for example, the winning mode in which two medals are paid out is highly likely to be won If the probability is set and the game is played with two coins, for example, the winning probability of each prize mode in the two coins is set so that the winning mode in which three medals are paid out is highly probable. When the game is played by being multiplied, for example, the winning probability of each prize mode in the case of 3 coins may be set so that the prize mode in which four medals are paid out is won with a high probability. As described above, when the bet number is small, the ratio of the expected value of the medal payout number to the bet number becomes less than 100% by setting the medal payout number of the winning mode with a high probability of winning to be small. Even when the winning probability is set, the winning probability of the winning mode can be increased. It is desirable to set the winning probability and the number of medals to be paid for each winning mode so that the ratio of the expected number of medals to the number of bets is less than 100% and close to 100%.

  In the second embodiment, as the additional data table, the case where the drawing content for additionally displaying the continuous notice effect that is not normally displayed in the variable effect on the third symbol display device 281 has been described, but it is not always necessary. The additional data table is not limited to this, and various additional data tables should be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in addition to the one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 310. The drawing contents for drawing the effect may be defined. Further, in the additional data table, drawing contents necessary for additionally displaying an image that is not normally displayed with respect to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on a command from main controller 310. Instead of, or in addition to specifying such drawing contents, the drawing contents necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in the one effect, and the display in the one effect. The drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the displayed image may be preset.

  When the drawing content necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect is defined by the additional data table, an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the additional data table. Corresponding to an address that represents time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed and color information that specifies the changed color tone of the sprite at that time. It may be prescribed. Then, in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433c, the MPU 431 stores, at the address indicated by the pointer 433e, the type of the sprite that changes the color tone and the color information that specifies the changed color tone of the sprite. If specified, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433e is replaced with the color information specified by the additional data table. Then, a drawing list may be created. As a result, the image controller 437 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  Further, when the drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the additional data table, in the additional data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 281 is displayed. Is associated with an address represented by 1 unit of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) displayed, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433c, the MPU 431, at the address indicated by the pointer 433e, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite to be newly displayed. Of the various drawing information is specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b instead of the sprite to be replaced among the various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433e. The sprite type to be displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Accordingly, the image controller 437 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the transfer data table is prepared corresponding to each display data table has been described. In addition to that, an additional transfer data table which is a transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table is provided. You may prepare. In this additional transfer data table, the sprite that is used in the corresponding additional data table in correspondence with the address specified in the additional data table (or the display data table) and at which the transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address. Transfer data information of image data may be described.

  Further, in this case, when the additional transfer data table buffer is provided in the work RAM 433 of the display control device 281, and one additional data table is set in the additional data table 433c, it is different from the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table. The additional transfer data table corresponding to the one additional data table may be set in the additional transfer data table buffer. Then, if the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the additional transfer data table set in the additional transfer data table buffer, the MPU 431 adds the transfer data information to the drawing list. You may do it. Thereby, the image controller 437 can transfer the image data of the sprite used by the additional data table to the normal video RAM 436 in advance according to the drawing list before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, the effect defined by the additional data table can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, by using the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 436 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional data table. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional data table. Therefore, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed, various types of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  In the second embodiment, in the display control device 314, in addition to the display data table that defines the drawing content of the base effect (for example, variable effect), additionally displayed effects (for example, continuous notice effect). The case where the additional data tables defining the drawing contents of the above are set and the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 433e are acquired from the respective data tables has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is a base effect. When the display of the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) additionally displayed with respect to (for example, the variable effect) is determined, the effect is added to the display data table corresponding to the effect as the base. A new display data table is created by adding the drawing content of the additional data table corresponding to the displayed effect to each address that indicates the display time. It generates Le, on the basis of the new display data tables, may be acquired drawing content of the image. This makes it possible to easily display an effect that is additionally displayed with respect to the base effect. In addition, for each type of base effect, the display data table that defines the drawing content of only the base effect, and the display data that specifies the image content in which the effect displayed in addition to the base effect is superimposed. Since it is not necessary to have a table and the like, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of data tables. Further, since the drawing content can be specified only by using the newly created display data table, the process required for specifying the drawing content can be specified as compared with the case where the drawing content is specified from the two of the display data table and the additional data table. The load of can be reduced.

  In addition, when the non-display of the effect to be additionally displayed with respect to the base effect is determined, the display data table corresponding to the base effect is used as it is to acquire the drawing content of the image. You may.

  In addition, in the display data table, the drawing content of the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) additionally displayed is displayed together with the drawing content of the base effect (for example, variable effect). If you want to display the effect that is additionally displayed, it is added and displayed together with the drawing content of the base effect. If the drawing content of the effect is specified from the display data table, and if the additionally displayed effect is hidden, the drawing content of the additionally displayed effect is discarded and the base effect is created. It is also possible to specify only the drawing contents of the above from the display data table. This eliminates the need for an additional data table that defines the rendering content of the additionally displayed effect, and thus eliminates the need for control over the additional data table and reduces the processing load.

  In the second embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, Although we explained the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the player, it is not necessarily limited to this, it can be considered as an effect to display each super reach and display it in each super reach. A corresponding additional data table may be prepared and an additional data table corresponding to the super reach selected by the player may be set in the additional data table buffer 433c. Further, the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach may be added to the display data table. This makes it possible to easily specify the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to prevent the data size of the display data table from increasing.

  In the second embodiment, in the display control device 314, a transfer data table that defines transfer data information of image data corresponding to a sprite used in the display data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table, and a predetermined transfer data table is prepared. The case where the transfer data table corresponding to the predetermined display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 433d along with the setting of the display data table in the display data table buffer 433b has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, when setting a predetermined display data table in the display data table buffer 433b, transfer data information defined by the corresponding transfer data table is added to the display data table for each address indicating the display time. Then, the new display date To generate a table, on the basis of the new display data tables, may be acquired drawing content of the image and the transfer data information at the same time. This makes it possible to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information by using the display data table. Therefore, as compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information from the display data table and the transfer data table, respectively. The processing load required for identification can be reduced.

  In addition, when the above-described additional transfer data table, which is a transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table, is prepared, when the predetermined additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 433c, the additional data table is added to the additional data table. On the other hand, the transfer data information specified by the corresponding additional transfer data table is added for each address indicating the display time to generate a new additional data table, and based on the new additional data table, the image is displayed. The drawing content and the transfer data information may be acquired at the same time. With this, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Therefore, from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, Compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are respectively specified, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  Further, when the display of the effect (for example, the continuous notice effect) additionally displayed to the effect as the base (for example, continuous notice effect) is determined, the display data table corresponding to the effect as the base is determined. On the other hand, the drawing content of the additional data table corresponding to the additionally displayed effect is added for each address indicating the display time, a new display data table is generated, and based on the new display data table. When acquiring the drawing content of an image, the transfer data information defined by the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is added to the display data table for each address indicating the display time. Add the transfer data information specified by the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table for each address indicating the display time. Te, may generate a new display data table. Thus, the display data table can be used to specify the drawing content of the effect to be the base, the drawing content of the effect to be added, and the transfer data information of the image necessary for these drawing operations. It is possible to reduce the processing load required for specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information from the table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the additional transfer data table, respectively.

  Further, the transfer data information may be described in advance in the display data table. Also by this, since it is possible to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information using the display data table, as compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information from the display data table and the transfer data table, The processing load required for the identification can be reduced. In addition, in the display data table, the drawing content of the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) additionally displayed together with the drawing content of the base effect (for example, variable effect) is additionally displayed. When describing in a format that clearly indicates the drawing content of the effect, it is used in the drawing of the additionally displayed effect in the display data table as well as the transfer data information used in the base effect. The transfer data information of the image is described in a format that clearly indicates the transfer data information of the effect to be additionally displayed, and when the effect to be additionally displayed is displayed, it is used as the base. The drawing content and transfer data information of the effect that is to be created and the drawing content and transfer data information of the effect that is additionally displayed are specified from the display data table and added. When the displayed effect is hidden, the drawing content and transfer data information of the additionally displayed effect are discarded, and only the drawing content and transfer data information of the base effect are deleted from the display data table. May be specified. Accordingly, the display data table can be used to specify the drawing content and transfer data information of the base effect, and the drawing content and transfer data information of the effect to be added. Therefore, the display data table and the transfer data table can be specified. As compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are respectively specified from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the display control device 314 has described the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation effect is For example, a display data table is prepared for each element such as "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "advance notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is used. After specifying the elements required for the fluctuation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the specified fluctuation effect are combined into one, and the final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is created. It may be generated. In many cases, "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "normal reach", etc. are commonly displayed for each variation pattern. Therefore, by making the variation effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element in this way, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In the second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the common pointer 433e is used in the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 433e. A pointer may be prepared for each data table.

  In the second embodiment, in the case where the image controller 437 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 431 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of the image for one frame in which the drawing process is finished. However, the image controller 437 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 431 every time the third symbol display device 281 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 281 is driven so that an image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). Therefore, a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By sending, the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

  In the second embodiment, the image controller 437 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 431, and the other frame buffer is expanded first. The case where the image information is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 281 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image controller 437 should expand the drawn image each time the drawing list is received. The frame buffers may be selected alternately, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 281. Further, every time the image controller 437 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 281, the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed and the image information is output to the third symbol display device 281. The frame buffer to be used may be replaced.

  In the second embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 433b and before the confirmed display effect is finished, the main control device is executed via the voice lamp control device 313. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demo command (display demo command) is received from 310, the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 433b. Although the case has been described, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set again in the display data table buffer 433b. Further, in this case, the fixed display effect ends until both the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) and the demo command (display demo command) are received from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313. Each time, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 433b. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 310, it is possible to continue to display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 281.

  In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the background image and stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image which is completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the second embodiment, in the display control means 314, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a of the resident video RAM 435. Transfer to the power-on fluctuation image area 435b, and after the transfer is completed, display the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 281 and transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the display control means 314, after the power is turned on, first, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a of the resident video RAM 435, and after the transfer is completed, the power is turned on. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 281, image data to be resident including image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. As a result, the main image at power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 sooner after power-on, so that the pachinko machine 200 can be used in the operation check at the player, the hall personnel, or the factory during manufacturing. You can immediately check that the operation has started without any problems when the power is turned on.

  Further, in this case, the MPU 431 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 435b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 313 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 435b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, it is possible to display a simple variable display on the third symbol display device 281 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 435b. It should be noted that the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 435b is preferably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the variable display by the power-on variation image.

  In the second embodiment, the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content), The case where the information of the image data to be transferred at that time (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 281. For example, the frame rate of the third symbol display device 281 is 30 fps, that is, if the third symbol display device 281 is to display an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 281 is 1/30. Since one frame image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents at intervals of 1/30 second.

  Further, in the display data table or the additional data table, as the sprite type to be drawn defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not designated, but the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. The address of the character ROM 434 may be defined. In the display control device 314, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is read from the character ROM 434, the character ROM 434 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 434 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 434, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the work RAM 433 of the display control device 314 is provided with the stored image discrimination flag 433h, and it is stored for each sprite whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 436a may be stored in the work RAM 433. In this case, the MPU 431 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 436a stored in the work RAM 433 when instructing the transfer of the image data of the predetermined sprite type, and refers to the predetermined image data. May be already stored in the image storage area 436a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the MPU 431 sets a transfer instruction of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 431 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 433 and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 436a may be deleted.

  In the second embodiment, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 437 based on the stored image determination flag 433h. It has been described that the MPU 431 determines whether or not the normal video RAM 436 stores the image data of the predetermined sprite type, and the MPU 431 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The image controller 437 may perform this processing. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image determination flag 433h is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 437 to store whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 436 for each sprite. You may let me. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 437 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436. In this case, if the MPU 431 needs to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, the MPU 431 stores the image data in the normal video RAM 436 regardless of the storage state of the image data. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the second embodiment described above, among the plurality of rear images, only the image data corresponding to “rear A” is made resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be made resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. In particular, by making the back image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the transfer process of the image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times that the

  In the second embodiment, the transfer data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 433e, and the MPU 431 instructs the transfer command at the predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 437 is controlled so as to transfer the generated image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The information about the necessary sprite type is described, and the MPU 431 controls the image controller 437 to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 based on the information described at the head of the display data table. It may be your. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 313, the MPU 431 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally output from the character ROM 434. The image controller 437 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 436 for use.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the back surface C that is the back image of the “island stage” changes with time has been described, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time. May be. Further, as the back image, not only those that scroll or change in color tone over time, but instead of such a back image, an object that appears over time (for example, a person) It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed in the third symbol display device 281 in which the variable effect is performed has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the pachinko machine 200 has the third symbol display device. By providing a fourth symbol display device different from 281 and displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 281, a continuous notice effect is executed. You may. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 314 or the voice lamp control device 313. In addition, the continuous notice effect may be executed by providing the pachinko machine 200 with an accessory that operates according to various effects and operating the accessory in a predetermined mode together with the variable effect. In addition, the sound lamp control device 313 may control the sound output device 426 of the pachinko machine 200 to output a sound for the continuous notice effect to execute the continuous notice effect, or the decoration portion of the pachinko machine 200. The continuous announcement effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 229 to 233 together with the variable effect.

  As a result, every time the variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 281 (and the first symbol display device 237), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined mode. In addition, by outputting a sound from the sound output device 426, or by lighting or blinking the illumination portions 229 to 233, it is possible to give the player the expectation of a big hit. Further, the player usually keeps watching the third symbol display device 281 in which the variable effect is performed and continues the game, but the display of the symbol by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 281. The continuous notice effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 426, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination portions 229 to 233. Therefore, an effect different from the usual one is performed on the player. It can be easily recognized. Further, the continuous notice effect can be easily continued by a simple control such as the display of the symbol by the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 426, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination portions 229 to 233. A notice production can be performed.

  Further, if the continuous announcement effect is performed by voice output from the audio output device 426 or lighting or blinking of the illumination portions 229 to 233, the continuous announcement effect is controlled by the audio lamp control device 313. In the pachinko machine 200, the pachinko machine 200 is continuously operated by causing the main control device 310 to perform the win / no determination process and the lottery process at the start of the variation, to cause the audio lamp control device 313 to perform the continuous announcement effect, and to cause the display control device 314 to perform the variation effect. When the notice production is performed, each control device can share each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed low.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect on the third symbol display device 281, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the voice from the voice output device 426. At least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination portions 229 to 233 may be combined, and the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by controlling them in conjunction with each other. As a result, it is possible to execute more various continuous announcement effects. In addition, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 281, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 426, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 229 to 233. , Or a combination thereof, even if a plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to the game state after the end of the consecutive notice effect (15R certainty variation jackpot, 2R certainty variation jackpot, time saving jackpot, miss) are prepared. Good.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, the case where an image for the continuous announcement effect different from the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 has been described, but this is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called “chance eye”, which is a combination of predetermined symbols, as a stop symbol displayed when the variable effect is finished. In this case, in the continuous notice command process (see FIG. 53) of the command determination process executed by the MPU 421 of the display control device 313, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on, and other stop symbol determination is performed. The flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, the continuous notice command process is executed after the stop identification command process, so instead of the stop design set by the reception of the display stop identification command, the chance chance is set as the stop design, so the variable stop Occasionally, the chance eyes can be confirmed and displayed. Then, in the third symbol display device 281, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as a stop symbol for each variation effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a jackpot will be finally obtained.

  In the second embodiment, the main control device 310 obtains various counters (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3) that are acquired at the time of a winning start to notify the voice lamp control device. However, the information is not limited to this, and various counters (first random number counter C1, first per type counter) acquired at the time of winning the start prize are not limited to this. The information of C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3) may be notified to the voice lamp control device 313.

  In the second embodiment, the main control device 310 uses the information of the various counters (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3) acquired at the time of starting winning in the reserved ball number command. Then, the holding ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313, and the voice lamp control device 313 transmits the holding ball number command according to the values of various counters included in the holding ball number command. Estimate the result of the lottery performed for the pending ball held at that time and the stop type after the fluctuating performance, and based on the estimation result and the number of pending balls held at that time, the continuous notice production Although the case of deciding whether or not to perform is explained, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main control device 310 estimates the result of the lottery corresponding to the start winning and the stop type after the fluctuating effect from the values of various counters acquired at the time of winning the start winning, and at least a part of the estimation result is the number of reserved balls The voice lamp control device 313 may be included in the command and notified to the voice lamp control device 313, and the voice lamp control device 313 may determine whether or not to perform the continuous notice presentation based on the notified estimation result. Further, the main control device 310 may perform the continuous notice presentation based on the result of the lottery corresponding to the start winning, which is estimated from the values of the various counters acquired at the time of the start winning, and the stop type after the variation presentation. It is determined whether or not at least the determination result is included in the hold ball number command and the voice lamp control device 313 is notified. Based on the determination result, the voice lamp control device 313 finally determines whether or not to perform the continuous notice presentation. May be determined. Further, the main control device 310 determines whether or not the continuous announcement effect is to be performed, and the determination result is included in the reserved ball number command and notified to the audio lamp control device 313, and the audio lamp control device 313 notifies the continuous announcement effect. You may make it determine only a performance mode. As information to be included in the number of reserved balls command, information about the result of the lottery corresponding to the estimated starting prize, information on the stop type after the fluctuating effect, information on whether or not continuous notice effect may be performed, or continuous notice effect is performed. By using this information as to whether or not the value of each counter is included, the command size of the reserved ball number command can be reduced. In addition, the result of the lottery corresponding to the estimated starting winning, the information about the stop type after the fluctuating effect, the information as to whether or not the continuous notice effect may be performed, or the information as to whether or not the continuous notice effect is performed, The command may be transmitted from main controller 310 to voice lamp controller 313 by a command other than the reserved ball count command.

  In the second embodiment, when the continuous warning command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 313 to the display control device 314, the continuous warning image type indicated by the continuous warning command is displayed in the display control device 314. The case where the transfer instruction is given to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 has been described. However, the continuous notification image type indicated by the continuous notification command constitutes a continuous notification effect of the same effect type In some cases, after the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command is once transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, it is overwritten by another image data until the continuous notice effect is finished. It may be controlled not to be performed. This makes it possible to prevent the same image data from being repeatedly transferred.

  If the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command constitutes a step-up type continuous notice effect, not only the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command but also the step A transfer instruction may be given to transfer the image data corresponding to all the continuous notice image types used in the up-type continuous notice effect from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. Also in this case, the image data corresponding to these continuous notice image types once transferred to the normal video RAM 436 is controlled so as not to be overwritten by other image data until the continuous notice effect is completed. Good. As a result, before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used in the continuous notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 436. In addition, it is possible to suppress the repeated transfer of the same image data.

  Further, in the voice lamp control device 313, execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the continuous notice determination process (S2009) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 46), and the continuous notice effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command for notifying the display control device 314 of the execution decision of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice effect mode may be transmitted to the display control device 314. Then, in response to the reception of this command, the display control device 314 sets a transmission instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. Good. As a result, the transfer of the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 can be started before the variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is started. Before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 436.

  Further, the display control device 314 may store the image data used in the continuous announcement effect in a sub area dedicated to the continuous announcement effect image provided in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436. As a result, the image data used in the continuous announcement effect can be prevented from being overwritten by other image data, so that the image data corresponding to the desired continuous announcement image type is stored in the normal video RAM 436. The probability can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous announcement effect from being repeatedly transferred.

  Further, the continuous announcement command transmitted from the display control device 314 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous announcement effect in which the variable effect is set. Accordingly, the display control device 314 can recognize that the display of the continuous announcement effect is the last, and therefore, while the continuous announcement effect is being performed, the continuous announcement effect is stored in the normal video RAM 436 used in the continuous announcement effect. When the control is performed so that the image data is not overwritten, the overwriting control can be easily canceled.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the case where the audio lamp control device 313 notifies the display control device 314 of the execution of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous advance notice image type by the continuous advance notice command has been described. It may be included in the variation pattern command. That is, in the variable display process (see FIG. 47) executed by the voice lamp control device 313, when the display variation pattern command is generated (S2104), it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect is performed, When the notice production is performed, information regarding the execution and the continuous notice image type may be included in the display variation pattern command. Then, in the display control device 314, when the received variation pattern command includes information regarding the execution of the continuous notice image and the continuous notice image type, from the character ROM 434 of the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type. The transfer instruction to the normal video RAM 436 may be performed, and the additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be set in the additional data table buffer 433c. As a result, the number of commands is reduced, so that the processing can be simplified.

  In addition, when the information regarding the execution of the continuous notice effect and the type of the continuous notice image is included in the display variation pattern command, the display data table that does not correspond to the continuous notice image for each variation pattern and the corresponding for each continuous notice image type The display control device 314 sets the corresponding display data table in the display data table buffer 433b according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display and the continuous notice image type. May be. That is, the display data table may include one that includes both the drawing content corresponding to the variation pattern and the drawing content of the continuous notice effect corresponding to the continuous notice image type. In this case, it is not necessary to set the additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type. Therefore, the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, and the increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the instruction to transfer the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be issued in response to the reception of the display variation pattern command. As a result, only one transfer data table needs to be prepared for each variation pattern, so that an increase in the data table can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the stop symbol of the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is a voice lamp based on the stop symbol (rear out-of-front / rear reach, reach other than out-of-rear reach, completely out-of-reach) defined by the main control device 310. Although the case of setting by the control device 313 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined by the voice lamp control device 313, the last suspended variable effect is stopped. If the symbol is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be set by replacing the stop symbol determined by the main control device 310 with the stop symbol in the out-of-front / rear reach mode. As a result, the stop symbol of the final variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol determined by the main control device 310, but always the front / rear outreach, so that the player has a high expectation. be able to.

  In the second embodiment, in the case of performing the continuous announcement effect together with all the pending variable effects, each variable effect is performed in the effect mode based on the lottery result performed at the start of each fluctuation. When the continuous announcement effect is performed together with all the pending variable effects, the effect mode of the variable effects other than the last pending variable effect may be changed to the outlying variable effect. In this case, in the voice lamp control device 313, the variation pattern is changed according to the setting status of the continuous announcement effect and the number of times of execution of the continuous announcement effect by the process of generating the display variation pattern command (see S2104 in FIG. 47). You can When the stop design after the fluctuating effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the fluctuating effect is not updated, and the effect mode of the fluctuating effect is displayed as it is based on the fluctuating pattern determined by the main control device 310. May be. Here, even if the continuous notice production is continuously performed, even if the corresponding variation production mode is, for example, super reach variation production, if the situation in which the big hit does not appear as a result continues, the player's expectation May be moved backwards, but the continuous announcement effect is continuously performed, and the variation effects other than the variation effect that is finally executed are continuously performed by the outlying variation effect, so that it is finally executed. It is possible to give the player a higher expectation for the variation effect.

  In the second embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the case where the continuous announcement effect is always executed on the third symbol display device 281 has been described, but the invention is not limited to this. In a situation where the execution of the continuous announcement effect has been decided, when the frame button 222 is pressed by the player, the continuous announcement effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 281.

  In the above-described second embodiment, when performing the variation effect, a case has been described in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are displayed at a high speed variation that scrolls at a high speed so that the player cannot see them. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. .

  In the second embodiment, the case where one game ball 213 is provided with one first entrance 264 for starting a big hit lottery when a ball has entered has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of one, a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances where the balls are independently detected and the jackpot lottery is started may be provided in the game board 213. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313 when there is a hold at each of the first entrances indicates which of the first entrances is the hold. Information may be included. Further, the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313 when the variation is started may include information indicating which of the first entrances is the variation effect held. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 313, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entered indicated by the reserved ball number command. When the number of holding balls for the mouth is set to the number of holding balls and the variation pattern command is received, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

  When a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, when the voice lamp control device 313 decides to start the continuous announcement effect when the hold ball number command is received, all the first ball entrances are made at that time. The continuous notice effect may be executed over the variable effect (holding ball) held by the mouth. In addition, in a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of first entrances and preferentially executes the variation effect held in one first entrance, the variation effect is preferentially executed. The start of the continuous announcement effect may be determined only when the player has entered the first entrance. As a result, since the continuous announcement effect is not started for the variation effect held in the first entrance having a low priority, the continuous announcement effect is performed for the fluctuation effect held in the first entrance having a low priority. It is possible to prevent the situation in which the continuous announcement production does not end easily when the variation production is continuously suspended in the first entrance having a high priority.

  In the second embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 313 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 310, the value of the reserved ball number counter 423a is decremented by 1 (see S2105 in FIG. 47). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 37) executed by the MPU 401 of the main control device 310, the number of reserved balls of the main control device 310 subtracted in accordance with the variation pattern command being set by the variation start process (S1207). The value (N) of the counter 403a (see S1205 in FIG. 37) is set so that the main control device 310 transmits it to the voice lamp control device 313, and the hold ball number command changes its hold pattern. The command may be transmitted from main controller 310 to voice lamp controller 313. In this case, S2105 of FIG. 47 is omitted. In addition, when transmitting the value (N) of the retained sphere number counter 403a of the main control device 310 that has been subtracted, the retained sphere number command includes information indicating that the number of reserved spheres is after subtraction (that is, the start prize). The number of reserved balls may be generated without including the values of the various counters acquired in association with the start winning, including the information indicating that the number of reserved balls is not added with the above). Then, the determination as to whether or not the continuous notice effect is permitted is made when the start winning is made, so that the voice lamp control device 313 performs the command for the reserved ball number command in the command determination process (see FIG. 46). When the reception is detected, if the number of holding balls indicated by the number-of-holding-balls command is the number of holding balls after subtraction, that is, if the number of holding balls is not added according to the starting prize, the continuous notice determination process. The execution of may be skipped.

  In the second embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 313 determines that the continuous announcement effect is started when the number-of-holding-ball command is received, the continuous announcement effect is provided for all the variable effects that are held at that time. Although the case has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined, it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect in each individual variable effect. Good. As a result, since the continuous notice effect may or may not appear for each variation effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation for the appearance of the continuous notice effect, and perform an effect that does not make the player tired. You can In this case, the MPU 421 of the voice lamp control device 313 updates the variable display processing (see FIG. 47) every time it is executed, and provides a counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect. May be. Then, in the variable display process, when the continuous announcement effect is performed (S2107: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect in each variation effect is limited to a predetermined value. The continuous notice command may be set (S2108). Further, in this case, the number (range) of the predetermined values of the counter that sets the continuous notice effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the condition. The conditions include, for example, the value of the reserved ball number counter 423a at the time of determining whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous announcement effects, the variation pattern of the variation effect for which the determination is performed, and a series of The game state after the end of the continuous notice effect (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot, miss), or a combination of two or more of these. As a result, the probability that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined in each variation effect is changed according to the condition, and thus the player can be made to pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous announcement effect in each variation effect. ..

  In the second embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313, and the voice lamp control device 313 instructs the display control device 314 to display. Alternatively, the command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 310 to the display control device 314. Further, a voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may be configured to transmit to the voice lamp control device a command instructing output of each voice and lighting of the lamp. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of the command generated by the voice lamp control device 313 and notified to the display control device 314, such as a continuous notice command or an error occurrence command, a continuous notice is given. Various flags such as a flag and an error occurrence flag are generated, and the display data table and the additional data table are set in the display data table buffer 433b or the additional data table buffer 433c based on the flags, and various image data such as a warning image is set. It may be generated or a transfer instruction of necessary image data may be set.

  In the second embodiment, the winning of the first entrance 264 and the passage of the second entrance 267 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four. The number is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of balls to be variably displayed based on the winning in the first ball entrance 264 is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 281, or the area divided into four is the number of balls to be reserved. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 237, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  Further, as shown in the second embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling a symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 281. Alternatively, the symbols may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and, for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or in a variety of different motion displays or changed displays. It also includes a display effect that is displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  The invention described in the second embodiment may be implemented in the first embodiment. That is, in the slot machine 10, a display data table and an additional data table are prepared in advance for each of the various effects displayed on the auxiliary display device 65 in response to a command received from the main control device 101. Depending on the contents of the received command, select the display data table or additional data table to be used, expand the drawing contents described in the selected data table in the address order according to the pointer update, and expand it. The image displayed on the auxiliary display device 65 may be drawn by instructing the image controller 188 to draw the image in accordance with the drawn contents. In addition, the corresponding transfer data table is set according to the setting of the display data table, the transfer data information described in the transfer data table is expanded in the address order according to the update of the pointer, and the expanded transfer data table is expanded. The image data may be transferred from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 190 according to the information.

  Here, in game machines and the like excluding gaming machines (pachinko machines and slot machines), the display content cannot be predicted momentarily based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted. It is impossible to have a display data table corresponding to each effect as described above. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, the display control device 81 performs a lottery based on the gaming state of the slot machine 10 determined by various commands received from the main control device 101 and a start command by operating the start lever 41. Since the effect mode is selected based on the result of (judgment of winning mode) and the auxiliary effect section executes various effects, a display data table is prepared for each effect, and an effect to be displayed. It is possible to easily set a display data table buffer according to the above and create a drawing list for each frame according to the set data table. With this configuration, as in the conventional slot machine, the program executed by the MPU 181 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed, so that the effect image is generated. Compared to the case where a large amount of load is involved in the start-up and execution of programs, which is complicated and enormous due to the diversification of various types, the auxiliary display unit can be operated by simply replacing the display data table to be used. Since the effect image to be displayed on 65 can be changed, it is possible to display various effect images on the auxiliary display section 65 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 81.

  The present invention may be implemented in a slot machine of a type different from the so-called A type slot machine described in the first embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to any slot machine such as a B type, a C type, a combined type of A type and C type, a combined type of B type and C type, and a type equipped with a CT game. In any case, it is clear that the same operational effects as the above-described first embodiment can be obtained. The bonus wins in each of these types include BB wins, RB wins, SB wins, CT wins, and the like.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from that of the second embodiment. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a ball launching handle is not provided. There are things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown below in addition to the slot machine and the gaming machine of the present invention.

  The main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub-control means that operates based on the command transmitted from the main control means, and the image display means for displaying an image based on the control by the sub-control means In the slot machine, the sub control unit responds to an image drawing unit that draws an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display unit and a command received from the main control unit from a plurality of display modes. First display determining means for determining the display type to be displayed, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in each of the display types is defined for each screen. First definition information storage means for storing first definition information, and the first definition information corresponding to the display type determined by the first display determination means are selected from the first definition information storage means. First selection means, first pointer means updated every time, and each time the first pointer means is updated, based on the first regulation information selected by the first selection means, On the basis of the drawing information specifying means for specifying the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means, and the drawing information for the one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means, And a drawing instruction information generating unit for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the drawing of an image for one screen, the image drawing unit based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating unit. The slot machine 1 is characterized in that it draws an image for one screen.

  According to the slot machine 1, in the sub-control unit, the first prescribed information storage unit is provided for each of a plurality of display types, and the drawing information indicating the information necessary for drawing the image to be displayed in the display type is set to 1 The first definition information defined for each screen is stored, and the first display information corresponding to the display type to be displayed with respect to the command received from the main control unit determined from the plurality of display modes by the first display determination unit. The regulation information is selected from the first regulation information storage means by the first selection means. Further, the first pointer means is updated every time the time elapses, and every time the updating is performed, the first pointer means 1 corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the first regulation information selected by the first selecting means. The drawing information for the screen is specified by the drawing information specifying means, and the drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw the image for one screen is drawn based on the specified drawing information for the one screen. It is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, the image for one screen is drawn by the drawing image means. Thus, when the display type to be displayed for the command received from the main control means changes, the first regulation information corresponding to the display type can be easily displayed by selecting it from the first regulation information storage means. An image according to the type can be generated and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  The main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub-control means that operates based on the command transmitted from the main control means, and the image display means for displaying an image based on the control by the sub-control means In the gaming machine, the sub control means responds to an image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means and a command received from the main control means from a plurality of display modes. First display determining means for determining the display type to be displayed, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in each of the display types is defined for each screen. First regulation information storage means for storing first regulation information, and first selection for selecting the first regulation information corresponding to the display type determined by the first display determination means from the first regulation information storage means. Means, a first pointer means updated every time, and each time the first pointer means is updated, the first pointer means is updated based on the first regulation information selected by the first selecting means. 1 for the image drawing means based on the drawing information specifying means for specifying the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the first pointer means, and the drawing information for the one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means. And a drawing instruction information generating unit for generating drawing instruction information for instructing drawing of an image for a screen, and the image drawing unit generates one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating unit. A game machine A1 for drawing an image of minutes.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in the sub control means, the first specified information storage means is provided for each of a plurality of display types, and the drawing information indicating the information necessary for drawing the image to be displayed in the display type is set to 1 The first definition information defined for each screen is stored, and the first display information corresponding to the display type to be displayed with respect to the command received from the main control unit determined from the plurality of display modes by the first display determination unit. The regulation information is selected from the first regulation information storage means by the first selection means. Further, the first pointer means is updated every time the time elapses, and every time the updating is performed, the first pointer means 1 corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the first regulation information selected by the first selecting means. The drawing information for the screen is specified by the drawing information specifying means, and the drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw the image for one screen is drawn based on the specified drawing information for the one screen. It is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, the image for one screen is drawn by the drawing image means. Thus, when the display type to be displayed for the command received from the main control means changes, the first regulation information corresponding to the display type can be easily displayed by selecting it from the first regulation information storage means. An image according to the type can be generated and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub-control means includes a first image information storage means for storing a plurality of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing means, and is defined for each screen in the first defining information. The drawing information includes specification information for specifying image information necessary for drawing an image for the one screen, and the drawing instruction information generating means is for the one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means. On the basis of the drawing information of the drawing information, the drawing instruction information including the image instruction information for instructing the image information necessary for drawing the image of the one screen is generated from the specific information included in the drawing information, Included in the drawing instruction information among the plurality of image information stored in the first image information storage means based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. Serial using image information instructed by the image instruction information, the gaming machine is characterized in that to draw the image for one screen A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in the sub control means, the first image information storage means stores a plurality of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing means. Further, the drawing information specified for each screen in the first specifying information includes the specifying information for specifying the image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen, and the drawing information specifying means Based on the identified drawing information for one screen, the drawing instruction information including the image instruction information for instructing the image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen is drawn based on the specific information included in the drawing information. It is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, based on the generated drawing instruction information, the image drawing means indicates the image information instructed by the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information among the plurality of image information stored in the first image information storage means. Is used to draw an image for one screen. As a result, various image types can be supported by specifying the image information necessary for drawing the image for one screen by the specifying information included in the drawing information specified for each screen in the first specifying information. The drawn image can be drawn and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to more easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine A2, the sub-control unit can perform a read operation faster than the first image storage unit, stores the image information stored in the first image storage unit, and stores the stored image information. A rewritable second image storage means, wherein the image drawing means draws an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least image information stored in the second image storage means. The sub-control unit may further use the first image information according to the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information when the image information is drawn by the image drawing unit before the image information is used. A gaming machine A3, comprising: first transfer control means for controlling transfer of the one image information from the image storage means to the second image storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the sub-control means can perform a read operation faster than the first image storage means, stores the image information stored in the first image storage means, and stores the stored image. A second image storage unit capable of rewriting information is provided, and the image drawing unit draws an image to be displayed on the image display unit based on at least the image information stored in the second image storage unit. It is configured. When one piece of image information is used for drawing an image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image specifying information included in the drawing instruction information, the one piece of information is controlled by the first transfer control means before the image information is used. Image information is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. As a result, even if a memory having a slow read speed is used for the first image storage means, the image drawing means uses at least the predetermined image information transferred to the second storage means capable of high-speed read operation to generate an image. Since the image to be displayed on the display means is drawn, the image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. Therefore, even if a memory having a slow reading speed is used as the first image storage means, various kinds of effects can be immediately displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine A3, the first transfer control means sets the one image information before the one image information is used in the image drawing by the image drawing means according to the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information. The sub-control means generates transfer instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to transfer the image from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. The image drawing means includes instruction information generating means for generating instruction information including drawing instruction information and the transfer instruction information generated by the first transfer control means, and the image drawing means is generated by the drawing information generating means. An image for one screen is drawn based on the drawing instruction information included in the instruction information, and the first image is drawn based on the transfer instruction information included in the instruction information. Gaming machine A4, characterized in that the 憶 means is to transfer the first image information to the second image storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in the sub control means, the one image information is used before the one image information is used in the image drawing by the image drawing means by the first transfer control means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information. Transfer instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to transfer the information from the first image storage means to the second image storage means is generated, and the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generation means and the first transfer control means. The instruction information including the generated transfer instruction information is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information included in the instruction information generated by the drawing information generating means, and at the same time based on the transfer instruction information included in the instruction information. The one image information is transferred from the one image storage means to the second image storage means. As a result, before one piece of image information is used for drawing an image by the image drawing means based on the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the image drawing means instructs the transfer instruction information included in the instruction information. The image information can be transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means in advance. Therefore, even if a memory having a slow reading speed is used for the first image storage means, the image drawing means can operate at high speed. It is possible to reliably draw an image to be displayed on the image display unit by using at least the predetermined image information transferred to the second storage unit capable of reading.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first specified information storage means stores the first specified information for each element obtained by subdividing the display mode of each display type, and the sub control means is configured to An element specifying unit that specifies an element configuring a display mode of the display type determined by the first display determining unit is provided, and the first selecting unit corresponds to the display type determined by the first display determining unit. A game machine A5, characterized in that, as the first specified information, all the first specified information corresponding to the element specified by the element specifying means is selected from the first specified information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the first regulation information storage means stores the first regulation information for each element obtained by subdividing the display mode of each display type. Here, the display mode of each display type generally includes many elements in which images displayed in common are common, and the drawing information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the common elements is generally displayed. , The first regulation information corresponding to each display type may be included only in the first regulation information corresponding to the element, so that the first regulation information is efficiently stored in the first regulation information storage means. Can be memorized. On the other hand, even if the first regulation information is stored for each element, the sub-control means specifies the elements constituting the display mode of the display type determined by the first display determination means by the element identification means, and the first selection means. Thus, as the first definition information corresponding to the display type determined by the first display determination means, all the first definition information corresponding to the element identified by the element identification means is selected from the first definition information storage means. . With this, it is only necessary to specify the element constituting the display mode of the display type determined for the command received from the main control means, and select the first regulation information corresponding to the element from the first regulation information storage means. It is possible to easily draw an image according to the display type and display it on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display mode displayed on the image display unit while efficiently storing the first specified information.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the display type includes a plurality of dynamic display effects for dynamically displaying identification information on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command, Is for imparting a predetermined game value to the player when predetermined identification information appears due to the dynamic display effect, and the first regulation information storage means stores the first regulation information. However, the game machine A6 is stored for each of the plurality of dynamic display effects.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information in the effect mode set based on the command is displayed on the image display means, and the predetermined identification information appears by the dynamic display effect. In this case, a predetermined game value is given to the player. By this dynamic display effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a predetermined game value is given, and by changing various effect modes of this dynamic display effect, it is possible to adapt to the effect mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Here, since the first prescribed information storage means stores the first prescribed information for each of a plurality of dynamic display effects, the first display determination means causes the image display means to provide one effect mode based on the command. When it is determined to display the dynamic display effect of, the first selecting unit selects the first specified information corresponding to the dynamic display effect of the one effect mode from the first specified information storage unit. Thereby, in the dynamic display effect that gives the player various expectations, the first specified information corresponding to the dynamic display effect of one effect mode set based on the command is selected from the first specified information storage means. Only by doing so, it is possible to easily draw an image according to the effect mode and display it on the image display means. Therefore, since it is possible to easily diversify the dynamic display effects displayed on the image display means, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player by the dynamic display effects.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the sub-control unit determines a second display type to be displayed in addition to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination unit from a plurality of display modes. And a second display determining unit that is provided for each of the plurality of second display types and that defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type for each screen. Second regulation information storage means for storing regulation information, and second selection for selecting the second regulation information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determination means from the second regulation information storage means. Means, and second pointer means updated together with the updating of the first pointer means, and the drawing information specifying means is selected by the first selecting means each time the first pointer means is updated. Before was done The drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the first specified information, and is updated based on the second specified information selected by the second selecting means. A game machine B1 characterized in that the drawing information necessary for the entire image is specified by specifying the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed on the one screen corresponding to the second pointer means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in the sub-control means, the second display type added to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from the plurality of display modes and displayed is the second display determination means. Determined by Further, the second specified information storage means is provided for each of the plurality of second display types, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type is specified for each screen. The second regulation information is stored. Here, the second specifying information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specifying information storage means by the second selecting means. Further, the second pointer means is updated together with the update of the first pointer means. Then, the drawing information specifying means, each time the first pointer means is updated, based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means, one screen portion corresponding to the updated first pointer means. By specifying the drawing information and the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed on one screen corresponding to the updated second pointer means based on the second prescribed information selected by the second selecting means. , Is configured to specify drawing information required for the entire image. As a result, when the image of the second display type is added to the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means to be displayed, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second prescribed information storage means. The image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed by simply selecting from the above. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine B1, the display type includes a plurality of dynamic display effects for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command, and the game machine is the dynamic A predetermined game value is given to the player when predetermined identification information is displayed by the display effect, and the sub-control means is the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means. Standby number storage means for storing the number of standby times, and the second display determination means adds to the dynamic display effect in each of the dynamic display effects for the standby number stored in the standby number storage means. The game machine B2 is characterized in that it decides to display an image of the second display type.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information in the effect mode set based on the command is displayed on the image display means, and the predetermined identification information appears by the dynamic display effect. In this case, a predetermined game value is given to the player. By this dynamic display effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a predetermined game value is given, and by changing various effect modes of this dynamic display effect, it is possible to adapt to the effect mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Further, in the sub-control means, the number of times of waiting for the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means is stored in the number-of-waiting storage means, and based on a command from the main control device, the number of waiting times stored in the waiting-count storage means In each of the dynamic display effects for the number of times, the second display determining means determines to display the image of the second display type in addition to the dynamic display effects. As a result, it is possible to continuously add and display the image of the second display type over a plurality of dynamic display effects. As a result, it is possible to give various expectations to the player who visually recognizes that the images of the second display type are continuously displayed. Then, even if images of the second display type are continuously added to the dynamic display effect and displayed, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is changed to the second by the configuration described in the gaming machine B1. The image of the second display type can be easily added to the dynamic display effect and displayed by simply selecting from the prescribed information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the second display determination means determines whether or not to display the image of the second display type on the image display means, and the second selection means causes the second display to be displayed. When it is determined by the determining means that the image of the second display type is to be hidden, the display mode of the display type determined by the first display determining means should be added instead of the second prescribed information. A gaming machine B3 characterized by selecting information indicating that there is no drawing information.

  According to the gaming machine B3, when the second display determination means determines to hide the image of the second display type, the display type determined by the first display determination means instead of the second regulation information. The information indicating that there is no drawing information to be added to the display mode is selected by the second selecting means. As a result, every time the drawing information specifying means updates the first pointer means, the drawing information specifying means corresponds to the updated first pointer means specified based on the first defining information selected by the first selecting means. The drawing information related to the second display type is not added to the drawing information for one screen, and the drawing information required for the entire image is specified. Therefore, even when the image of the second display type is displayed or hidden, the display / non-display of the image of the second display type can be easily switched. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

  Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, wherein the first pointer means also serves as the second pointer means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, since the first pointer means also serves as the second pointer means, the drawing information specifying means is the first rule selected by the first selecting means each time the first pointer means is updated. Based on the information, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and corresponding to the first pointer means based on the second prescribed information selected by the second selecting means. By specifying the drawing information to be additionally displayed on one screen, it is possible to specify the drawing information necessary for the entire image, and it is possible to easily display the entire image to be displayed from the respective prescribed information with only one pointer means. It is possible to specify the drawing information required for.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the sub-control unit determines a second display type to be displayed in addition to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination unit from a plurality of display modes. And a second display determining unit that is provided for each of the plurality of second display types and that defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type for each screen. Second regulation information storage means for storing regulation information, and second selection for selecting the second regulation information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determination means from the second regulation information storage means. Unit and drawing information of an image to be additionally displayed defined by the second defining information selected by the second selecting unit, with respect to the first defining information selected by the first selecting unit, for each screen. Add to A first rule information generating unit that generates different rule information, and the drawing information specifying unit generates a new rule generated by the first rule information generating unit each time the first pointer unit is updated. A game machine C1 characterized in that drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the information.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in the sub-control unit, the second display type added to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination unit from the plurality of display modes is the second display determination unit. Determined by Further, the second specified information storage means is provided for each of the plurality of second display types, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type is specified for each screen. The second regulation information is stored. Here, the second specifying information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specifying information storage means by the second selecting means. Further, the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed defined by the second defining information selected by the second selecting unit with respect to the first defining information selected by the first selecting unit by the first defining information generating unit. Is added for each screen, new regulation information is generated. Then, each time the drawing information specifying means updates the first pointer means, one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the new specifying information generated by the first specifying information generating means. Minute drawing information is specified. As a result, when the image of the second display type is added to the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means to be displayed, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second prescribed information storage means. If selected from the above, the image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine C1, the display type includes a plurality of dynamic display effects for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command, and the game machine is the dynamic A predetermined game value is given to the player when predetermined identification information is displayed by the display effect, and the sub-control means is the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means. The second display determination means adds to the dynamic display effect in each of the dynamic display effects for the standby times stored in the standby number storage means. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that it decides to display an image of the second display type.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information in the effect mode set based on the command is displayed on the image display means, and the predetermined identification information appears by the dynamic display effect. In this case, a predetermined game value is given to the player. By this dynamic display effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a predetermined game value is given, and by changing various effect modes of this dynamic display effect, it is possible to adapt to the effect mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Further, in the sub-control means, the number of times of waiting for the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means is stored in the number-of-waiting storage means, and based on a command from the main control device, the number of waiting times stored in the waiting-count storage means In each of the dynamic display effects for the number of times, the second display determining means determines to display the image of the second display type in addition to the dynamic display effects. As a result, it is possible to continuously add and display the image of the second display type over a plurality of dynamic display effects. As a result, it is possible to give various expectations to the player who visually recognizes that the images of the second display type are continuously displayed. Then, even if images of the second display type are continuously added to the dynamic display effect and displayed, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is changed to the second by the configuration described in the gaming machine C1. The image of the second display type can be easily added to the dynamic display effect and displayed by simply selecting from the prescribed information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second display determination means is for determining whether or not to display the image of the second display type on the image display means, and the drawing information identification means is for the second display. When the determining unit determines to hide the image of the second display type, it corresponds to the updated first pointer unit on the basis of the first defining information selected by the first selecting unit. A gaming machine C3 characterized by specifying drawing information for one screen.

  According to the gaming machine C3, when the second display determination means determines to hide the image of the second display type, the drawing information identification means uses the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means. Based on this, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified. Therefore, even when the image of the second display type is displayed or hidden, the display / non-display of the image of the second display type can be easily switched. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the sub-control means selects a second display type to be additionally displayed from the plurality of display modes to the display mode of the display type determined by the first display determination means. The first definition information stored in the first definition information storage means is provided with a second display determination means for determining, and in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type, the image of the display type is determined. The drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the second display type additionally displayed is defined for each screen, and the drawing information specifying means is provided every time the first pointer means is updated. , Based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and is determined by the second display determining means. Second display type By specifying the drawing information of the corresponding image to be added displayed on the one screen, the gaming machine D1, characterized in that identifying the drawing information needed for the entire image.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in the sub-control means, a second display is additionally displayed on the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from among the plurality of display aspects. The type is determined by the second display determining means. In addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type, the second display displayed in addition to the image of the corresponding display type by the first specified information stored in the first specified information storage means. The drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the type is defined for each screen, and the first specified information selected by the first selecting means is updated every time the first pointer means is updated by the drawing information specifying means. Based on this, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and an image to be additionally displayed on one screen corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means. Drawing information is specified, and drawing information required for the entire image is specified. As a result, when the image of the second display type is additionally displayed on the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means, the drawing of the second display type to be additionally displayed is selected from the selected first regulation information. If the information is specified, the image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  In the game machine D1, the display type includes a plurality of dynamic display effects for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command, and the game machine is the dynamic A predetermined game value is given to the player when predetermined identification information is displayed by the display effect, and the sub-control means is the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means. Standby number storage means for storing the number of standby times, and the second display determination means adds to the dynamic display effect in each of the dynamic display effects for the standby number stored in the standby number storage means. Then, the game machine D2 is characterized in that it decides to display an image of the second display type.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information in the effect mode set based on the command is displayed on the image display means, and the predetermined identification information appears by the dynamic display effect. If so, a predetermined game value is given to the player. By this dynamic display effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a predetermined game value is given, and by changing various effect modes of this dynamic display effect, it is possible to adapt to the effect mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Further, in the sub-control means, the number of times of waiting for the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means is stored in the number-of-waiting storage means, and based on a command from the main control device, the number of waiting times stored in the waiting-count storage means In each of the dynamic display effects for the number of times, the second display determining means determines to display the image of the second display type in addition to the dynamic display effects. As a result, it is possible to continuously add and display the image of the second display type over a plurality of dynamic display effects. As a result, it is possible to give various expectations to the player who visually recognizes that the images of the second display type are continuously displayed. Then, even if the images of the second display type are continuously added to the dynamic display effect and displayed, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is set to the second by the configuration described in the gaming machine D1. The image of the second display type can be easily added to the dynamic display effect and displayed simply by selecting from the regulation information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second display determination means determines whether or not to display the image of the second display type on the image display means, and the drawing information identification means is the second display. When it is determined by the determination means that the image of the second display type is not displayed, the updated first pointer means is supported based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means. The game machine D3 is characterized in that the drawing information for one screen is specified and the drawing information of the image of the second display type defined in the first defining information is discarded.

  According to the gaming machine D3, when the second display determination means determines to hide the image of the second display type, the drawing information identification means uses the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means. On the basis of this, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and the drawing information of the image of the second display type specified in the first specifying information is discarded. There is. Therefore, even when the image of the second display type is displayed or hidden, the display / non-display of the image of the second display type can be easily switched. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the sub-control means can perform a read operation faster than the first image storage means, and third image storage means that stores the image information stored in the first image storage means. The image drawing means draws an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the third image storage means and the image information stored in the second image storage means. The sub control means further controls to transfer a part of the image information stored in the first image storage means to the third image storage means at the time of start-up by turning on the power. Image data transferred under the control of the second transfer control means is retained in the third image storage means until at least a predetermined trigger comes. When the image drawing by the image drawing means uses image information that is not held in the third image storage means according to the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the means, before using the image information, A gaming machine E1 for controlling transfer of the image information from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the sub-control means has a third image storage means capable of performing a read operation faster than the first image storage means and storing the image information stored in the first image storage means. The image drawing means is provided and draws an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the third image storage means and the image information stored in the second image storage means. Is configured. Here, a part of the image information stored in the first image storage means is transferred to the third image storage means under the control of the second transfer control means at the time of start-up by turning on the power, and is stored in the third image storage means. Holds the image information transferred under the control of the second transfer control means at least until a predetermined trigger comes. On the other hand, when the non-held image information in the third image storage means is used for image control by the image drawing means according to the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the first transfer control means is used before the image information is used. The image information is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means under the control of.

  As a result, the image drawing means transfers the image information held in the third image storage means capable of high-speed read operation and the second image storage means even if a memory having a slow reading speed of the first storage means is used. Since the image to be displayed on the image display means is drawn using the obtained image information, the image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. Further, since the image information held in the third image storage means is held at least until a predetermined trigger comes, the amount of image information transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means should be reduced. You can Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load on the transfer of the image information from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

  In the gaming machine E1, the image information stored in the third image storage means is image information for displaying an image frequently displayed by the image display means, the gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the image information for displaying the image that is frequently displayed by the image display means is held in the third image storage means. Therefore, each time the image display means displays the image, Since it is not necessary to read the image information from the one-image storage means, the frequently displayed image can be surely displayed at a desired time.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the image information held in the third image storage means is controlled by the sub control means based on a command transmitted from the main control means or a signal input to the sub control means. A gaming machine E4, which is image information for displaying an image to be displayed immediately on the image display means.

  The signal input to the sub-control unit may be an input signal from various sensors such as a vibration sensor provided in the game machine or a game medium detection sensor that detects a game medium loaded in the game machine. It may be an input signal from a button operated by the player. Further, the image to be immediately displayed on the image display means may be, for example, an image for notifying an error, or may be a rear image displayed on the image display means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, an image for displaying an image to be immediately displayed on the image display means under the control of the sub control means based on a command transmitted from the main control means or a signal input to the sub control means. Since the information is stored in the third image storage means, an image for displaying the image to be displayed immediately after the command transmitted from the main control means or the signal input to the sub control means is input. The image control unit can control the image using the image information stored in the third image storage unit without reading the information from the first image storage unit. Therefore, the image to be displayed immediately can be surely displayed at a desired time.

  Any one of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E3, wherein the first image storage means is constituted by a NAND flash memory.

  According to the gaming machine E4, the first image storage means is composed of a NAND flash memory. Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that it has a large storage capacity in a small area and is inexpensive, so that it is possible to increase the capacity of the first image storage means while suppressing an increase in cost. be able to. Therefore, since a large amount of image information for displaying an image on the image display means can be stored in the first image storage means, the images displayed on the image display means can be made into various modes, which is of interest to the player. Can be improved. On the other hand, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that the reading speed is slower than that of other memories, but the image drawing means has the configuration described in any of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E3. Since the image to be displayed on the image display means is drawn using the image information transferred to the second image storage means capable of at least high-speed reading operation, even if the first image storage means is configured by the NAND flash memory, It is possible to display a predetermined image at a desired time without any problem. Therefore, it is possible to display a predetermined image at a desired time without any problem while diversifying the images displayed on the image display means.

  In any of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the sub-control means is associated with the first regulation information, and among the image information necessary for drawing the image prescribed by the first regulation information, Third regulation information storage means storing third regulation information defining the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, and third regulation information corresponding to the first regulation information selected by the first selecting means. Is selected from the third prescribed information storage means, and image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is specified based on the third prescribed information selected by the third selection means. Transfer information specifying means, and the first transfer control means sets the image information to be transferred specified by the transfer information specifying means according to the image instruction information in which the image information is included in the drawing instruction information. Before use in rendering of an image by the image drawing means, said game machine F1, characterized in that control to transfer to the from the first image storage means the second image storing means.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in the sub control means, the image to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information in correspondence with the first definition information. The third regulation information defining the information is stored in the third regulation information storage means. Here, the third selecting means selects the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means from the third specifying information storage means, and based on the selected third specifying information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified by the transfer information specifying means. Then, before the specified image information to be transferred is used by the first transfer control means in the drawing of the image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, 2 is transferred to the image storage means. This makes it possible to easily specify the image information to be transferred to the second image storage unit, out of the image information necessary for drawing the image specified by the first specified information, with respect to the selected first specified information. Therefore, the image displayed based on the first regulation information can be surely drawn and displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine E1, the sub-control means is not retained in the third image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first regulation information in association with the first regulation information. Corresponding to the third prescribed information storage means storing the third prescribed information that regulates the image information as the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, and the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means. Based on the third selecting means for selecting the third specifying information to be stored from the third specifying information storage means and the third specifying information selected by the third selecting means, it should be transferred to the second image storage means. Transfer information specifying means for specifying image information, wherein the first transfer control means is an image in which the image information to be transferred specified by the transfer information specifying means is included in the drawing instruction information. Instruction Gaming machine F2, wherein the prior to use in rendering of an image by the image drawing means, be controlled to be transferred from the first image storing unit to the second image storage means in accordance with distribution.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in the sub-control means, the image information that is not held in the third image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first regulation information in association with the first regulation information. The third definition information defining the information as the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is stored in the third definition information storage means. Here, the third selecting means selects the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means from the third specifying information storage means, and based on the selected third specifying information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified by the transfer information specifying means. Then, before the specified image information to be transferred is used by the first transfer control means in the drawing of the image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, 2 is transferred to the image storage means. As a result, of the selected first prescribed information, among the image information necessary for drawing the image prescribed by the first prescribed information, it is not held in the third image storage means, so that the second image is stored. Since the image information to be transferred to the means can be easily specified, the image displayed based on the first prescribed information can be surely drawn and displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the sub control means includes a third pointer means that is updated together with the updating of the first pointer means, and the transfer information specifying means corresponds to the updated third pointer means. The game machine F3 is characterized in that the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is specified based on the third prescribed information selected by the third selection means.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the third pointer means is updated together with the update of the first pointer means, and the transfer information specifying means selects the third pointer means corresponding to the updated third pointer means. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is specified based on the third prescribed information. Thereby, the predetermined image information can be transferred from the first image storage area to the second image storage area in accordance with the update of the first pointer means, and the transfer timing can be easily set.

  In the gaming machine F3, the third definition information defines image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each unit time when one screen image is displayed on the image display means. Characteristic game machine F4.

  According to the gaming machine F4, the third definition information defines the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each unit time. Therefore, the transfer information specifying means updates the third pointer means. In addition, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area to be transferred can be easily specified.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the third prescribed information storage means stores the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means out of the image information necessary for drawing the image prescribed by the first prescribed information. If it does not exist, the third regulation information corresponding to the first regulation information is not stored, and the transfer information specifying means stores the third regulation information corresponding to the first regulation information selected by the first regulation means. If the third selecting means determines that the image information is not stored in the third specified information storage means, it is specified that there is no image information to be transferred to the second image storage area. Gaming machine F5.

  According to the gaming machine F5, if there is no image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, out of the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first regulation information, then it corresponds to the first regulation information. The third regulation information is not stored in the third regulation information storage means. When the third selecting means determines that the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first specifying means is not stored in the third specifying information storage means, the transfer image specifying means determines , It is specified that there is no image information to be transferred to the second image storage area. Accordingly, it is possible to easily determine whether or not there is image information to be transferred to the second image storage unit among the image information necessary for drawing the image specified by the first specified information, based on the presence or absence of the third specified information. Therefore, the processing can be reduced. Further, it is possible to prevent unnecessary third regulation information from being stored in the third regulation information storage means, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the storage means.

  In any of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the sub-control means additionally displays the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from a plurality of display modes. Second display determining means for determining a display type, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in each of the plurality of second display types, for each screen. Second prescribed information storage means for storing the prescribed second prescribed information, and the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determination means are selected from the second prescribed information storage means. And a second pointer unit that is updated together with the updating of the first pointer unit. The drawing information specifying unit includes the first pointer unit each time the first pointer unit is updated. By means of selection Based on the selected first regulation information, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and based on the second regulation information selected by the second selection means. Then, by specifying the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed on the one screen in correspondence with the updated second pointer means, the drawing information necessary for the entire image is specified, and the sub control means further Of the image information necessary for drawing the image to be additionally displayed defined by the second regulation information, in association with the second regulation information, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is defined. Fourth regulation information storage means storing fourth regulation information and fourth selection means for selecting fourth regulation information corresponding to the second regulation information selected by the second selection means from the fourth regulation information storage means. And the fourth Transfer information specifying means for specifying image information to be transferred to the second image storage means based on the fourth prescribed information selected by the setting means, and the first transfer control means specifies the transfer information. The image information to be transferred, which is specified by the means, is stored in the first image storage means before the image information is drawn by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information. A gaming machine F6 characterized by being controlled so as to be transferred to a second image storage means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in the sub-control means, the second display type to be additionally displayed on the image of the display type determined by the first display determining means from the plurality of display modes is the second display determining means. Determined by Further, the second specified information storage means is provided for each of the plurality of second display types, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type is specified for each screen. The second regulation information is stored. Here, the second specifying information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specifying information storage means by the second selecting means. Further, the second pointer means is updated together with the update of the first pointer means. Then, the drawing information specifying means, each time the first pointer means is updated, based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means, one screen portion corresponding to the updated first pointer means. By specifying the drawing information and the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed on one screen corresponding to the updated second pointer means based on the second prescribed information selected by the second selecting means. , Is configured to specify drawing information required for the entire image. As a result, when the image of the second display type is added to the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means to be displayed, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second prescribed information storage means. The image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed by simply selecting from the above. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  Further, in the sub control means, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image to be additionally displayed defined by the second regulation information in association with the second regulation information. Is stored in the fourth prescribed information storage means. Here, the fourth selecting means selects the fourth specifying information corresponding to the second specifying information selected by the second selecting means from the fourth specifying information storage means, and based on the selected fourth specifying information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified by the transfer information specifying means. Then, before the specified image information to be transferred is used by the first transfer control means in the drawing of the image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, 2 is transferred to the image storage means. This makes it easy to transfer the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, out of the image information necessary for drawing the image to be additionally displayed, which is defined by the second specified information, with respect to the selected second specified information. Therefore, it is possible to reliably draw the image to be additionally displayed based on the second regulation information and display the image on the image display means.

  In any of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the sub-control means is associated with the first regulation information, and among the image information necessary for drawing the image prescribed by the first regulation information, Third prescribed information storing means for storing third prescribed information defining image information to be transferred to the second image storing means, and third prescribed information corresponding to the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means. Is selected from the third specification information storage means, and the first specification information selected by the first selection means is defined by the third specification information selected by the third selection means. A second prescribed information generating unit for generating new prescribed information by adding image information to be transferred to the second image storage unit, and the drawing information specifying unit updates the first pointer unit. For each 2 Based on the new regulation information generated by the regulation information generating means, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and the image to be transferred to the second image storage area. Characterized in that the first transfer control means transfers the image information to be transferred specified by the drawing information specifying means from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. A gaming machine G1.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in the sub control means, the image to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information in correspondence with the first definition information. The third regulation information defining the information is stored in the third regulation information storage means. Here, the third selecting means selects the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means from the third specifying information storage means, and is specified by the selected third specifying information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is added to the first regulation information selected by the first selection means by the second regulation information generation means, and new regulation information is generated. Then, each time the first pointer means is updated, the drawing information specifying means specifies the image information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means, based on the newly generated regulation information. At the same time, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means by the first transfer control means. To be done. As a result, it is possible to easily specify the image information necessary for drawing the image specified by the first specified information with respect to the selected first specified information, and to draw the image specified by the first specified information. Since the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means can be easily specified from among the various image information, the image displayed based on the first prescribed information is surely drawn and displayed on the image display means. Can be made

  In the gaming machine E1, the sub-control means is not retained in the third image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first regulation information in association with the first regulation information. Corresponding to the third prescribed information storage means storing the third prescribed information that regulates the image information as the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, and the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means. A third selecting unit for selecting the third specifying information to be stored from the third specifying information storage unit, and the third specifying unit selected by the third selecting unit for the first specifying information selected by the first selecting unit. Image information to be transferred to the second image storage means defined by information, and second defining information generating means for generating new defining information, wherein the drawing information specifying means includes the first pointer. Means updated Each time, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the new prescribed information generated by the second prescribed information generating means, and the second image storage is performed. The image information to be transferred to the area is specified, and the first transfer control means transfers the image information to be transferred specified by the drawing information specifying means from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. A gaming machine G2 characterized by transferring.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in the sub control means, the image information that is not held in the third image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information in correspondence with the first definition information. Third definition information defining the information as image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is stored in the third definition information storage means. Here, the third selecting means selects the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means from the third specifying information storage means, and is specified by the selected third specifying information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is added to the first regulation information selected by the first selection means by the second regulation information generation means, and new regulation information is generated. Then, each time the first pointer means is updated, the drawing information specifying means specifies the image information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means, based on the newly generated regulation information. At the same time, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means by the first transfer control means. To be done. As a result, it is possible to easily specify the image information necessary for drawing the image specified by the first specified information with respect to the selected first specified information, and to draw the image specified by the first specified information. Since the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means because it is not held in the third image storage means can be easily specified, the image information is displayed based on the first prescribed information. An image can be surely drawn and displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the third definition information defines image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each unit time when an image for one screen is displayed on the image display means. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine G3, the third definition information defines the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each unit time when one screen image is displayed on the image display means. The second specified information generating means sets the image information to be transferred in one unit time out of the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means specified by the third specified information selected by the third selecting means. It is possible to easily generate new regulation information by adding it to the drawing information for one screen to be displayed in the one unit time prescribed by the one regulation information.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the third prescribed information storage means stores the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means out of the image information necessary for drawing the image prescribed by the first prescribed information. If it does not exist, the third regulation information corresponding to the first regulation information is not stored, and the drawing information specifying means stores the third regulation information corresponding to the first regulation information selected by the first regulation means. If the third selecting means determines that the data is not stored in the third specifying information storage means, the updated first pointer is based on the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means. A gaming machine G4 characterized by specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, if there is no image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, out of the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first regulation information, the first regulation information is dealt with. The third regulation information is not stored in the third regulation information storage means. If the third selecting means determines that the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first specifying means is not stored in the third specifying information storage means, the drawing information specifying means determines , The drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means. Accordingly, when the third regulation information is not stored, it is possible to easily specify the drawing information of the image to be displayed using the first regulation information selected by the first selecting means. The processing load can be lightened as compared with the case where the drawing information of the image to be displayed is specified from the new specified information generated by the 2 specified information generating means.

  In any of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the sub-control means additionally displays the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from a plurality of display modes. Second display determining means for determining a display type, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in each of the plurality of second display types, for each screen. Of the second prescribed information storage means for storing the prescribed second prescribed information and the image information necessary for drawing the image to be additionally displayed prescribed by the second prescribed information in correspondence with the second prescribed information, Fourth definition information storage means storing fourth definition information defining image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, and the fourth display information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determination means. Before the second regulation information Second selecting means for selecting from the second specifying information storing means and fourth selecting means for selecting, from the fourth specifying information storing means, the fourth specifying information corresponding to the second specifying information selected by the second selecting means. And drawing information of an image to be additionally displayed defined by the second defining information selected by the second selecting means, for each screen, with respect to the first defining information selected by the first selecting means. In addition to the addition, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means defined by the fourth definition information selected by the fourth selection means is added to generate new definition information. The drawing information specifying means, based on the new regulation information generated by the third regulation information generating means, every time the first pointer means is updated, the updated first pointer. hand And the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the first transfer control means determines the transfer information specified by the drawing information specifying means. A game machine G5, characterized in that image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in the sub-control means, the second display type added to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from the plurality of display modes is the second display determination means. Determined by Further, the second specified information storage means is provided for each of the plurality of second display types, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type is specified for each screen. The second regulation information is stored. Here, the second specifying information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specifying information storage means by the second selecting means. Further, the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed which is defined by the second defining information selected by the second selecting unit with respect to the first defining information selected by the first selecting unit by the third defining information generating unit. Is added to each screen, new regulation information is generated. Then, each time the drawing information specifying means updates the first pointer means, one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the new specifying information generated by the first specifying information generating means. Minute drawing information is specified. As a result, when the image of the second display type is added to the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means to be displayed, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second prescribed information storage means. If selected from the above, the image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  In the sub control means, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is defined among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the second definition information in association with the second definition information. The 4th regulation information is stored in the 4th regulation information storage means. Here, the fourth selecting means selects the fourth specifying information corresponding to the second specifying information selected by the second selecting means from the fourth specifying information storing means, and is specified by the selected fourth specifying information. Image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, together with drawing information for each screen of an image to be additionally displayed, which is defined by the second definition information selected by the second selection means, and third definition information generation means. Thus, new regulation information is generated in addition to the first regulation information selected by the first selecting means. Then, each time the first pointer means is updated, the drawing information specifying means specifies the image information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means, based on the newly generated regulation information. At the same time, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means by the first transfer control means. To be done. With this, it is possible to easily specify the image information to be transferred to the second image storage unit, out of the image information necessary for drawing the image specified by the second specified information, with respect to the selected second specified information. Therefore, it is possible to reliably draw an image to be additionally displayed based on the second regulation information and display the image on the image display means.

  In any of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the first prescribed information stored in the first prescribed information storage means is in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type, Of the image information necessary for drawing the image of the display type, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is defined, and the drawing information specifying means is provided every time the first pointer means is updated. , The drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means should be specified based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means, and transferred to the second image storage area. The image information is specified, and the first transfer control means transfers the image information specified by the drawing information specifying means to be transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. Do Tricks machine H1.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the first specified information stored in the first specified information storage means is necessary for drawing the image of the display type in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is defined among the various image information. Then, each time the drawing information specifying means updates the first pointer means, based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means, one screen portion corresponding to the updated first pointer means is displayed. The drawing information is specified, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified transfer image information is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image by the first transfer control means. It is transferred to the storage means. This makes it possible to easily determine the image information that is necessary for the selected first specified information and that should be transferred to the second image storage unit, and transfer it to the second image storage unit. Therefore, the image displayed based on the first regulation information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine E1, the first specified information stored in the first specified information storage means is necessary for drawing the image of the display type in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type. Of the image information, image information that is not held in the third image storage means and is to be transferred to the second image storage means is defined, and the drawing information specifying means updates the first pointer means. Each time, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the first specified information selected by the first selecting means, and the drawing information is stored in the second image storage area. Image information to be transferred is specified, and the first transfer control means transfers the image information to be transferred specified by the drawing information specifying means from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. Featuring That the gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the first specified information stored in the first specified information storage means is necessary for drawing the image of the display type in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type. Image information that is not held in the third image storage means and that should be transferred to the second image storage means is defined. Then, each time the drawing information specifying means updates the first pointer means, based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means, one screen portion corresponding to the updated first pointer means is displayed. The drawing information is specified, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified transfer image information is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image by the first transfer control means. It is transferred to the storage means. With this, it is possible to easily determine the image information that is necessary for the selected first specified information and should be transferred to the second image storage means because it is not held in the third image storage means. Since it can be transferred to the second image storage means, the image displayed based on the first prescribed information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the first definition information defines image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each screen in which drawing information required to draw an image of a corresponding display type is defined. However, the drawing information specifying means corresponds to the updated first pointer means each time the first pointer means is updated, based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means. A gaming machine H3 characterized in that it specifies drawing information for a screen and specifies image information to be transferred to the second image storage area in correspondence with the updated first pointer means.

  According to the gaming machine H3, the first definition information defines the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each screen in which the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type is defined. Therefore, each time the drawing information specifying means updates the first pointer means, one screen portion corresponding to the updated first pointer means is based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means. And the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified corresponding to the updated first pointer means. Thereby, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means can be easily transferred to the second image storage means at a predetermined timing in accordance with the update of the first pointer means, and therefore, based on the first prescribed information. When drawing the first effect to be displayed, it is possible to reliably transfer the image information necessary for the drawing to the second image storage means.

  In any of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the sub-control unit additionally displays the display mode of the display type determined by the first display determination unit from a plurality of display modes. A second display determining unit that determines two display types is provided, and the first defining information stored in the first defining information storage unit includes, in addition to drawing information necessary for drawing an image of the corresponding display type, The drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the second display type to be displayed in addition to the image of the display type is defined for each screen, and the second image is included in the image information necessary for drawing the images. Image information to be transferred to the storage means is defined, and the drawing information specifying means is based on the first defining information selected by the first selecting means each time the first pointer means is updated. And that is updated The drawing information for one screen corresponding to the first pointer means is specified, and the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed on the one screen corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is specified. In this way, the drawing information necessary for the entire image is specified, and further the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified. The first transfer control means specifies the drawing information specifying means. The game machine H4, wherein the image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in the sub-control means, the second display that is additionally displayed on the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from the plurality of display modes The type is determined by the second display determining means. In addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type, the second display displayed in addition to the image of the corresponding display type by the first specified information stored in the first specified information storage means. The drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the type is defined for each screen, and the first specified information selected by the first selecting means is updated every time the first pointer means is updated by the drawing information specifying means. Based on this, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and an image to be additionally displayed on one screen corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means. Drawing information is specified, and drawing information required for the entire image is specified. As a result, when the image of the second display type is additionally displayed on the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means, the drawing of the second display type to be additionally displayed is selected from the selected first regulation information. If the information is specified, the image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  In the sub control means, the first specified information stored in the first specified information storage means includes the drawing information necessary for drawing the image and the second image out of the image information necessary for drawing the image. The image information to be transferred to the storage means is specified. The drawing information specifying means specifies the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area every time the first pointer means is updated, and the specified image information to be transferred is the first transfer control means. Is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. This makes it possible to easily determine the image information that is necessary for the selected first specified information and that should be transferred to the second image storage unit, and transfer it to the second image storage unit. Therefore, the image displayed based on the first regulation information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine A6, the main control means sub-controls the first command generation means for generating the first command for confirming the identification information appearing by the dynamic display effect, and the generated various commands. Command transmission means for transmitting the identification information displayed by the dynamic display effect based on receiving the first command from the main control means. And a first time elapse determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed for the dynamic display effect since the display of the dynamic display effect is started, and a first time elapse determination A second time elapse determination means for determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since it was determined that the time has elapsed by the means, and the first display determination means is the second time elapse determination means. If the reception of the first command is not yet accepted at the stage when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the re-operation for dynamically displaying the identification information again as the display type to be displayed on the image display means. A gaming machine I1 characterized by determining a dynamic display effect.

  According to the gaming machine I1, in the sub control means, the identification information appearing by the dynamic display effect is determined by the determination means based on the reception of the first command by the main control means. Based on the confirmed identification information, the gaming machine gives a predetermined game value to the player if the identification information is predetermined identification information. On the other hand, the first time elapse determination means determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed for the dynamic display effect after the display of the dynamic display effect is started, and the first time elapse determination means determines the time. The second time elapse determination means determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since it was determined that Eq. The first display determination means causes the image display means to display the first command if the second time elapse determination means determines that the predetermined time has elapsed and the first command is not yet received. As the display type, it is configured to determine a re-dynamic display effect in which the identification information is dynamically displayed again. As a result, the first selecting information selects the first specified information corresponding to the restart effect from the first specified information storage means, so that the display on the image display means can be easily switched to the restart effect. Further, when the identification information cannot be confirmed because the first command is not accepted from the main control means even after the dynamic display presentation is finished, the identification information is dynamically displayed again. It is possible to make the player recognize that the identification information has not been finalized.

  In the gaming machine I1, the first prescribed information corresponding to the restart effect is displayed on the image display means in a display mode of the restart display effect different from that of the dynamic display effect. A gaming machine I2 which defines image information necessary for drawing an image.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the first regulation information corresponding to the restart effect is displayed so that the display mode of the restart display effect is displayed on the image display means differently from the display mode of the dynamic display effect. Since the image information necessary for drawing is defined, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the re-dynamic display effect has started without the identification information being fixed in the dynamic display effect. ..

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the drawing information specifying means determines the re-dynamic display effect as the first effect by the first display determining means, the first corresponding to the re-dynamic display effect. When the image information necessary for drawing an image is specified over the entire screen defined by the regulation information, the first one screen defined by the first regulation information is recursed and it is necessary to draw the image for each screen. A gaming machine I3 characterized by specifying image information.

  According to the gaming machine I3, the drawing information specifying means, when the first display determining means determines the re-dynamic display effect as the first effect, prescribes in the first stipulation information corresponding to the re-dynamic display effect. When the image information necessary for drawing the image is specified over the entire screen, the image information necessary for drawing the image is specified for each screen by returning to the first one screen specified by the first specified information. Is configured to. As a result, even if the image information necessary for drawing the image is specified as the first specified information corresponding to the re-dynamic display for only a few screens, the re-dynamic display can be repeatedly displayed.

  In the gaming machine A6, the main control means, depending on the type of identification information to be revealed by the dynamic display effect and the identification information to be revealed by the dynamic display effect, the effect mode type of the dynamic display effect. And a second command generating means for generating a second command for notifying the effect mode type of the dynamic display effect determined by the dynamic display effect determining means. Third command generating means for generating a third command for notifying the type of identification information to be revealed by the dynamic display effect determined by the dynamic display effect determining means, and the generated various commands to the sub-control means. Command transmitting means for transmitting, the first display determining means is notified by the second command based on receiving the second command from the main control device. The dynamic display effect corresponding to the effect mode type is displayed on the image display means, and the sub-control means receives the third command transmitted from the main control device. On the basis of the identification information determining means for determining the identification information that appears by the dynamic display effect, the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determining means, and the identification information determining means. The dynamic display discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the identification information is appropriate, and the first display deciding means are configured so that the dynamic display effect and the identification information are appropriate. When it is determined that it is not, the dynamic display effect is changed to a dynamic display effect of an effect mode in which a dynamic display invisible to the player is continuously performed. J1.

  Note that the dynamic display invisible to the player is, for example, a state in which the identification information is dynamically displayed at a high speed such that it is invisible to the player, or the identification information is reduced to an invisible degree and displayed. In addition, various states such as a state in which a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed so as to cover the identification information are displayed are included.

  According to the gaming machine J1, in the main control means, according to the type of identification information to be revealed by the dynamic display effect and the identification information to be revealed by the dynamic display effect, the effect mode type of the dynamic display effect. And are determined by the dynamic display effect determination means. Then, the second command generating means generates a second command for notifying the effect mode type of the dynamic display effect determined by the dynamic display effect determining means, and the third command generating means dynamically generates the second command. A third command for notifying the type of the identification information to be revealed by the dynamic display effect determined by the display effect determining means is generated, and these commands are transmitted to the sub control means by the command transmitting means. On the other hand, in the sub control means, the first display determination means displays a dynamic display effect corresponding to the effect mode type notified by the second command based on the reception of the second command from the main control device. A decision is made to display on the display means. Further, the identification information determined by the dynamic display effect is determined by the identification information determining means based on the reception of the third command transmitted from the main control device. Then, the dynamic display determination unit determines whether the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination unit and the identification information determined by the identification information determination unit are appropriate. When it is determined that the display effect and the identification information are not appropriate, the dynamic display effect is continuously displayed by the first display determining means as a dynamic display that is invisible to the player. Changed to dynamic display performance. Here, if the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination means and the identification information determined by the identification information determination means are not appropriate, there is a possibility that the command cannot be correctly received. In such a case, since the dynamic display effect is displayed in a display mode in which the player cannot continuously see the dynamic display, the dynamic display can be performed without giving the player a special expectation. A display effect can be displayed.

  In the gaming machine J1, the sub-control means appropriately matches the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination means with the dynamic display determination means with the identification information determined by the identification information determination means. If it is determined that the identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect is different from the predetermined identification information, the identification information to be displayed only in a special case. An amusement machine J2, characterized by comprising identification information changing means for changing.

  According to the gaming machine J2, the dynamic display determination means determines that the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination means and the identification information determined by the identification information determination means are not appropriate. The identification information displayed by the dynamic display effect is changed by the identification information changing unit to the identification information different from the predetermined identification information and displayed only in a special case. Here, such a situation may have occurred because the command could not be correctly received, and in practice, a game value may be given to the player. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J2, in such a case, the identification information that is not the predetermined identification information that gives the player a predetermined game value, but that appears only in a special case is played. Since it can be visually recognized by the player, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of game value is added.

  In the gaming machine A6, the first prescribed information corresponding to the dynamic display effect is displayed as the information for identifying the identification information to be displayed for each screen up to a predetermined screen in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect. The offset information from the identification information is defined, and after the predetermined screen, the offset information from the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first definition information is defined. Is an identification information storage unit that stores the previous identification information that identifies the identification information that was displayed in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect, and the identification that is displayed in the dynamic display effect based on the command from the main control unit. Identification information determining means for determining information, wherein the drawing information specifying means determines that the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means is the first prescribed information corresponding to the dynamic display effect. In addition, up to a predetermined screen corresponding to the changed first pointer unit, the immediately preceding dynamic display effect defined by the previous identification information stored in the identification information storage unit and the first defining information. The identification information to be displayed on one screen is specified on the basis of the offset information from the identification information displayed in step (1). After the predetermined screen, the identification information determined by the identification information determination means and the first information are displayed. Specifying the identification information to be displayed on one screen based on the offset information from the identification information that is displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first regulation information, which is defined by the first regulation information. A gaming machine K1 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the first prescribed information corresponding to the dynamic display effect is displayed as the information for identifying the identification information to be displayed for each screen up to the predetermined screen in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect. The offset information from the identification information is defined, and after the predetermined screen, the offset information from the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first defined information is defined. Then, in the sub-control means, the previous identification information for identifying the identification information that has appeared in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect is stored in the identification information storage means, and based on the command from the main control means, the dynamic display The identification information to be revealed by the effect is determined by the identification information determining means. Here, the drawing information specifying means corresponds to the changed first pointer means when the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means is the first prescribed information corresponding to the dynamic display effect. Up to a predetermined screen, one screen based on the previous identification information stored in the identification information storage means and the offset information from the identification information that appears in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect defined by the first defining information The identification information to be displayed on the display screen is specified, and after the predetermined screen, the dynamic display effect performed based on the identification information determined by the identification information determination means and the first regulation information The identification information to be displayed on one screen is specified on the basis of the offset information from the identification information to be displayed. Here, in the dynamic display effect, it is common to start from the identification information displayed in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect. However, the dynamic display of the identification information in the dynamic display effect by the gaming machine K1. However, while it can be started based on the identification information presented by the immediately preceding dynamic display effect, in this dynamic display effect, it ends based on the identification information determined based on the command from the main control device. Can be made. Therefore, even when the first regulation information is used, it is possible to easily generate an image to be displayed in the dynamic display effect.

  In the first prescribed information corresponding to the dynamic display effect, as the information for specifying the identification information to be displayed for each screen, the offset information from the identification information appearing in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect, The predetermined screen for switching to the offset information from the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first stipulated information is displayed during the period in which the identification information that is invisible to the player is dynamically displayed. A game machine K2 characterized by being set on a screen to be displayed.

  Note that the dynamic display invisible to the player is, for example, a state in which the identification information is dynamically displayed at a high speed such that it is invisible to the player, or the identification information is reduced to an invisible degree and displayed. In addition, various states such as a state in which a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed so as to cover the identification information are displayed are included.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in the first prescribed information corresponding to the dynamic display effect, as the information for specifying the identification information to be displayed for each screen, from the identification information appearing in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect. A predetermined screen that is switched from the offset information to the offset information from the identification information that appears in the dynamic display effect that is performed based on the first specified information is dynamically displayed as the identification information that is invisible to the player. Since it is set on the screen displayed during the period, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the switching, and it is possible for the player to continue playing the game without feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, each of the identification information is given a unique number, and the offset information defined for each screen is the identification information presented in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect. Should be displayed on one screen corresponding to the number attached to the number or the number attached to the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first prescribed information in which the offset information is prescribed. A gaming machine K3 characterized by showing a difference from a number attached to the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine K3, a unique number is attached to the identification information, and the number attached to the identification information appearing in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect by the offset information specified for each screen, Alternatively, a number attached to the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first prescribed information in which the offset information is prescribed, and a number attached to the identification information to be displayed on the corresponding one screen. Since the difference is shown, the identification information to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing the identification information with the number attached to the identification information.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B4, C1 to C3, D1 to D3, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I3, J1, J2, K1 to K3, The gaming machine L1 wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B4, C1 to C3, D1 to D3, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I3, J1, J2, K1 to K3, The gaming machine L2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow a ball to be won, and a value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B4, C1 to C3, D1 to D3, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I3, J1, J2, K1 to K3, A gaming machine L3, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10 slot machines (gaming machines)
65 Auxiliary display section (image display means)
81 Display control device (sub control means)
101 main control device (main control means)
187 Character ROM (first image information storage means)
188 Image controller (image drawing means)
189 Resident video RAM (third image information storage means)
190 Normal video RAM (second image information storage means)
200 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
281 Third symbol display device (image display means)
310 Main control device (main control means)
313 Voice lamp control device (part of sub-control means)
314 Display control device (part of sub-control means)
423a Reserved ball number counter (standby number storage means)
432a data table storage area (first prescribed information storage means, second prescribed information storage means, third prescribed information storage means)
434 Character ROM (first image information storage means)
435 Resident Video RAM (Third Image Information Storage Means)
436 Normal video RAM (second image information storage means)
437 Image controller (image drawing means)
S1213 (first command generating means)
S1302 to S1305 (dynamic display effect determination means)
S1306 (second command generating means)
S1307 (third command generating means)
S1701 (command transmission means)
S2202, S2203 (part of second transfer control means)
S2507 Confirm command processing (confirmation means)
S2508 (part of first display determining means)
S2510 (part of first display determining means)
S2515 (second display determining means)
S2621 (part of the first selecting means)
S2622 (Part of second selection means, third selection means)
S2633 (part of the second selecting means)
S2631 (part of the first selecting means)
S2632 (part of the third selecting means)
S2641 (identification information determining means)
S2652 (part of the second selecting means)
S2711 Pointer update processing (first pointer means, second pointer means, third pointer means)
S2712 (Drawing information specifying means)
S2714 (First time elapse determination means)
S2715 (part of first display determining means)
S2716 (Part of the first selecting unit, part of the second selecting unit, part of the third selecting unit)
S2721 (identification information storage means)
S2722 (part of first display determining means)
S2730 (second time passage determination means, part of first display determination means)
S2731 (part of first selecting means, part of second selecting means, part of third selecting means)
S2783 (Part of first display determining means, dynamic display determining means)
S2785 (Identification information changing means)
S2724 (Part of the first selection means)
S2731 (part of first selecting means, part of second selecting means, part of third selecting means)
S2784 (Part of first selecting means, part of second selecting means, part of third selecting means)
S3002 Resident image transfer setting process (part of second transfer control means)
S3003 Normal image transfer setting process (first transfer control means)
S3201 (transfer information specifying means)
S3301 (drawing instruction information generating means, instruction information generating means)

The present invention relates to Yu technique machine.

Conventionally, in the Yu technique machine, control the gaming machine is configured to perform the main control means and the sub-control means. For example, while the main control of the game is performed by the main control means, the sub-control means controls the display of the effect image on the image display means such as a liquid crystal display device provided in the gaming machine.

In recent years, in order to further interest improvement of the game, an effect image to be displayed on the image display unit tends to be diversified.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the process with a wide variety of effect images is a problem that there is a possibility you complicated and thickened.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, a main control means for performing main control of the game, a sub-control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and its sub-control. Image display means for displaying an image based on the control of the means, wherein the sub-control means draws an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and the image. First image storage means for storing a plurality of image information used for drawing an image by the drawing means, and a predetermined display for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means in response to a predetermined command received from the main control means. First display specifying means for specifying a mode from a plurality of display modes, and first specified information storage for storing first specified information specifying drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing each display mode for each screen. means , A first specifying unit that specifies the first prescribed information corresponding to the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying unit, an updating unit that is updated every predetermined time elapses, and the updating unit is updated. Drawing instruction information that generates drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the updated drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means. The image drawing unit includes a generating unit and a measuring unit capable of measuring time, and based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating unit, the image drawing unit generates an image for one screen using image information. What is drawn, the display mode to dynamically display the identification information on the image display means, for each display mode, the time required from the start to the end of the dynamic display is predetermined, Said vice The control means continues to display when the required time elapses after the display is started in the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means, and is used for the dynamic continuous display of the identification information. When the command transmitted from the main control means is the predetermined command, the sub-control means that has received the predetermined command includes the identification information of the time corresponding to the predetermined command. The dynamic display of is executed in a specific display mode, and the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means is a display mode of any required time. The display mode of the dynamic continuous display of the identification information, which is continuously displayed, is the same display mode in which the identification information repeats a predetermined movement, and the sub-control unit is more specific than the main control unit. The fixed display control means for fixedly displaying the identification information on the image display means when a constant command is received, and the required time after the display is started in the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means. The dynamic continuation display control means for starting the dynamic continuation display of the identification information when the specific command is not received even after lapse of time, and the fixed display control means, the dynamic continuation of the identification information. When a specific command is received from the main control means during the display period, the dynamic continuous display of the identification information is ended and the identification information is confirmed and displayed .

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub-control means that operates based on the command transmitted from the main control means, and the image based on the control by the sub-control means be those with an image display means for displaying said sub-control means includes image drawing means for drawing an image of one screen to be displayed on the image display means, for drawing an image by the image drawing means A first image storage means for storing a plurality of image information used, and a predetermined display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means in response to a predetermined command received from the main control means. First display specifying means for specifying from the inside, first specifying information storage means for storing first specifying information specifying drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing in each display mode for each screen, and the first display Identification means First specifying means for specifying the first specified information corresponding to the more specified predetermined display mode, updating means for updating every predetermined time, and updating for each updating of the updating means. Drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updating means, and timing the time. The image drawing means draws an image for one screen by using the image information based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. In the display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the image display unit, the time required from the start to the end of the dynamic display is predetermined for each display mode, and the sub-control unit is First display Second specifying means for specifying the first prescribed information used for the dynamic continuous display of the identification information, which is continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed since the display was started in the predetermined display mode specified by the setting means When the command transmitted from the main control unit is the predetermined command, the sub-control unit receiving the predetermined command displays a dynamic display of the identification information of the time corresponding to the predetermined command as a specific display. The identification is performed in an aspect, and the predetermined display aspect identified by the first display identifying means is displayed continuously when the required time elapses, regardless of the required aspect of the display aspect. The display mode of the dynamic continuous display of information is the same display mode in which the identification information repeats a predetermined movement, and the sub control unit receives a specific command from the main control unit. In addition, the fixed display control means for fixedly displaying the identification information on the image display means, and the predetermined time even after the start of the display in the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means, Dynamic continuation display control means for starting dynamic continuation display of the identification information when a specific command is not received, wherein the finalized display control means is the main continuation display period during the dynamic continuation display period of the identification information. When the specific command is received from the control means, the dynamic continuous display of the identification information is terminated and the identification information is confirmed and displayed. Therefore , it is possible to easily diversify the display mode displayed on the image display means. The effect is that you can.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B4, C1 to C3, D1 to D3, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I3, J1, J2, K1 to K3, A gaming machine L3, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
(Other)
Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a slot machine is configured to control the gaming machine by a main control means and a sub control means. For example, while main control of the game is performed by the main control means, display control of an effect image on the image display means such as a liquid crystal display device provided in the game machine is performed by the sub-control means (Patent Document 1: Special Feature). Kai 2006-223598).
Here, in the sub-control means in the conventional gaming machine, based on the reception of the command transmitted from the main control means, activates a program for displaying an effect image according to the command on the image display means, The display is controlled according to the program.
On the other hand, in recent years, in order to further enhance the enjoyment of the game, there is a tendency that the effect images displayed on the image display means are diversified.
However, in the conventional gaming machine, the program is configured to be started for each effect image to be displayed on the image display means, so that the start and execution of the program, which is complicated and enormous with the diversification of effect images, Since a large load is applied to the processing, there is a problem in that the processing capacity of the sub-control unit is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images.
The present technical idea is made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and a gaming machine capable of easily diversifying display modes of effect images displayed on the image display means. Is intended to provide.

Claims (1)

The main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub-control means that operates based on the command transmitted from the main control means, and the image display means for displaying an image based on the control by the sub-control means It was a gaming machine,
The sub-control means is
Image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means,
First display determining means for determining a display type to be displayed for a command received from the main control means from a plurality of display modes;
A first stipulated information storage unit which is provided for each of the plurality of display types, and stores first stipulated information that stipulates, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type;
First selecting means for selecting, from the first specifying information storage means, the first specifying information corresponding to the display type determined by the first display determining means,
A first pointer means that is updated each time a time elapses;
Every time the first pointer means is updated, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means. Drawing information specifying means,
Drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means. Prepare,
The game machine, wherein the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.

Images